Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.7 - Global Software Inc Server User Manual Version 14.7.2 Worldwide ... HENRY trademarks are owned by Jack Henry & Associates, Inc. Lawson and Movex

Global Software, Inc.'sSpreadsheet Server

User Manual

Version 14.7.3

Worldwide Headquarters3301 Benson DriveRaleigh, NC 27609 USA+1.919.872.7800www.globalsoftwareinc.com

EMEA/APAC Headquarters16 Upper Woburn PlaceLondon, WC1 0BS UK+44.203.793.7811

Spreadsheet Server

All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, ormechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the writtenpermission of the publisher.

Microsoft, Excel, Windows, Outlook, Office, Word, Access, and SQL Server are all registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation in the United States and/or other countries. IBM, DB2, iSeries and Lotus are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. GroupWise is a registered trademark of Novell. BPCSand INFINIUM are registered trademarks of Infor Global Solutions in the United States and/or other countries. JACKHENRY trademarks are owned by Jack Henry & Associates, Inc. Lawson and Movex are registered trademarks ofLawson Software, Inc. and its affiliates. MRI Software and MRI are registered trademarks of MRI Software LLC and itsaffiliated companies. Oracle, JD Edwards, and PeopleSoft are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or itsaffiliates. Salesforce is a trademark of salesforce.com, inc. and is used here with permission. SAP is a registeredtrademark of SAP AG. Trade names referenced are the service marks, trademarks, or registered trademarks of theirrespective manufacturers in the United States and/or other countries. Global Software, Inc. is not associated oraffiliated in any manner with the respective owners of the foregoing trademarks, trade names or service marks unlessexpressly stated otherwise. The respective owners of the foregoing trademarks, trade names or service marks have notendorsed, certified or approved any of Global Software, Inc.'s products for use in connection with their respectiveproducts. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume noresponsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this documentor from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author beliable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectlyby this document.

Printed: Monday, April 09, 2018

IContents

© 2018 ... Global Software, Inc.

Table of Contents

Part I Spreadsheet Server Introduction 1

................................................................................................................................... 21 General Ledger Reporting Overview

................................................................................................................................... 32 Query / Query Designer Overview

................................................................................................................................... 43 Distribution Manager Overview

................................................................................................................................... 54 Spreadsheet Writeback Overview

................................................................................................................................... 65 Profile Scheduler Overview

Part II Installation and Registration 7

................................................................................................................................... 71 Additional Components

................................................................................................................................... 102 Register Add-In

................................................................................................................................... 113 Uninstall Process

Part III Navigation 12

................................................................................................................................... 131 SS Ribbon

................................................................................................................................... 182 SS Right Click Context Menu

Part IV Sign On 20

Part V Control Panel 21

Part VI SS Settings 25

Part VII GL Reporting 41

................................................................................................................................... 421 Build a Template

.......................................................................................................................................................... 47Build a Template GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet

.......................................................................................................................................................... 48Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only

.......................................................................................................................................................... 49Build a Template GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data

................................................................................................................................... 502 Formula Assistant

................................................................................................................................... 563 GXL Formula for Account Values

................................................................................................................................... 574 Account Segment Syntax

................................................................................................................................... 585 List Accounts for a GXL Formula

................................................................................................................................... 596 Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula

................................................................................................................................... 617 Expand/Collapse Row by Segment for a GXL Formula

................................................................................................................................... 638 Locate Segment

................................................................................................................................... 659 Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists

.......................................................................................................................................................... 65Create/Maintain Segment Lists

.......................................................................................................................................................... 69Using Segment Lists or Hierarchy Values in a GXL Formula

.......................................................................................................................................................... 70SSLDESC Formula

.......................................................................................................................................................... 71View or Modify Segment List Values from within Excel

Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.7.3II


................................................................................................................................... 7210 Calculations

.......................................................................................................................................................... 72Calculation Options

.......................................................................................................................................................... 73View/Refresh Local Cache

.......................................................................................................................................................... 75View/Refresh Global Cache

.......................................................................................................................................................... 77Disable/Enable Formula Calculations

................................................................................................................................... 7811 Drill Down Functionality

.......................................................................................................................................................... 78General Grid Features

......................................................................................................................................................... 81Copy/Export Records

......................................................................................................................................................... 82Copy to Excel w ith Layout

.......................................................................................................................................................... 84Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances

......................................................................................................................................................... 85Drill Dow n - Group By Segment

......................................................................................................................................... 86Drill Dow n - Expand by Segment

.......................................................................................................................................................... 87Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances

.......................................................................................................................................................... 88Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances

.......................................................................................................................................................... 89Drill Down to Journals per Account(s)

.......................................................................................................................................................... 91Drill Down to Journal Entry Lines

.......................................................................................................................................................... 92Drill Down to Detail Journal Entry Lines

.......................................................................................................................................................... 93Drill Down to Subsystem Detail

.......................................................................................................................................................... 94Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc

................................................................................................................................... 9512 Miscellaneous Features

.......................................................................................................................................................... 95Account Security

.......................................................................................................................................................... 97List Accounts

.......................................................................................................................................................... 98Expand Detail Reports (GXE)

......................................................................................................................................................... 99Expand to Account Balances

......................................................................................................................................................... 102Expand to Journals

.......................................................................................................................................................... 105Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet

.......................................................................................................................................................... 106Hide Rows with Zero Balances

.......................................................................................................................................................... 107Reset Host Server Connection

.......................................................................................................................................................... 108SS Validation

.......................................................................................................................................................... 109SS View Log

.......................................................................................................................................................... 111Upgrade Segment List

.......................................................................................................................................................... 112Upgrade Workbook

.......................................................................................................................................................... 113User Defined Functions

................................................................................................................................... 11413 Analyst

.......................................................................................................................................................... 114Analyst Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 116Analyst Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 117Analyst Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 118Analyst GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 120Analyst GXD

................................................................................................................................... 12114 BPCS

.......................................................................................................................................................... 121BPCS Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 122BPCS 4.05 Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 124BPCS 6.02 Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 126BPCS 6.04+ Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 128BPCS Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 129BPCS GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 131BPCS GXD

.......................................................................................................................................................... 132BPCS 6+ GSV

.......................................................................................................................................................... 133BPCS GXA

.......................................................................................................................................................... 136BPCS Load Local Data

................................................................................................................................... 13715 Data Warehouse

.......................................................................................................................................................... 137Data Warehouse Sign On

IIIContents


.......................................................................................................................................................... 138Data Warehouse Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 139Data Warehouse Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 140Data Warehouse GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 142Data Warehouse GXD

................................................................................................................................... 14316 Designer GL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 143Designer GL Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 144Designer GL Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 146Designer GL Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 147Designer GL GXL

................................................................................................................................... 14917 Infinium

.......................................................................................................................................................... 149Infinium Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 150Infinium Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 151Infinium Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 153Infinium GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 156Infinium GXD

................................................................................................................................... 15718 Jack Henry

.......................................................................................................................................................... 157JH Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 158JH Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 160JH Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 161JH GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 163JH GXD

................................................................................................................................... 16419 JD Edwards

.......................................................................................................................................................... 164JDE Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 165JDE Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 167JDE Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 168JDE Formula Assistant for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 170JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES

.......................................................................................................................................................... 171JDE GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 173JDE GXD

.......................................................................................................................................................... 175JDE GXSALES

.......................................................................................................................................................... 177JDE GXSALES Drill Down

.......................................................................................................................................................... 178JDE Fixed Asset Balances

.......................................................................................................................................................... 179JDE FASTR Report Conversion

................................................................................................................................... 18120 Lawson

.......................................................................................................................................................... 181Lawson Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 182Lawson Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 183Lawson Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 184Lawson GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 186Lawson GXD

................................................................................................................................... 18721 Movex

.......................................................................................................................................................... 187Movex Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 188Movex Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 189Movex Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 190Movex GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 192Movex GXD

................................................................................................................................... 19322 Oracle

.......................................................................................................................................................... 193Oracle Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 195Oracle Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 197Oracle Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 199Oracle GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 201Oracle GXD

.......................................................................................................................................................... 202Segment Mapping

Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.7.3IV


................................................................................................................................... 20323 PeopleSoft

.......................................................................................................................................................... 203PSoft Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 205PSoft Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 206PSoft Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 207PSoft GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 209PSoft GXD

................................................................................................................................... 21024 SAP

.......................................................................................................................................................... 210SAP Sign On

.......................................................................................................................................................... 211SAP Ledger Specifics

.......................................................................................................................................................... 213SAP Build a Template for GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 214SAP GXL

.......................................................................................................................................................... 218SAP GXD

Part VIII Query 220

................................................................................................................................... 2211 Build a Template for Queries

.......................................................................................................................................................... 226SAP Explorer

................................................................................................................................... 2292 Formula Assistant for Queries

................................................................................................................................... 2343 GEXQ Formula

................................................................................................................................... 2374 GEXD Formula

.......................................................................................................................................................... 240GEXD Targeting a Cell

.......................................................................................................................................................... 242GEXD Targeting a Range

.......................................................................................................................................................... 244GEXD Targeting a Table

.......................................................................................................................................................... 246Custom Layout Editor

.......................................................................................................................................................... 249Execute Query w ithout a GEXD Formula

.......................................................................................................................................................... 251Execute SAP T-Code without a GEXD Formula

................................................................................................................................... 2545 GEXS Formula

................................................................................................................................... 2576 GEXI Formula

................................................................................................................................... 2607 Execute Lookup

................................................................................................................................... 2618 Download Queries from Query Exchange

Part IX Query Designer 263

................................................................................................................................... 2631 Query Designer Architecture

.......................................................................................................................................................... 264QD Ribbon

.......................................................................................................................................................... 268Explorer File System Panel

......................................................................................................................................................... 269Query Menu

.......................................................................................................................................................... 270Query View Panel

......................................................................................................................................................... 271Table Menu

......................................................................................................................................................... 272Table Field Menu

.......................................................................................................................................................... 273Field List Panel

......................................................................................................................................................... 274Field List Menu

......................................................................................................................................................... 275Builder Panel

......................................................................................................................................... 278Custom Buttons

.......................................................................................................................................................... 279Query Parameters Panel

.......................................................................................................................................................... 280Method Parameters Panel

.......................................................................................................................................................... 281SQL Text Panel

.......................................................................................................................................................... 282QuickText Panel

.......................................................................................................................................................... 283SAP Panel

................................................................................................................................... 2842 QD Settings

................................................................................................................................... 2883 Connections

VContents


.......................................................................................................................................................... 289Update Query Connections

................................................................................................................................... 2904 Create a New Query

................................................................................................................................... 2915 Save the Query for the First Time

................................................................................................................................... 2926 Add Tables

................................................................................................................................... 2947 Create Relationships

................................................................................................................................... 2968 Select or Create Query Fields

.......................................................................................................................................................... 297Fields Used Direct from Source Table

......................................................................................................................................................... 298Add Image Field Type

......................................................................................................................................................... 299Preview Data

.......................................................................................................................................................... 300Assign Aliases to Fields

.......................................................................................................................................................... 302Create/Edit Calculated Fields

......................................................................................................................................................... 303Select Fields from a Table

......................................................................................................................................................... 305Create Date Fields

......................................................................................................................................................... 307Use the CASE Builder

......................................................................................................................................................... 312GEXD Row

......................................................................................................................................................... 314Get Values

................................................................................................................................... 3169 Add Criteria

.......................................................................................................................................................... 316Hard Coded Criteria

.......................................................................................................................................................... 317Create and Use Parameters

......................................................................................................................................................... 317Parameters in Query Designer vs Excel

......................................................................................................................................................... 318Standard Parameters in the Query Designer

......................................................................................................................................... 320Use Parameter to Supply Database/Library Name

......................................................................................................................................................... 321Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules

......................................................................................................................................................... 322Smart Parms in the Query Designer

......................................................................................................................................................... 324Parameters in Excel

.......................................................................................................................................................... 325Sub Query Column

.......................................................................................................................................................... 327Assign Query

.......................................................................................................................................................... 328GEXD Limit

................................................................................................................................... 32910 Create a Totals (Group By) Query

................................................................................................................................... 33111 Create the GEXQ Field

................................................................................................................................... 33212 SQL SHELL Function

................................................................................................................................... 33313 Execute Query

................................................................................................................................... 33414 Legacy Ad Hoc Queries

................................................................................................................................... 33515 Query Management

.......................................................................................................................................................... 336Download or Send Query Exchange Queries

.......................................................................................................................................................... 337Textual Query Definition

................................................................................................................................... 33916 QD View Log

Part X Distribution Manager 340

................................................................................................................................... 3401 DM Navigation

.......................................................................................................................................................... 341DM Ribbon

.......................................................................................................................................................... 342DM Right Click Context Menu

................................................................................................................................... 3432 DM Settings

................................................................................................................................... 3473 Create a Distribution Control Worksheet

................................................................................................................................... 3554 Add Specification Rows

................................................................................................................................... 3565 Maintain Specification Rows

................................................................................................................................... 3576 Distribute Specifications

Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.7.3VI


................................................................................................................................... 3587 Miscellaneous DM Items

.......................................................................................................................................................... 358Merge Data

.......................................................................................................................................................... 360Narrative Reporting

......................................................................................................................................................... 362Distributor Ribbon

......................................................................................................................................................... 363Distributor Formula Assistant

......................................................................................................................................................... 364Preview Narrative Reporting Results

.......................................................................................................................................................... 366Cache Address Book

.......................................................................................................................................................... 367Local Address List

.......................................................................................................................................................... 368DM View Log

Part XI Spreadsheet Writeback 370

................................................................................................................................... 3701 SWB Ribbon

................................................................................................................................... 3722 Oracle APIs Writeback Setup

.......................................................................................................................................................... 373Oracle APIs - Build a Template

......................................................................................................................................................... 374Single API Method

......................................................................................................................................................... 377Template Method

.......................................................................................................................................................... 378Builder Sheet

.......................................................................................................................................................... 379Loader Sheet

................................................................................................................................... 3813 Generic Tables Writeback Setup

.......................................................................................................................................................... 382Browse for Database

.......................................................................................................................................................... 385Generic Tables - Build a Template

.......................................................................................................................................................... 388Generic Tables - Data Rows

.......................................................................................................................................................... 389Generic Tables - Writeback Definition Example

.......................................................................................................................................................... 390Generic Tables - Remove Writeback Database Connection

.......................................................................................................................................................... 391Generic Tables - Delete Writeback Definition

................................................................................................................................... 3924 JD Edwards Writeback Setup

.......................................................................................................................................................... 393JD Edwards - Select Orchestration

.......................................................................................................................................................... 395JD Edwards - Data Rows

................................................................................................................................... 3965 Writeback Processing

.......................................................................................................................................................... 397Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows

.......................................................................................................................................................... 399Validate Writebacks

.......................................................................................................................................................... 401Run Writebacks

.......................................................................................................................................................... 404Generic Tables - Delete Data

................................................................................................................................... 4056 Miscellaneous Items

.......................................................................................................................................................... 405SWB View Log

Part XII Profile Scheduler 407

................................................................................................................................... 4091 Address Book Cache

................................................................................................................................... 4102 Distribution Manager

................................................................................................................................... 4133 Custom Table Loads

.......................................................................................................................................................... 418Build Select Query

.......................................................................................................................................................... 419Manage Method Parameters

.......................................................................................................................................................... 420Custom Views

................................................................................................................................... 4284 Load Local INF

................................................................................................................................... 4315 Load Local JDE

................................................................................................................................... 4346 Workbook Automation

................................................................................................................................... 4387 Schedule Job

................................................................................................................................... 4418 Define Mapped Drives

VIIContents


................................................................................................................................... 4429 Miscellaneous PS Items

.......................................................................................................................................................... 442PS Settings

.......................................................................................................................................................... 445PS View Log

.......................................................................................................................................................... 446Database Management

Index 447

Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.7.31

1 Spreadsheet Server Introduction

Spreadsheet Server, Powered by the QueryExchange™ (formerly known as Executive Dash or EDASH) is the

backbone of Global Software, Inc.'s Microsoft® Excel-based Automation Roadmap that allows organizations to gain live

and dynamic access from their respective ERP or relational database from within Excel® to data such as: GL, AP, AR,PO, Inventory, Manufacturing, Rent Roll, Sales, Projects, Time & Attendance information and more…

Spreadsheet Server converts Excel into a tightly integrated analytical tool for any ERP system. Users can leverage thestrength of their spreadsheets with seamless dynamic integration to their information, along with powerful drill-downcapability to the lowest level of detail. It allows users to build a range of reports from simple ad hoc workbooks tocomplex dashboard-type views of critical business data. Spreadsheet Server eliminates the re-keying or downloadingof data into the spreadsheet and makes the spreadsheet an integral part of the application.

While maintaining the full functionality of their Excel spreadsheet application, Spreadsheet Server allows the user tomix GL and Non-GL data in a single worksheet. The combination of powerful spreadsheet functions (charting, graphing,text formatting and sorting) and dynamic information provides the basics for building accurate, elegant incomestatements, balance sheets, and other critical statements.

Spreadsheet Server Components The Spreadsheet Server application consists of four components:

Excel Add–In for Financial Reporting across ERP platforms -- Spreadsheet Server formulas used in Excel allowusers to create reports using familiar business and accounting terms, not technical specifications. Query Designer -- A user friendly tool which enables users to design and maintain queries over any relationaldatabase. These queries can be combined with pre-configured formulas in a single Excel spreadsheet. Query Exchange -- An online repository of queries from which the user may download selected queries to the QueryDesigner and then utilize them in Excel. Utilized in the Query Exchange, the SmartPak™ feature is way to grouppre–configured queries together. Distribution Manager -- Eliminating the time-consuming tasks of printing, copying, or creating email attachmentsjust to get information to your end-users, this tool automates the scheduling of report distribution from directly withinExcel. Spreadsheet Writeback -- A powerful tool used to write data from an Excel spreadsheet to a database. Profile Scheduler -- This component allows for scheduling various tasks such as caching the Distribution Manageraddress book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loading local database files.

Spreadsheet Server Licensed Features Access to each component is based upon the licensed features assigned to a user.

General Ledger -- access to General Ledger related formulas in the Excel Add-in component.Query -- access to query related formulas in the Excel Add-In component and access to Query Exchange.Query Designer -- access to the Query Designer and Query Exchange components.Distribution Manager -- access to the Distribution Manager component.Writeback -- access to the Spreadsheet Writeback component.Limited Licensing -- restricts access to various Spreadsheet Server features (i.e. Build a Template, FormulaAssistant, Segment Lists, Locate Segment, List Accounts, Data Validation, and Upgrade Workbook).

Spreadsheet Server Introduction 2

Global Software, Inc.

1.1 General Ledger Reporting Overview

The General Ledger (GL) Reporting feature of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server converts familiar spreadsheetsoftware (Excel) into a tightly integrated analytical tool for financial systems. Spreadsheet Server uses specificformulas to retrieve General Ledger data on the spreadsheet, and gives the user the ability to drill-down to detail.

Features (*)Retrieve dynamic balances based on ledger specific formats and time periods (Period, Quarter, Year-to-Date, etc.)Retrieve balances using single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ fieldRetrieve account descriptionsDrill down to detailed account balancesDrill down to journal detail for selected accountsDrill down to journal lines for a selected journal entryDrill down to subsystem detail for a selected journal entryCopy drill down data and paste into spreadsheets or other documents

(*) Available features vary based upon the selected ledger being processed.

BenefitsLeverage spreadsheet skills and write reports within minutesEliminate requirement for IT or super-users to create/change financial reportsNo more downloading or re-keying of spreadsheet dataReduce number of days to close financial books; save just 3 hours per month per user and the investment is paid forin less than 12 months Publish executive-quality reports from current spreadsheet softwareIncrease the efficiency and timeliness of the budgeting processBuild a complete Executive Information SystemCreate ad hoc reports or perform account analysis within minutesSave financial user's time by combining reporting, account inquiry, and journal inquiry into one application; free uptime for true business analysisPerform corporate consolidations with instant access to dynamic dataReduce external audit time by allowing easier, instant access to financial data with full drill down capabilitiesReconcile accountsPrint or email spreadsheets quickly and easily from a single, central application


1.2 Query / Query Designer Overview

As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server, Query Designer allows users to build queries whichare then used in Excel to seamlessly retrieve critical business data and return the data for use within a spreadsheet.

When using queries in Spreadsheet Server, three components work in conjunction with each other:Query Designer, a visual tool, is used to design and maintain queries. Query Exchange, an online depository of queries, is used to download selected queries to the Query Designer andthen utilize them in Excel.The Excel Add-In component allows the user to execute the Query Designer queries on a spreadsheet, returningdynamic business data.

Access to each component is based upon the licensed features assigned to a user.

Features and BenefitsRetrieve dynamic data within the company's enterprise databases (including Microsoft® Access, DSN systemdatabases, IBM® iSeries™, Oracle®, Salesforce®, SAP® and Microsoft® SQL Server)Build a query using system provided designer toolImport/export pre-configured queries from various sources, including Global's Query ExchangeExecute a query on the fly to ensure data is presented as business needs dictateSimple file system for storing and listing queries in a tree structure, similar to Windows® ExplorerUse data from a spreadsheet as parameters for a queryEasily create formulas in spreadsheets using system provided Build a Template and Formula AssistantPerform dynamic calculations with multi-level drill downs to view associated detailCopy and paste drill down data into spreadsheets



1.3 Distribution Manager Overview

As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server, Distribution Manager is a powerful tool used toautomate document distribution via email, print, or file archive.

Distributing spreadsheets can be a very time-consuming and laborious task. Consider the following issues: A workbook has many worksheets but only select ones are to be distributed. A workbook has external references to other workbooks needed for calculating the proper figures, but linked sheetsare not to be distributed.Worksheets to be distributed contain formulas derived from a specific Excel add-in (such as Spreadsheet Server) orfrom a special Excel macro. The recipients do not have the add-in or macro installed on their PC.Workbooks need to be encrypted to allow/disallow opening or altering of contents.Hours are spent organizing, assembling, calculating, copying and pasting worksheets every reporting cycle.

Distribution Manager takes into account each of the above issues and provides users with an easy and time-savingsolution.

Distribution Manager assembles Distribution Controls directly in workbooks. The number of distribution entries islimited only by the number of rows in a spreadsheet. Once the distribution rows are created, users can visually seeand manage "who gets what" from one worksheet.


1.4 Spreadsheet Writeback Overview

As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s suite of data analytical solutions, Spreadsheet Writeback is a powerful toolused to write data from an Excel® spreadsheet to a database.

Spreadsheet Writeback provides an interface to enable data on worksheets to be written back to a database table. Currently data may be written back to any generic table for which the user has write permissions or to an Oracledatabase via the Oracle public APIs.

Generic Tables Writebacks:During the initial setup process, a database is identified to which to write the data. This database connection isassigned per worksheet, thus it is possible to assign a different database to each worksheet within a workbook.

After the database connection is defined, the user selects the table to which to write the data and identifies thecolumns in the table to populate with data from the spreadsheet. A Writeback definition has a header row that definesthe table name and table fields, plus two columns to hold the date and status of the last writeback. One or moreWriteback definitions may reside on a worksheet.

Once the Writeback definition is defined, data to be written to the database is entered on the spreadsheet. The numberof Writeback rows is limited only by the number of rows in a spreadsheet. The text "SWB>" signifies that the row is tobe written back.

After the data is keyed on the spreadsheet, the Writeback may be run. When running Writebacks, the user may runan individual Writeback, all Writebacks for a selected worksheet, or all Writebacks for the entire workbook. In addition,the user may write all data rows or only selected data rows to the database.

Oracle APIs Writebacks:When writing back to Oracle via an Oracle API, the process is similar to that stated above for a generic table but withvarious differences. Some of the differences include assigning the database connection to the individual writebackinstead of the sheet, and using the text "SWBAPI>" to signify a writeback row.



1.5 Profile Scheduler Overview

The Profile Scheduler component in Spreadsheet Server allows for scheduling various jobs such as caching theDistribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, loading localdatabase files, and running workbooks for Budget Accelerator writebacks or Spreadsheet Analyst reporting.

Available Profile Types:Address Book Cache - caches the address book lists used in Distribution Manager in order to reduce the timerequired to load the email address book.Distribution Manager - refreshes selected workbooks with specified replacement values and/or distributes selectedDistribution Manager workbooks.Custom Table Loads - downloads tables and table data from a source database into a target database allowing foroptimized calculation speeds.Load Local Database Files - downloads account balance information into local databases allowing for optimizedcalculation speeds. This is an excellent option for producing Spreadsheet Server reports once books have beenclosed and the analytical tasks have been performed in real time. The time spent loading the local databases isgreatly offset by the dramatically reduced spreadsheet calculation times.Workbook Automation - processes writebacks for Budget Accelerator workbooks or performs workbook generationfor Spreadsheet Analyst reports.

As Profile Scheduler works with the Microsoft Windows Task Scheduler, reference the chart below for required userright assignments:

Profile Type Creating and manually running a Job-OR-Scheduling a Job-OR-Running a scheduled Job while loggedon

Running a scheduled Job while loggedoff-OR- While logged on and running a Jobunder another account other than thelogged on account

Address Book Cache,Custom Table Loads orLoad Local

No special requirements Administrator Privileges

Distribution Manager,Workbook Automation

No special requirements Not applicable

Note:To verify if a user is part of the Administrator group, from the desktop go to Control Panel>AdministrativeTools>Computer Management. On the Computer Management panel in the tree view go to Local Users andGroups>Groups. Select Administrator and view the properties. Verify that the user is in the group or add the userto the group if necessary.Mapped drives used in any part of the Profile Scheduler process, including Distribution Manager (i.e. File SaveFolder) or Spreadsheet Server (i.e. File Locations), must be defined on the Mapped Drives tab when running andscheduling a job for certain profile types.


2 Installation and Registration

2.1 Additional Components

REQUIRED COMPONENTS

Application ConfiguratorA single installation of the Application Configurator for Spreadsheet Server must be completed by the administrator, andeach user must be established and assigned a valid license key in the Configurator prior to using Spreadsheet Server. Contact the security administrator for the network location of the security and connections file.

Microsoft® .Net FrameworkMicrosoft .Net Framework 4.5.1 is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. This component must be installed prior torunning the Spreadsheet Server setup program.

Microsoft® Visual C++ Redistributable for Visual Studio 2013/2015Microsoft Visual C++ is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. When using Office 2016 version 2015 should beinstalled, otherwise version 2013 should be installed. If it is not installed, then the Spreadsheet Server setup programwill force the install.

Microsoft® Visual Studio Tools for Office RuntimeMicrosoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is not installed,then the Spreadsheet Server setup program will force the install.

Microsoft® Access Database Engine 2010/2016 RedistributableMicrosoft Access Database Engine is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. When using Office 2016 version 2016should be installed, otherwise version 2010 should be installed. If it is not installed, then the Spreadsheet Server setupprogram will force the install.

OPTIONAL COMPONENTSBased upon the database type to which Spreadsheet Server and/or Query Designer is connecting to, additionalsoftware components may be required prior to processing. Contact your IT department to determine what is required tobe installed.

Data Source Name (DSN) DatabaseFrom the desktop, select Start>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>Data Sources (ODBC) to create the DSN.

Installation and Registration 8


iSeries™ DB2® Database

Both the ODBC and the OLEDB Provider components of the IBM® iSeries Access™ for Windows® (formerly named

Client Access Express) must be installed onto each user's PC. Run the setup program within IBM iSeries Access forWindows to determine that the ODBC and OLEDB Provider components are installed.

Microsoft® Access™ DatabaseNo further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to an Access database (.mdb) file.

Microsoft® SQL Server™ DatabaseNo further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to a SQL Server database, as the ODBC driver used isalready loaded with Windows®.

Oracle® ClientNo further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to an Oracle database, as Global provides a directconnection. However, if you desire to connect to the Oracle database via the Oracle Client ODBC provider, then theOracle Client software must be installed on each user's PC. Within Oracle Client configure the local service name, andassign the appropriate host name and port number.


SAP® DatabaseTo access a SAP database in Spreadsheet Server, SAP Netweaver 7.0 or higher must be installed.

Disk space requirements on the server are negligible (less than 10 Meg).The SAP adapter is imported to the system via an SAP transport in the "/ZGLBSOFT/" reserved namespace. This isan SAP approved mechanism for third party software which ensures no standard/custom code is overwritten on thecustomer system.No additional servers or server hardware is required.

OPTIONAL COMPONENTS when using DISTRIBUTION MANAGER

Distributor Outlook Add-InFor Excel 2010 (or above) users utilizing Outlook, Distributor Outlook Add-In is a prerequisite for Distribution Manager. If it is not installed, then the Distribution Manager Settings function will force the installation of Distributor Outlook Add-In prior to allowing the user to select Microsoft® Outlook Exchange as the Email Server option.

Microsoft® Collaboration Data Objects For Excel 2007 users utilizing Outlook, Microsoft Collaboration Data Objects (alias CDO) is a prerequisite forDistribution Manager. If it is not installed, then the Distribution Manager Settings function will force the installation ofCDO prior to allowing the user to select Microsoft Outlook Exchange as the Email Server option.

OPTIONAL COMPONENTS when using PROFILE SCHEDULER

Microsoft® Command Line Utilities for SQL Server® Microsoft Command Line Utilities for SQL Server is an optional component; however, when it is loaded on the samemachine as Profile Scheduler then the Profile Scheduler component takes advantage of the tools in an effort to increaseprocessing speed and performance.

Installation and Registration 10


2.2 Register Add-In

During the install process the system automatically registers and initiates the Spreadsheet Server add-in for Excel. Iffor any reason Spreadsheet Server is not registered during installation, then it must be manually registered. In addition,if multiple users are using Spreadsheet Server on the same PC, then subsequent users must manually register theadd-in. The registration process registers and initiates the add-in for Excel.

Note: If the add-in is not registered on the PC, then Spreadsheet Server will not appear in the list of available add-insfor Excel.

1. From the desktop, click Start>All Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Register Add-In. The RegisterSpreadsheet Server Add-In panel appears.

2. Click OK to register the add-in. A panel appears indicating that the registration process is complete.

3. Click OK.


2.3 Uninstall Process

Generally it is not necessary to uninstall Spreadsheet Server prior to installing new versions. An uninstall should onlybe performed in order to completely remove the product from the PC.

1. Ensure that Excel is not open.

2. From the desktop, click Start>Control Panel>Add or Remove Programs -or- Programs and Features.

3. Select the Spreadsheet Server program and click Change/Remove -or- Uninstall.

Navigation 12


3 Navigation

Spreadsheet Server uses the following navigation methods for processing functions on an Excel spreadsheet. Eachfunction is not always available from each method.

Spreadsheet Server Ribbon (see SS Ribbon)Spreadsheet Server Right Click Context Menu (see SS Right Click Context Menu)

NAVIGATION TIPS:Throughout the manual navigation tips, noted by the convention "NAV TIP", will be listed indicating the various pathsavailable to access a function.


3.1 SS Ribbon

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon isadded in Excel. Use the SS ribbon to access/process functions in the application.

Menu Item Description

Calculation Options Allows the user to change the calculation mode of Excel and specify whenformulas are calculated.

Recalc Recalculates all formulas on the worksheet. Click the down arrow toaccess additional functions (i.e. recalculate formulas for workbook,worksheet or selection, etc.).

Cache Opens the Local Cache panel or Global Cache panel, listing cachedrecords (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. view cacherecords, clear the cache and recalculate -or- recalculate, clear buffer). Note: When using Local Cache, the Cache icon will be yellow. Whenusing Global Cache, the Cache icon will be red when items are pendingand green when all items are calculated/completed.

Navigation 14



Refresh Clears and rebuilds memory of all stored items. Click the down arrow toaccess additional functions for clearing and rebuilding memory forindividual items (i.e. HSegments, queries, SAP T-Codes, segment lists).

Generate Reports Generates detail reports for all GXE and GEXD formulas in the workbook(see Expand to Account Balances, Expand to Journals, and GEXDFormula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. all orselected GXEs, account detail report (see Generate Account Detail forCurrent Sheet), all or selected GEXDs.

Drill Down Based upon the formula in the current active cell and the default actionassigned for the Drill Down button in the user's SS Settings:

Opens the Drill Down panel or a worksheet, displaying account balanceswhich make up the calculated GXL amount(s) (see Drill Down to DetailedAccount Balances and Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances).Opens the Drill Down panel or a worksheet, displaying detail records forthe specified query (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula).Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query(see GEXS Formula).

Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. drill down to panelor worksheet options (see Drill Down to Journals per Account(s) and DrillDown to Selected Ad Hoc), summary drill down (see Drill Down toSummarized Account Balances) and related summary drill down options).



Hide Rows Hides any row in the workbook containing GXL formulas in which the netresult is zero for all cells (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Click thedown arrow to access additional functions (i.e. hide zero rows forworksheet or workbook).

Restore Rows Displays previously hidden rows in the workbook (see Hide Rows with ZeroBalances). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e.restore hidden zero rows for worksheet or workbook).

Expand GL Row Expands the balances for the selected GXL formulas on a row into accountdetails (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). Click the downarrow to access additional functions (i.e. expand row, expand row bysegment or expand all rows).

Collapse GL Row Removes the expanded account detail rows in the selected section (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). Click the down arrow to accessadditional functions (i.e. collapse row, or all rows on the worksheet or inthe workbook).

Formula Assistant Opens the Formula Assistant panel, allowing the user to maintainparameters for a formula (see Formula Assistant and Formula Assistant forQueries.

Navigation 16



Build a Template Opens the Build a Template panel, allowing the user to quickly create atemplate on a worksheet (see Build a Template and Build a Template forQueries). Click the down arrow to access short cuts to the appropriateBuild a Template panel (i.e. General Ledger, Query, SAP Query (SQ00),SAP T-Code (see SAP Explorer).Note: The short cuts available are based upon the user's licensedfeatures, the current General Ledger Type, the assignment of QuickText tothe current and/or Designer GL ledgers and/or to queries, and/or theassignment of T-Codes in the Configurator.

Lookup Click the down arrow to access short cuts to open the Select Item panelwith the values returned from the specified query, allowing the user toselect values to be returned to the spreadsheet (see Execute Lookupwithout a GEXS Formula).

Query Click the down arrow to access short cuts to favorite SAP T-Codes orqueries, allowing the user to select a SAP T-Code and then select thedesired execution variant on the SAP T-Codes pane -or- to select a queryand then enter parameters on the Query pane for executing details for theselected SAP T-Code or query (see Execute SAP T-Code without a GEXDFormula and Execute Query without a GEXD Formula).Note: The short cuts available are based upon the user's licensedfeatures, the Available on Ribbon option setting for queries, theassignment of T-Codes in the Configurator, and the pinning of T-Codes onthe SAP Ledger Specifics Settings panel.

Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to createand/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists).

Locate Segment Opens the Locate A Segment panel, displaying the valid values, @ fieldsor hierarchy values for each account segment.



Tools:

Custom Layouts Opens the Custom Layouts panel, displaying all custom layouts in theworkbook and allowing the user to remove a layout from the workbook(see Custom Layout Editor).

Data Validation Opens the Data Validation panel, allowing the user to create a validationlist for a specific cell in Excel (see SS Validation).

Fix Broken Links Corrects all broken links to the .xll in the workbook.

Select Responsibility For Oracle ledgers only, identifies the default responsibility for GXLformulas, unless the value is overridden in the formula. This value is setwhen an Oracle Default Responsibility is selected during sign on (seeOracle Sign On). Click the displayed responsibility name to change thevalue.

Upgrade Workbook Opens the Upgrade Workbook Options panel, allowing the user to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in a workbook torevised Spreadsheet Server formulas.

Disconnect All OpenConnections

Disconnects all open connections for Spreadsheet Server and queries.

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy logentries, and email or clear the log file (see SS View Log). Click the downarrow to access additional functions (i.e. view log, clear log, or turnenhanced logging on/off).

Settings Opens the Spreadsheet Server Settings panel, allowing the user to definevarious criteria to control processing, to access the Log Viewer or toaccess the online user manual (see SS Settings).

Enabled / Disabled Displays the current status. Click to toggle -orclick the down arrow toaccess individual Enable and Disable options (see Sign on).

Navigation 18


3.2 SS Right Click Context Menu

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a Spreadsheet Server (SS) right click contextmenu is added in the Cell menu for the Normal and Page Layout views in Excel. Use the SS right click context menuto access/process various functions within the application.


Clear Cache and Re-CalcSelected Cells

Clears cache and recalculates the formula for the selected cells on theworksheet (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache).

Drill Down Based upon the formula in the current active cell:Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying account balances which makeup the calculated amount (see Drill Down to Detailed Account Balancesand Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances).Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying detail records for the specifiedquery (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula).Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query(see GEXS Formula).

Summary Drill Down Allows the user to select which account segments to use for grouping orsummarizing accounts when displaying account balances which make upthe single GXL value (see Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances).

Expand GL Row Expands the balances for GXL formulas on a row into account details (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula).

Expand GL Row by Segment Expands the balances for GXL formulas on a row by the selected segment(see Expand/Collapse Row by Segment for a GXL Formula).

Collapse GL Row Removes the expanded account detail rows in the selected section (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula).

List Accounts Opens the List Accounts panel, listing the accounts used in the GXLformula (see List Accounts for a GXL Formula) or allowing the user togenerate a list of existing accounts.

Locate Segment Opens the Locate A Segment panel, displaying the valid values, @ fieldsor hierarchy values for each account segment.

Validation Opens the Data Validation panel, allowing the user to create a validationlist for a specific cell in Excel (see SS Validation).

Generate This Detail Report(GXE)

Generates a detail report for the selected GXE formula (see Expand toAccount Balances and Expand to Journals).



Generate This Detail Report(GEXD)

Executes the selected GEXD formula (see GEXD Formula).

Sign On 20


4 Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel start up, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). Theappropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger.

Note: For Data Warehouse and most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears.

3. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box.

4. Click Login or OK.

Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information:

Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle

BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft

BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP

BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex


5 Control Panel

The Spreadsheet Server Control Panel is a central panel from which multiple functions can be accessed from outsidethe standard Excel interface. These same functions may also be accessed from the Spreadsheet Server ribbon withinExcel. For example, from the Control Panel:

GL reporting users may view account balances for a selected account string, and may subsequently drill down to thejournals and journal entry lines which make up the balance. Query users may view the results of an GEXQ formula, and may also drill down to supporting detail.

To Access the Control Panel:1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Spreadsheet Server Control Panel.

The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger.






2. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, then click Login or OK. The Spreadsheet ServerControl Panel appears.

Control Panel 22


3. Some of the fields on the GL Balances tab will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing isthe same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Spreadsheet Server Control Panel -GL Balances tab, or to access other functions. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledgerspecific GXL information.

Field Description

Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type

Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type

Year Specify the reporting year.

Format Displays PER, indicating the time range for which to retrieve data.

Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number,or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format.

Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Translated, Currency, Ledger(a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts

Designer GL Definition Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which toretrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameterson the panel to match the selected definition.

Account String Key the value for each segment in the account string for the GXL formulaor click the ellipse button to select from a list of valid segment values. Segments will vary based upon the selected ledger. Values may be singlevalue, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (seeAccount Segment Syntax).

GL Balances 0 - 15 Displays the calculated period balances for the selected account string.

Function Description

Generate - GXL Calculates period balances for the selected account string, andsubsequently allows for drilling down to the supporting journals.


Accounts Profile Opens the Accounts Profile panel, allowing the user to view and/ormaintain the list of account strings to which they have access authority (see Account Security).

Settings Opens the Spreadsheet Server Settings panel, allowing the user to definevarious criteria to control processing (see SS Settings).

Help Accesses the online user manual.

Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information:






4. To display balances for the account string, from the ribbon select Generate. Balances are displayed in Period 0 to15 fields.

5. To view account balances, click the corresponding Drill button ( ). The Drill Down panel appears (see Drill Downto Detailed Account Balances).

6. Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Control Panel - Query tab, or to access other functions.

Field Description

Query Name When the query resides in the File System, click the Open From File

button ( ) to navigate to and select the query to be executed.When the query resides in Query Exchange, click the Search Online

button ( ) to navigate to and select the query to be executed (seeDownload Queries from Query Exchange).

Total Field If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click thedown arrow and select the field to be summarized.Note: Only fields assigned an alias appear in the drop down list.

Total Type If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click thedown arrow and select the summary type (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX).

Parameters: The parameter related fields only appear when parameters have beenspecified in the selected query definition.

Display/Use If selected, the query parameter is included in the formula.

Control Panel 24


Field Description

Value Specify the value (i.e. single value, a wildcard, list, range, or segment list)to be used when generating the query results.

Results Displays the calculated value for the selected query.


Generate - GEXQ Calculates a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query inthe Results field, and subsequently allows for drilling down to thesupporting detail (see GEXQ Formulas).


Settings Opens the Spreadsheet Server Settings panel, allowing the user to definevarious criteria to control processing (see SS Settings).

Help Accesses the online user manual.

7. To display the result for the specified query, from the ribbon select Generate. The calculated value displays in theResults field.

8. To view supporting detail, click the corresponding Drill button ( ). The Drill Down panel appears (see GEXQFormulas).


6 SS Settings

Spreadsheet Server (SS) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. The majority of theoptions define processing for all users on the PC; however, various options (auto-start, display tool tips, enhancedlogging, and expand rows) are defined for each individual user. Settings for General Ledger Type, and Segment Lists,Ad Hocs Queries, Designer GL Definitions and EDQ Files locations may be set and/or overridden based uponparameters defined in Application Settings in the Configurator. Various Settings panels are conditional and based uponthe user's licensed features.

1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon select Settings. The Spreadsheet Server Settings - General panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings button on the Control Panel.

SS Settings 26


2. Use the table to enter data on the General panel, or to access other functions.

Field Description

General Options:

General Ledger Type Click the down arrow and select the General Ledger type being used. When not licensed to use the General Ledger feature, the value is set to"None." Note: After a selection is made, the system automatically navigates to theassociated ledger specific panel.

Label Language Click the down arrow and select the language to be used to display labelson various panels (only applies to Build a Template, Formula Assistant,SS ribbon, and right click context menu).

Connection Options:

iSeries/DSN/SQLServer/Oracle Specify the connection protocol to be used to connect to the host system.

Network Security &Connections Files

Click the Browse button and select the location of the security,connections and data services files as specified in the Configurator. Thisfunction is password protected.Note: When in demo mode, select the desired security and connectionsfile in order to switch to standard mode.

Available Environments Specify the environment to be used for processing. This section onlyappears when the Network Security and Connection Files location is onthe network and an available training environment exists.

Standard Options:

Start Automatically WhenExcel Starts

If selected, Spreadsheet Server automatically starts each time Excel isstarted. Otherwise, Spreadsheet Server must be manually started eachtime Excel is started.

Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, oncean error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and de-select the option (see SS View Log).

Override List Separator With Specify the character to use to as the list separator in Excel formulas andin data validation lists. Generally this value should be a comma unlessusing different regional settings. Contact Global for more information.

Override Exclusion CharacterWith

Specify the character to use to indicate when to exclude a value. Thecharacter may not contain ~, @, %, ,̂ *, -, =, [, ], |, ;, ,, . or equal theOverride List Separator With field value.

SQL Timeout Specify the maximum time (in seconds) allowed for a GXL query to run onthe host system.Note: This does not mean that after the specified time the query will stoprunning, but if the data optimizer anticipates that the query will take longerthan the specified time it will immediately issue a message.

Delimiter for Separating From/To Values in a Range

Specify the delimiter for separating from/to values in a range. This defaultsto a period and should only be changed if periods exist in the accountsegment values or query data. This setting applies to ranges used inSpreadsheet Server, Query and Query Designer components.

Display Tooltips If selected, tool tips display on various Spreadsheet Server panels (onlyapplies to Spreadsheet Server Settings, Build a Template, FormulaAssistant, and SAP T-Codes Excel panes).


Field Description

Drill Down Options:

Drill Down Specify when displaying drill down results on a panel whether to use asingle dialog panel per drill down or whether subsequent drill downs appearon a different tab within the same panel.

SSRibbon Drill Down ButtonDefault Action

Specify whether the Drill Down button on the SS ribbon displays results ona panel or pushes results to a worksheet.

Drill Down to Worksheet GoesTo

Specify when pushing drill down results to a worksheet whether to create anew worksheet each time or to reuse the same drill down worksheet.

Drill Down to Worksheet DataGoes To

Specify when pushing drill down results to a worksheet whether to placethe drill down down in a table, range or cell.

Cache:

Cache Type Click the down arrow and select whether to use Local, Global Cache, orGlobal Cache with Redis Technology. Additional options are availablebased upon the cache type selected (see View/Refresh Local Cache orView/Refresh Global Cache).Note: Additional component(s) must be installed to implement either theGlobal Cache or Global Cache with Redis Technology options. ContactGlobal for more information.

Global Cache URL Specify the URL for the global cache.

Redis Server / Database ID /Password

Specify the server, database ID and password associated with the Redisdatabase.

Use SmartCache Buffer If selected, balances from different periods with the same account key maybe returned from an internal buffer to speed up processing. Whenselected, the option, Clear Buffer, appears in the Cache drop down list onthe SS ribbon, allowing the user to clear the internal SmartCache buffer.

Use Shared Cache If selected, shared user data in the cache is used for processing. If notselected, cache records generated by the user are used for processingand user security remains intact.

Auto Refresh Pending Items If selected, any items in the cache which are pending will refresh andcontinue to process. If not selected, any formulas which were pending willcontinue to display 'Pending' in the workbook until manually refreshed tobring in a value.

Button Function

Demo Allows the user to switch from standard to demo mode. The button onlyappears when the user is in standard mode.

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy logentries, and email or clear the log file (see SS View Log).

Maintain Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to createand/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists).

SS Settings 28


3. Use the table to enter data on the GL Reporting panel, or to access other functions.

Field Description

GL Reporting Options:

Drill Down: Include ZeroBalance Accounts with Activity

If selected, accounts with activity but zero balances are included on theaccount balances drill down panel, and in the expand row and GXE results.

Summary Drill Down: Promptfor Processing Criteria

If selected, a prompt panel appears when the Summary Drill Down functionis selected allowing the user to define processing criteria; otherwise,default selection criteria is used.

GXL: Insert Trailing Dash If selected, a dash is appended at the end of the account string.

Template: Default Currency Specify the currency value to default when using Build a Template.

GXE: Last Processing Column Specify the last column GXE formulas will process.

Delimiter for SeparatingAccount Segments

Specify the delimiter for separating account segments.

Expand GL Row FunctionExpands Detail Rows

Specify whether the Expand GL Row function expands detail rows up ordown.

Expand GL Row: Convert nullsegment values to

Specify whether the Expand GL Row function converts null accountsegment values to an asterisk (*) or an empty cell.


Button Function

Maintain Accounts Profile Opens the Accounts Profile panel, allowing the user to view and/ormaintain the list of account strings to which they have access authority (see Account Security).

Refresh Cached Segment Values Refreshes cached GL account segment values.

4. Ledger Specific panels are used to maintain criteria specific to the ledger. Use the following links to access ledgerspecific settings information.





SS Settings 30


5. Use the table to enter data on the Quarters panel.

Field Description

Accounting Quarter Periods:

Monthly Period Quarters Specify the starting/ending period numbers for each of the four quarters. These quarters are referenced in the GXL formula when using the QTRformat.

Daily Period Quarters Specify the starting/ending period numbers for each quarter up to twelvequarters. These quarters are referenced in the GXL formula when using theDQTR format.


6. Use the table to enter data on the Ad Hoc Queries panel.

Field Description

Ad Hoc Queries:

Filter by GL If selected, only ad hoc queries associated with the selected ledger arelisted on the panel and are included in the list of ad hoc queries in the drilldown feature. De-select to list all available ad hoc queries.

SQL is Read Only If selected, ad hoc queries may not be created, edited, copied or deleted. This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information.

Button Function

Test Runs the selected ad hoc query and displays the results in a Drill Downpanel.

SS Settings 32


7. Use the table to enter data on the Query panel.

Field Description

Query Options:

Limit GEXD to 64K Rows/Sheet

If selected, the output of a GEXD formula is limited to 64,000 rows persheet and the query terminates when the output exceeds the limit. Note: For Excel 2003 and prior users, it is suggested to select this option. For Excel 2007 (.xlsx) users, it is suggested to not select this option totake advantage of the more than a million rows available.

Query Timeout Specify the maximum time (in seconds) allowed for a query (EDQformulas) to run on the host system.Note: This does not mean that after the specified time the query will stoprunning, but if the data optimizer anticipates that the query will take longerthan the specified time it will immediately issue a message.


8. Use the table to enter data on the Writeback panel.

Field Description

Writeback Options:

Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, oncean error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and de-select the option (see SWB View Log).

Filter Writeback Selections onWriteback Panels by Type

If selected, the Select Worksheet drop down list on Writeback panels onlydisplays sheets containing writebacks for the selected writeback type (i.e.Oracle API vs. Generic Tables) being processed. To optimize performanceand reduce unnecessary filtering, Global recommends setting this optiononly if multiple writeback types are processed in a workbook.

Oracle API Options:

Use Cached API Lists If selected, Oracle APIs are retrieved from a cached list to speed up theload time of APIs on the SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel.

When Generating APILoader...

Specify whether the Date and Status columns are inserted to the far left orfar right of the writeback data grid when the API Loader sheet is generated.

SS Settings 34


Field Description

Generic Options:

When Generating WritebackDefinition...

Specify whether the Date and Status columns are inserted to the far left orfar right of the writeback data grid when the writeback definition isgenerated.

JD Edwards Options:

Application User Name Specify the user ID to be used to connect to the JDE application server.

Application Password Specify the password for the user ID.

Default Configuration Click the down arrow and select the JDE host configuration to default onthe SWB Orchestration Selection panel. The list only displaysconfigurations which have Writeback host and port values defined.

Button Function

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and errorlog entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see SWB ViewLog).


9. Use the table to enter data on the Writeback Template panel.

Note: A user's ability to create/maintain writeback templates is determined by an option in User settings in theConfigurator.

Field Description

Writeback Template:

Template Name Specify the template name.

Builder Sheet Name Specify the prefix name to be assigned to Builder sheets when thetemplate is used. Do not use special characters in the name. If left blank,the value defaults to Builder. When the template is processed the systemadds a suffix of _API-n (where n is a sequence number) to the name.

Loader Sheet Name Specify the prefix name to be assigned to Loader sheets when thetemplate is used. Do not use special characters in the name. If left blank,the value defaults to Loader. When the template is processed the systemadds a sequence number to the name.

Consolidate Loader Sheets If selected, a single Loader sheet is created containing all API Loaders forthe template; otherwise one Loader sheet is create per API Loader.

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the Oracle host configuration to be usedby the template to connect to the database.

SS Settings 36


Field Description

API List Displays a list of the APIs for this template. To add an API to the list, click the Add button. The Select OraclePublic API panel appears, allowing the user to select the API to beadded to the list. Note: The Select Oracle Public API panel is similar to the SWB Build aTemplate - Oracle Public API panel, with the exception that unrelatedfields have been removed or disabled. See Oracle APIs - Build aTemplate and Single API Method for basic steps for selecting an API. To display parameters for an API, select the API in the window. Theparameters are displayed in the Parameter List window to the right.To reorder APIs in the list, select the API in the window, and click theappropriate arrow button to move the selected API up or down in the list.To remove an API from the list, select the API in the window, and click

the delete button ( ) button.

Omit API-Level Validation If selected, indicates to ignore the P_VALIDATE parameter for the selectedAPI during writeback validation processing. This addresses scenarios inwhich field dependencies exist between related P_VALIDATE APIs beingprocessed together. This option only appears when the selected APIcontains the P_VALIDATE parameter.

Parameter List Displays a list of parameters for the selected API.To include a parameter in the API query, select the Included check box,otherwise deselect the option. Select or deselect the Included checkbox in the header to select or deselect the option for all parameters.To assign a user-defined name to be displayed on the Builder Sheet andLoader Sheet for a parameter, key the value in the Display Name field.To preset the Set As Default flag for a parameter on the Builder Sheet,select the Set As Default check box. Select or deselect the Set AsDefault check box in the header to select or deselect the option for allparameters.To preset the API Field Default Value for a parameter on the BuilderSheet, key the value in the Data Value field.To populate a cell in the grid with a value from a query, click the Lookupbutton, navigate to and select the desired query, select the desired valueand click Insert Selected Value(s). The system returns the value fromthe first column to the selected cell.

Button Function

New Template Clears fields and resets default field values on the panel, allowing the userto start fresh to enter data for creating a new template.

Browse for Template Open Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select awriteback template.


10. The File Locations panel displays the location of various files used in the product. File locations which arehighlighted have been preloaded based upon settings in the Configurator. Use the table to enter data on the FileLocations panel.

Field Description

File Locations:

Shared Documents For Administrators in Citrix environments only, use the Browse buttonto select the location to which to move the basic folders. This function ispassword protected. Contact Global for more information.

Segment Lists Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of theSegment Lists database and Segment Mapping objects. This may be alocal or network drive.

Local Cache Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the localcache database.

Ad Hoc Queries Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the adhoc queries, this folder should be reserved for ad hoc queries only.

PC Local Database For BPCS and Data Warehouse ledgers only, key the path or use theBrowse button to specify the location of the local .mbd database. Thislocation may also be updated from the Load Local PC Database or theLoad Data Warehouse from GL panels.

SS Settings 38


Field Description

Budget Manager Balances For BPCS, Infinium and JDE ledgers only, key the path or use the Browsebutton to specify the location of the budget balances when using Global'sBudget Manager application.

Designer GL Definitions Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of theDesigner GL definitions.

Drill Down Layouts Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the user-defined drill down grid layouts.

EDQ Files Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the EDQquery files.

Writeback APIs Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of theWriteback APIs.

Writeback Templates Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of theWriteback Templates.

11. The System Information panel displays various data related to the user's system and Spreadsheet Server. Toemail this information to the helpdesk, click the Email button. The system opens a new Outlook® email panel withthe contents of this panel in the body of the email. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body asnecessary and click the Send button.


12. The Performance panel displays various performance counts and statistics with respect to how the product isprocessing. Use the table to enter data on the Performance panel, or to access other functions.

Field Description

SQL Execution Threshold Specify the time limit (in seconds) for which to create an entry in the errorlog when a SQL statement exceeds the threshold specified.

Button Function

Reset Statistics Clears the performance statistic values, thus allowing counts and statisticsto start accumulating again.

Email Opens a new Outlook® email panel with system information andperformance data in the body of the email. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body as necessary and click the Send button.

SS Settings 40


13. The About panel displays Global's contact information. Click the Online Manuals link to access the online usermanual.

14. Click OK. The system writes the changes made on the current panel and closes the panel.


7 GL Reporting

Spreadsheet Server retrieves financial data from the General Ledger into Excel using the following formulas:

Formula Description

GXL Returns an account balance (see GXL Formula for Account Values and see links below toaccess ledger specific GXL information).

GXD Returns an account segment or account string description (see links below to access ledgerspecific GXD information).

GXE Explodes summary data line into detail data lines (see Expand to Account Balances andExpand to Journals).

GXC Customized formula. Contact Global for configuration of new formulas.

SSLDESC Returns a segment list description (see SSLDESC Formula).

GXSALES For JDE ledgers only, returns sales totals based upon sales criteria (see JDE GXSALES).

Note: Formulas available for processing are based upon the user's licensed features. See Query for query related formulas.

These formulas can be used in a spreadsheet cell in the same manner as other spreadsheet functions.

Spreadsheet Server provides tools for starting a spreadsheet (see Build a Template) and for entering formulas (seeFormula Assistant).






Use the following links to access ledger specific GXD information:


BPCS 4.05 Designer GL (N/A) JD Edwards PeopleSoft



GL Reporting 42


7.1 Build a Template

Build a Template is a tool used to aid in quickly creating a template on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. This toolpopulates the necessary rows and columns with required parameters and account segment values as provided by theuser. The tool inserts a GXL or GXE formula using the parameters and account segment values. Formulas available inthe Build a Template function are based upon the user's licensed features.

Note: See Build a Template for Queries for query related formulas.

1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears opening to the lastused formula.

Nav Tip:The Build a Template - GXL panel may be accessed and pre-populated by selecting from the SS RibbonBuild a Template>General Ledger and then selecting the desired ledger. Only ledgers with a QuickTextdefined on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics will be available for selection.

2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears.


3. Some fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basicprocessing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Build a Template -GXL panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific Build a Template - GXLinformation.

Field Description

GXL: Returns a single balance from the ledger (see GXL Formula for AccountValues).

Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet name which will receive thetemplate.



Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year.

Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Basic valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE;however, some ledgers may have other valid formats.


Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Translated, Currency, Ledger(a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts

Ledger Specific ProcessingOptions

These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - FSG Templates and Convert Missing Valuesto Parent Hierarchies

Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template.

Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template.

Available Designer GLDefinitions

Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which toretrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameterson the panel to match the selected definition.

Line Description Specify a description for the account or group of accounts specified.

Clear Worksheet / Do Not Clear Worksheet / Shift Worksheet Data

Specify when inserting data whether to clear all cell data on the targetworksheet, to not clear cell data on the target worksheet, or to insert theGXL formula in the target cell and then to insert the ledger and segmentspecific data to newly inserted columns and rows to the top and to the leftof the existing worksheet data (see Build a Template GXL Using Clear / DoNot Clear Worksheet and Build a Template GXL Using Shift WorksheetData).

Insert Column Data Only This option is enabled after data has been inserted using the Insert icon onthe toolbar. If selected, an additional column of parameters is inserted(see Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only).

Skip a Row If selected, an additional row is inserted between the last columnparameter and the account segment title row.

Invert Sign If selected, the account balance sign displayed is reversed.

GL Reporting 44


Field Description

Account Segments: If necessary, use the scroll bar to access additional account segments.

Display/Use If selected, the account segment is included in the formula.Note: Segments may only be excluded from the bottom up.

Row/Col Select the button to toggle between Row and Col. This button determinesif the account segment will be located in the template parameters columnor by default, on the template account segment row.

Description Specify the description to be used as the account segment title.

Value Specify the value to default on the template for the account segment orclick the ellipse button to select from a list of valid segment values. Thevalue may be a single value, mask, segment list, hierarchy value, @ fieldor the first value in a range (see Account Segment Syntax).

Range Thru Value If applicable, select the check box and specify the ending range value forthe account segment.

Use the following links to access ledger specific Build a Template - GXL information:






4. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GXE panel.

Note: Optionally use Formula Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing forboth account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula.

Field Description

GXE: Fills detail account balances or journal details into the specified worksheet(see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals).

Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template.

Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template

Source Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the name of the worksheet that containsthe summary formulas to be expanded and onto which to insert the GXEformula.

Target Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the name of the new or existing worksheetthat contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expandeddetail.

Source Detail Row Specify the row number on the source worksheet that contains thesummary formulas. When using Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation,the system hard codes to use the same value assigned to Part 1.

Target Table, Range, or Row Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target worksheetto begin inserting the expanded detail.

Headings Click the down arrow and select whether or not to include column headingswhen expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Autofit Click the down arrow and select whether or not to autofit columns whenexpanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Clear Sheet Click the down arrow and select whether or not to clear the targetworksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified forthe Target Table/Range/Row parameter.

Journals Only Column Specify the column for which to generate journal detail (see Expand toJournals). Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, click the down arrow and select the ad hoc query to be used togenerate journal detail.Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. An ad hocquery is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and DesignerGL ledgers.

Filter by GL If selected, the queries listed in the Journals Ad Hoc Query drop down listare limited to the ledger specified in the associated field. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

GL for Filtering (no label) If the Filter by GL option is selected, click the down arrow and select theledger for which to list ad hoc queries in the Journals Ad Hoc Query dropdown list.Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

GL Reporting 46


Field Description

Summarize Balance Level If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be used forsummarizing data when expanding account balances. Ex: Account String= Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. To summarize balancesat the account level enter '3' (third account segment).Note: Any ACCTSEGnn literals entered on the Source Detail Row willoverride this value.

In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify an @ field alias or fieldname (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode tocontrol how to group expanded data. This replicates the legacy SSJDEGXECC formula.

Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generatesubtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated atthe selected level and each previous level. Ex: Account String =Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. Enter a '3' (third accountsegment) to generate subtotals at the account, department, company andgrand total level. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse, orDesigner GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segmentnumber for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number ofsegments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use themaximum allowable number of segments.Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is anAcctCatCode or BUCatCode @ field alias or field name then an 'extra'account segment representing the category code is added to the front ofthe account string. This will need to be taken into consideration whenspecifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals.

Convert Journals to Table Click the down arrow and select whether or not to place expanded journalentry details into a table. When this option is utilized, the system createsa new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the nextavailable standard Excel table name. The table includes headers andgrand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option isignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level isnot blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.Note: When this option is set to Y and have multiple GXEs to journals inthe workbook, then set the Clear Sheet option to Y to avoid errors.

5. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons.Insert (icon) -- inserts parameter labels and values, and the formula to the selected worksheet, incrementsPeriod and Starting Column/Row values for the next GXL formula, and keeps the panel open for additionalinserts.Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard.Insert (button) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet and closes thepanel.Cancel/Close (button) -- closes the panel.


7.1.1 Build a Template GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet

The following example demonstrates using the Clear Worksheet and/or the Do Not Clear Worksheet options whenprocessing a GXL formula from the Build a Template function.

1. From an open worksheet in Excel, from the SS Ribbon select Build a Template. The Build a Template panelappears.

2. Key the appropriate ledger parameters and account segment data.

3. Click the Insert button at the bottom of the panel. The panel closes and the template is generated.

GL Reporting 48


7.1.2 Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only

The following example demonstrates using the Insert Column Data Only option when processing a GXL formula fromthe Build a Template function. This option is used to insert multiple columns onto a single worksheet.

1. From an open worksheet in Excel, from the SS Ribbon select Build a Template. The Build a Template panelappears.

2. Key the appropriate ledger parameters and account segment data.

3. Click the Insert icon on the toolbar. The template is generated, but the panel remains open and the Period,Starting Column and Starting Row values are incremented, and the Insert Column Data Only check box isselected.

4. Key any necessary changes to the ledger parameters.

5. Click the Insert icon on the toolbar. The column data and GXL formula are added to the template, and the Period,Starting Column and Starting Row values are incremented.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired columns are added.

7. Click the Close button to close the panel.


7.1.3 Build a Template GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data

The following example demonstrates using the Shift Worksheet Data option when processing a GXL formula from theBuild a Template function. This option is used to insert the required rows and columns used for a GXL formula into anexisting non-Spreadsheet Server worksheet.

1. Start with an existing non-Spreadsheet Server worksheet in Excel. Select the first cell to be populated with aformula (i.e. B4 in the spreadsheet below), then from the SS Ribbon select Build a Template. The Build a Templatepanel appears.

2. Select the option Shift Worksheet Data. The Starting Column and Starting Row fields are modified to display thecell previously selected on the worksheet.

3. Enter the appropriate values on the Build a Template panel.

4. Click the Insert icon -or- button. The panel closes and the column and row parameters, and formula are added tothe existing worksheet.

GL Reporting 50


7.2 Formula Assistant

The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating formulas on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. Formulas available in the Formula Assistant function are based upon the user's licensed features and the selectedledger.

Note: See JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES for JDE ledger specific GXSALES formula. See Formula Assistantfor Queries for query related formulas.

1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant opens to the GXL panel -or- ifFormula Assistant was launched while on a SS formula, the corresponding formula panel appears.


Note: For efficient processing use cell references to identify individual formula parameters. However, if literalvalues are keyed in the entry boxes, they must be placed in double quotes (").

Hint: Shortcut for selecting cell references:On the Formula Assistant panel, select the desired field.Press the Control Key. The Formula Assistant panel becomes transparent and is shifted up.On the worksheet, select the desired cell.Press the Control Key or click the Expand button. This system returns the selected cell to the field.

Hint: If necessary, use F4 to lock either the row and/or column value of the cell reference.


3. Some fields on the Formula Assistant - GXL panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basicprocessing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Formula Assistant -GXL panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXL information.

Field Description

GXL: Returns a single balance from the ledger (see GXL Formula for AccountValues).Note: This section assumes that the parameters will be laid out top downin a single column. Therefore, when entering a cell reference in the firstfield and moving to the next field, the system will populate the other fieldssequentially thru the Period field.




Format Specify the time range for which to retrieve data. Basic valid formats arePER, QTR, DTQR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE; however, some ledgers mayhave other valid formats.

Period Specify the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e.1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format.

Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. If selected, the corresponding option and associatedvalue is included in the formula. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Currency,Translated, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), Translated Flag, and Summary Accts


Account Segments: Specify the cells containing the required account segments. This areaassumes that the account segments will be on a row next to each other,so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of thefields (i.e. first account segment cell reference is A13, then clicking thedown arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13,etc.).






GL Reporting 52


4. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXE panel.

Note: Optionally use Formula Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing forboth account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula.

Field Description

GXE: Fills detail balances into the specified worksheet (see Expand to AccountBalances and Expand to Journals).

Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulasthat will be expanded.

Target Worksheet Specify the name of the new or existing worksheet that contains the finalformatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail.

Source Detail Row Specify the row number on the source worksheet that contains thesummary formulas. When using Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation,the system hard codes to use the same value assigned to Part 1.

Target Table, Range, or Row Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target worksheetto begin inserting the expanded detail.

Headings Specify whether or not to include column headings when expandingdetails. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Autofit Specify whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If notspecified, N (No) is assumed.


Field Description

Clear Sheet Specify whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expandingdetails. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified forthe Target Table/Range/Row parameter.

Journals Only Column Specify the column for which to generate journal detail (see Expand toJournals). Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, specify the ad hoc query to be used to generate journal detail.Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. An ad hocquery is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and DesignerGL ledgers.

Summarize Balance Level If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be used forsummarizing data when expanding account balances. Ex: Account String= Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. To summarize balancesat the account level enter '3' (third account segment).Note: Any ACCTSEGnn literals entered on the Source Detail Row willoverride this value.

In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify an @ field alias or fieldname (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode tocontrol how to group expanded data. This replicates the legacy SSJDEGXECC formula.

Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generatesubtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated atthe selected level and each previous level. Ex: Account String =Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. Enter a '3' (third accountsegment) to generate subtotals at the account, department, company andgrand total level. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse, orDesigner GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segmentnumber for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number ofsegments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use themaximum allowable number of segments.Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is anAcctCatCode or BUCatCode @ field alias or field name then an 'extra'account segment representing the category code is added to the front ofthe account string. This will need to be taken into consideration whenspecifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals.

Convert Journals to Table Click the down arrow and select whether or not to place expanded journalentry details into a table. When this option is utilized, the system createsa new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the nextavailable standard Excel table name. The table includes headers andgrand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option isignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level isnot blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.Note: When this option is set to Y and have multiple GXEs to journals inthe workbook, then set the Clear Sheet option to Y to avoid errors.

GL Reporting 54


5. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXC panel.

Note: This panel is hidden when ad hoc processing is disabled via a setting in the Configurator.

Field Description

GXC: Used to specify the values for a customized formula. Contact Global forconfiguration of the new formula.

Query Click the down arrow and select the custom ad hoc query to be used forthe customized formula.

Parm 01-10 Specify the appropriate parameters for the customized formula. Fieldvalues will vary based upon the requirements for the customized formula.


6. Fields on the Formula Assistant - GXD panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processingis the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Formula Assistant - GXD panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXD information.

Field Description

GXD: Displays the description for an account segment or account string.

Parms These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for theselected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Parms = Segment Num, Value and Ledger.

Account Segments: May or may not be applicable for the GXD formula.

Use the following links to access ledger specific GXD information:


BPCS 4.05 Designer GL (N/A) JD Edwards PeopleSoft

BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson (N/A) SAP


7. The Results Box near the bottom left of the panel displays the formula as it is being built. Verify the data in theResults Box is correct, and then click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons.

Insert (icon) or Insert (button) -- inserts the formula to the previously selected cell on the current worksheet andcloses the panel.Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard.Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.

GL Reporting 56


7.3 GXL Formula for Account Values

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. Parameters in the GXL formulawill vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the following asan overview for the GXL formula. Links are available at the bottom to access ledger specific GXL information.

Syntax:=GXL("Key 1","Key 2","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)

Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters.

Parameters:Key 1Value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type.

Key 2Value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type.

Key 3Literals and values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. If more than one variable needs to bedefined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 = Translated,Currency, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts.

YearYear identifier.

FormatBasic valid formats are listed below; however, some ledgers may have other valid formats:

PER Activity for a selected period or range of periods

QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number

DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number

YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance

LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance

RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified

PeriodCorresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format.

Account Segment 1 - nnEnter one parameter for each segment of the account number. The number of account segments will vary basedupon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list,hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).







7.4 Account Segment Syntax

For parameters that allow a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value (a.k.a. parent group) or@ field syntax examples are listed below:

Criteria Type Syntax Results

Single Value 8000 Retrieves value 8000

Mask (wildcard) 85* -or- 85** (see Note 1) Retrieves values starting with 85

Mask (wildcard) for All Values * Retrieves all values

Mask (wildcard) for a Single Value 8*00 -or- 8_00 Retrieves values 8x00, where x is any character(i.e. 8100, 8200, 8300, ...)

Range (see Note 2) 8000.8599 Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599

Blank Values (see Note 3) BLANK Retrieves all blank values.

Non Blank Values (see Note 3) NOTBLANK Retrieves all non blank values.

Note 1: JDE ledgers are case sensitive when specifying characters for a segment value.

SAP ledgers must use 85** syntax -- one asterisk (*) for each digit/character being masked.

Note 2: The range delimiter may be defined in the user's SS Settings.

Note 3: BLANK and NOTBLANK values only apply to Infinium, JDE, and SAP special ledgers.

Value List:A list of values may be entered for an account segment. The list of values may include single values, a range of values,a mask (wildcard) value, segment lists, hierarchy values, @ fields, or an excluded value (indicated by inserting '/' priorto the value). Enclose the value list in square brackets [ ] and use a comma (,) to separate values in the list.


Value List - Single Values [8000,8250,8370] Retrieves values 8000, 8250 and 8370

Value List - Range & Exclude Value [8000.8599,/8375] Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599, excluding 8375

Note: The range delimiter, list separator and exclusion characters may be defined in the user's SS Settings.

Segment Lists and Hierarchy Values:


Segment List ^CASH Retrieves all values in CASH segment list

Hierarchy Value ^̂ 1234 Retrieves all values in group 1234

Note: SAP ledgers use a single caret (^) to identify SAP master data hierarchy sets and a double caret (^^) to identify other SAP set names.

If a master data hierarchy set and segment list are assigned the same name, the calculation uses the hierarchy set.

@ Fields:The syntax for an @ field is @aaa:bbb (where aaa is the alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator), and bbb isthe field value). The field value specified may be a single value, mask, range, value list, or segment list. An @ fieldmay be used alone or embedded in a bracketed value list.


@ Field - Single Value @myfield:2000 Retrieves myfield value 2000

@ Field - using a Value List @myfield:[2000,3000] Retrieves myfield value 2000 and 3000

@ Field - in a Value List [100,@myfield:2000,600] Retrieves value 100 or 600 or myfield value 2000

Note: If necessary, may enter table qualifier (syntax = @table.field:value).

Click the link to go to a related topic: Create/Maintain Segment Lists and Locate Segment.

mailto:@table.field:value)

GL Reporting 58


7.5 List Accounts for a GXL Formula

This feature allows for listing account numbers which will be used in the calculation of a GXL formula.

Note: This function is not applicable for Designer GL ledgers.

1. Select the desired cell that contains the GXL formula in question, then right click and select SpreadsheetServer>List Accounts. The List Accounts window appears.

2. Review the accounts listed in the grid to ensure the formula is retrieving the appropriate accounts.

3. To modify the list of accounts being displayed on the List Accounts window, alter the value in the Filter field andclick the List Accounts button.

Note: Modifying the filter does not change the account segment values in the spreadsheet cell being referencedby the GXL formula.

Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.


7.6 Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula

The Expand GL Row feature allows the user to expand the balances for GXLs on a single row or for all GXLs on theworksheet into individual account details. During the process the system also expands data and/or formulas in thecolumns to the right or left of the GXL formulas. This process is similar to the GXE formula, but expands into additionalrows on the current worksheet instead of to another designated workbook location. A maximum of 80 columns may beexpanded. The detail rows will expand up or down, convert null segment values to an asterisk or empty cell, andexclude zero balance accounts based upon options in the user's SS Settings.

Note:For the Expand option to function properly, all parameters must be in a column and at least one account segmentmust be on the row, and a description field should follow the last account segment on the row -or- a blank columnshould exist between the last account segment and the GXL formula.Expand GL Row will not function when a GXL formula references a hard coded segment value.When the original GXL contains an @ field, the expanded rows display the appropriate account segment andassociated @ field value; however, calculated amounts may be overstated and may not foot to the original GXLcalculated amount.When a SUM formula uses a range to reference cells to be totaled, this calculation will be incorrect when expand GLrows, whether expanding up or down.

To Expand a Single GL Row:1. On the desired row to be expanded, select any cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon select

Expand GL Row -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Expand GL Row. The system adds additionalrows to the spreadsheet listing the account details for the selected GXL(s). The expanded data appears in blueitalics.

Selected GXL Formulas

GL Reporting 60


Expanded Row Results

To Expand All GL Rows:1. Select any cell on the worksheet, then from the SS Ribbon select Expand GL Row>Expand All GL Rows. The

system adds additional rows to the spreadsheet listing the account details for all GXLs on the worksheet. Theexpanded data appears in blue italics.

To Collapse GL Rows for a Single Expansion:1. Select any cell within the expanded rows section, then from the SS Ribbon select Collapse GL Row -or- right click

and select Spreadsheet Server>Collapse GL Row. The system removes the expanded GL rows in the selectedsection.

To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions on the Worksheet:1. Select any cell on the worksheet, then from the SS Ribbon select Collapse GL Row>Collapse All GL Rows

(Worksheet). The system removes all expanded GL rows on the worksheet.

To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions in the Workbook:1. Select any cell on the worksheet, then from the SS Ribbon select Collapse GL Row>Collapse All GL Rows

(Workbook). The system removes all expanded GL rows in the workbook.


7.7 Expand/Collapse Row by Segment for a GXL Formula

The Expand GL Row by Segment feature allows the user to expand the balances for GXLs on a single row by aselected segment. During the process the system also expands data and/or formulas in the columns to the right or leftof the GXL formulas. This process is similar to the GXE formula, but expands into additional rows on the currentworksheet instead of to another designated workbook location. A maximum of 80 columns may be expanded. Thedetail rows will expand up or down, and exclude zero balance accounts based upon options in the user's SS Settings.

Note:For the Expand by Segment option to function properly, all parameters must be in a column and at least one accountsegment must be on the row, and a description field should follow the last account segment on the row.Expand by Segment will not function when the selected segment contains an @ field, a partial/full account string,BLANK, NOTBLANK or a single account value, or when the selected segment contains a segment list whichreferences an @ field or a partial/full account string.Expand by Segment will not function when a GXL formula references a hard coded segment value.Expand by Segment will not function for Infinium when the GXL formula references user fields.When an account segment is referenced multiple times in the original GXL formula (e.g. the account in referenced intwo segment lists and both segment lists are in a bracketed value list), the expanded rows display the appropriatedata; however, the total of the expanded amounts will not foot to the original GXL calculated amount.When a SUM formula uses a range to reference cells to be totaled, this calculation will be incorrect when expand GLrows, whether expanding up or down.

To Expand a GL Row by Segment:1. Select the row or any cell on the desired row to be expanded, then from the SS Ribbon select Expand GL

Row>Expand GL Row by Segment and then the desired account segment -or- right click and select SpreadsheetServer>Expand GL Row>Expand GL Row by Segment and then the desired account segment. The system addsadditional rows to the spreadsheet listing the account details for the selected GXL(s). The expanded data appearsin blue italics.

Note: The level of expanded results will vary based upon the original segment value.If the original segment value does not reference segment lists and/or hierarchies, then results expand directly toindividual segment level.If the original segment value references segment lists and/or hierarchies, then results break down by individualsegment lists and/or hierarchies. At that point, the user may repeat the expand by segment process on a newrow. See the example below.

Example - Expand by segment (Department) where original value references a hierarchy

GL Reporting 62


Expanded Row Results

To Collapse GL Rows for a Single Expansion:1. Select any cell within the expanded rows section, then from the SS Ribbon select Collapse GL Row -or- right click

and select Spreadsheet Server>Collapse GL Row. The system removes the expanded GL rows in the selectedsection.

To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions on the Worksheet:1. Select any cell on the worksheet, then from the SS Ribbon select Collapse GL Row>Collapse All GL Rows

(Worksheet). The system removes all expanded GL rows on the worksheet.

To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions in the Workbook:1. Select any cell on the worksheet, then from the SS Ribbon select Collapse GL Row>Collapse All GL Rows

(Workbook). The system removes all expanded GL rows in the workbook.


7.8 Locate Segment

The Locate Segment function is used to display a list of valid account segment values, @ fields (as defined in theConfigurator), or hierarchy values (a.k.a. parent groups) for each account segment, and to enable the user to insert aselected value to the current active cell in Excel. Both @ fields and ledger specific hierarchy values may be used in aGXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with the desired @ field or hierarchy value. An @ field orhierarchy value may be used alone or embedded in a bracketed value list.

The syntax for an @ field is @aaa:bbb (where aaa is the alias or field name, and bbb is the field value), or ifnecessary may enter a table qualifier (syntax = @table.field:value). The field value specified may be a singlevalue, mask, range, value list, or segment list.Insert two carets symbols (^̂ ) prior to the hierarchy value in the formula for the system to recognize the hierarchyvalue.

1. Select the cell to contain the segment value, then from the SS Ribbon select Locate Segment -or- right click andselect Spreadsheet Server>Locate Segment. The Locate A Segment panel appears.

Note: The first time the Locate Segment function is accessed the system loads and caches VSegments. Amessage and progress bar appear indicating that this process may take a few moments.

2. To toggle between displaying a list of segment values, @ fields, or hierarchy values, select the Value, @ Fields, orHierarchy radio button.

Note:For Data Warehouse and SAP ledgers, the Value and Hierarchy options are not applicable. For Designer GL ledgers, the Hierarchy option is disabled when HSegments are not preloaded.

GL Reporting 64


3. To filter for segment values or hierarchy values for a specific segment, select the desired segment(s) in the IncludeSegments list. The system displays only the segment or hierarchy values for the selected segment(s). Thisfeature does not apply when viewing @ fields.

4. To filter the segment values, @ fields, or hierarchy values in the grid, enter the selection criteria into the appropriatecolumn filter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character.

5. To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort a column in descending order, clickthe column heading a second time.

6. To copy the list of values currently displayed in the list, click the Copy Segment Lists to Clipboard toolbar icon.

7. To insert a value to the current cell process one of the following:For a Value or Hierarchy:

Double click the desired value in the list -orselect the value and click the Insert button. The value is insertedand the panel closes.Select the desired value in the list and click the Insert to Current Cell toolbar icon. The value is inserted and thepanel remains open.

For an @ Field:Key the appropriate value (may be a single value, mask, range, value list or segment list), double click thedesired alias in the list -orselect the alias and click the Insert button. The alias and assigned value is insertedand the panel closes.Key the appropriate value (may be a single value, mask, range, value list or segment list), select the alias andclick the Insert to Current Cell toolbar icon. The alias and assigned value is inserted and the panel remainsopen.


7.9 Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists

7.9.1 Create/Maintain Segment Lists

Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists are used to create a hierarchy of individual segments which can be used in a GXLformula. A segment list may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with thedesired segment list name. A caret symbol ( )̂ must be inserted prior to the segment list name in the formula for thesystem to recognize the segment list. A user's ability to create/maintain segment lists is determined by an option inUser settings in the Configurator.

To Create a New Segment List:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Segment Lists. The Segment List Maintenance panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Segment Lists button on the Control Panel - GLBalances or Query tabs -or- by selecting the Maintain Segment Lists button on the Spreadsheet ServerSettings - General panel.

2. To create a new segment list, enter a segment list name (no blank spaces or special characters), description, and

optional user-defined group name, then click the Add List toolbar icon ( ). The segment list is added to theSegment List grid.

GL Reporting 66


3. Use the table to enter data in the Segment List Value section on the Segment List Maintenance panel.

Field Description

And/Or Specify the transition logic between the values or groups, thus indicatingwhether or not the values in the grouping must meet both criteria (AND) oronly meet one criteria (OR) to be included in the segment list.Note: The And/Or selection criteria is ignored for the first list value.

Group Specify an ID number for grouping different lines in the list together. Thevalue defaults to 1.

@ Field Alias If desired, click the down arrow and select the alias, for the @ field asdefined in the Configurator, to be used in the segment list.

Comparison Click the down arrow and select the operation to be applied to the value. Valid values are Between, Equal, Like, Not Between, Not Equal and NotLike. Use Between and Not Between when specifying a range, and Likeand Not Like when using a mask (wildcard).Note: The system modifies the comparison value based upon the criteriaentered in the Value field.Note: May not exclude (i.e. Not Equal) a segment list.

Value Specify the value for the criteria. The value may be a segment value, mask(wildcard), range, existing segment list (nesting), full or partial accountstring, category code, user field value or custom @ field value.Note: For Infinium, JDE, and SAP special ledgers only, the literals BLANKand NOTBLANK are valid values.

4. Click the Add Value icon ( ). The value criteria is added to the Segment List Value grid.

5. Once the segment list is complete, click X. The panel closes.

To Maintain an Existing Segment List:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Segment Lists. The Segment List Maintenance panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Segment Lists button on the Control Panel - GLBalances or Query tabs -or- the Maintain Segment Lists button on the Spreadsheet Server Settings -General panel.

2. To sort the segment lists or segment list values in the grid, click the desired column header. To re-sort indescending order, click the desired column header a second time.

3. To filter the segment lists or segment list values in the grid, enter the selection criteria into the appropriate columnfilter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character.

4. To modify an existing segment list, select the list and key over the description, group name and/or update thesegment list values as necessary.

5. To move a segment list value up or down in the grid, select the list, then select the value and click the appropriate

Up or Down arrow icon ( or ).


6. To remove a segment list value, select the list, then select the value in the grid and click the Remove Value icon (

).

7. To copy a segment list, select the list and click the Copy List toolbar icon ( ). The Copy Segment List panelappears. Enter the name to be assigned to the new segment list and click OK.

8. To delete a segment list, select the list and click the Remove List toolbar icon ( ).

9. To paste a segment list(s) to the active cell on the spreadsheet, select the desired segment list(s) and click the

Insert List toolbar icon ( ).To select a single segment list -- select the list.To select multiple segment lists -- press and hold the Ctrl key as lists are selected on the grid rows.To select multiple segment lists in a range -- select the first list in the range, press and hold the Shift key, andselect the last list in the range.

Note: If the active cell already contains a value, then the newly selected segment list(s) is added and the values inthe active cell are formatted into a value list. If the active cell contains a mask (i.e. *), then the newlyselected segment list(s) replaces the previous mask.

10. To copy all segment lists (name, description, group name and values) to the clipboard, click the Copy Lists toolbar

icon ( ). The data may then be pasted into Excel, Notepad, Word, etc. for review and/or printing.

11. To lock a segment list(s), select the desired segment list(s) and click the Lock toolbar icon ( ). The Passworddialog box appears. Enter the desired password and click OK. Locking the segment list allows other users toaccess the segment list but prevents changes from being made.

To select a single segment list -- select the list.To select multiple segment lists -- press and hold the Ctrl key as lists are selected on the grid rows.To select multiple segment lists in a range -- select the first list in the range, press and hold the Shift key, andselect the last list in the range.

12. To unlock a segment list(s), select the list(s) and click the Unlock toolbar icon ( ). The Password dialog boxappears. Enter a valid password and click OK.

To select a single segment list -- select the list.To select multiple segment lists -- press and hold the Ctrl key as lists are selected on the grid rows.To select multiple segment lists in a range -- select the first list in the range, press and hold the Shift key, andselect the last list in the range.

Note: In the event the individual required passwords are lost or forgotten, contact your administrator for the overridepassword.

13. To unlock all segment lists, click the Unlock All toolbar icon ( ). The Password dialog box appears. Enter theoverride password and click OK.

14. To purge balances in the cache file for a segment list, select the list and click the Purge List from Cache toolbar

icon ( ). This action may be used when using local cache mode if a segment list is deleted or if list values arealtered.

GL Reporting 68


15. To import segment lists from an ad hoc, Excel spreadsheet or a segment list .mdb file, click the Import Lists

toolbar icon ( ). The Segment List Import panel appears. Select the appropriate source:Ad Hoc -- click the down arrow and select the appropriate ad hoc, and then click Import.Excel -- specify the starting cell and click the down arrow and select the worksheet from which to import, andthen click Import.SegmentList.mdb -- click the ellipse button to browse and select the desired .mdb from which to import, andthen click Import.

Messages appear displaying the segment lists being imported and confirming when the import is complete. ClickClose to close the panel.

Note: When importing from an ad hoc or Excel spreadsheet, follow the supported format guidelines listed at thetop of the Results window.

16. To perform a mass clean up of the segment list .mdb file based upon filter criteria, click the Cleanup Lists

Database toolbar icon ( ). This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information.

17. To display a list of @ fields, click the View @ Field Aliases toolbar icon ( ). A list of @ fields, as defined in theConfigurator, appears.

To Refresh the Segment List File:Spreadsheet Server allows the user to refresh the segment list file without having to close and reopen Excel and re-start Spreadsheet Server.1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Refresh>Segment Lists. The system clears and rebuilds the memory of

segment lists.


7.9.2 Using Segment Lists or Hierarchy Values in a GXL Formula

A segment list or hierarchy value (a.k.a. parent group, set, etc.) may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of theaccount segment values with the desired segment list or hierarchy value name.

Insert a single caret symbol ( )̂ prior to the segment list name in the formula. Note: For Infinium ledgers, the system supports the SSInfinium legacy process of inserting an at symbol (@) prior to a user list segment

list name in the formula; however, a caret symbol may be used instead of an at symbol.

Insert two carets symbols (^̂ ) prior to the hierarchy value in the formula. Note: If a hierarchy value and segment list are assigned the same name -AND- a single caret (^) is used, the calculation will be based

upon the hierarchy value instead of the segment list. In addition, if a specified hierarchy (i.e. ^^) does not exist, then the system will

look for a match in the segment list file. If a specified segment list (i.e. ^) does not exist, then the system will look for a match in

the hierarchy file.


Formula Example - Using a Segment List:=GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";","2003","PER","6","01","*","^MiscExp","*"."*")Retrieves actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for all accounts included in the segment list MiscExp.

Formula Example - Using a Segment List for a User List (Infinium Ledgers Only):Note: A segment list referencing user field values may be used in conjunction with account segment parameters (see

Infinium GXL).=GXL("M","Actuals","LIBRARY=";"CURRENCY=USD";"ANDUSERLIST=@Tax","2002","YTD","11","001","310","6*","*")Retrieves actual monetary year-to-date activity thru period 11 for accounts beginning with 6 which also meet the userfield criteria in the TAX segment list.

GL Reporting 70


7.9.3 SSLDESC Formula

Use the SSLDESC formula to retrieve the description for a segment list.

Syntax:=SSLDESC("Segment List")

Note: It is most common to use cell references within SSLDESC formulas to identify parameters.

Formula Example:=SSLDESC("^MiscExp")Retrieves the segment list description for the MiscExp segment list.


7.9.4 View or Modify Segment List Values from within Excel

Spreadsheet Server allows a user to view from a worksheet, the values contained in a specific segment list. The usermay also modify the values "on the fly". Lists can be shared among all Spreadsheet Server users so caution should beexercised when making modifications.

1. Select the desired cell that contains the segment list in question, then right click and select SpreadsheetServer>List Accounts. The Segment List Maintenance panel appears displaying the values for the selectedsegment list (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists).

2. Segment list values may be added or removed as necessary.

3. In the event values for the segment list were altered, it is suggested to purge the balances in the cache file for the

segment list. To purge balances, Click the Purge List from Cache toolbar icon ( ).

4. Once all modifications have been made, click X. The panel closes and returns focus to the spreadsheet.

5. In the event balances were purged in the cache file for the segment list, the GXL formula -or- the local cache willneed to be manually recalculated (see Calculation Options or View/Refresh Local Cache).

GL Reporting 72


7.10 Calculations

7.10.1 Calculation Options

Multiple options are available for retrieving and calculating data within Spreadsheet Server.

1. By default, the calculation function within Excel is set to calculate automatically. Global strongly recommendssetting this value to manual so that all required spreadsheet changes or additions can be completed prior to re-calculating.

Nav Tip:From the SS Ribbon select Calculation Options, then select the appropriate setting.

2. The following options are available for calculating spreadsheets:

F2+Enter Calculates the active cell.

F9 Calculates all worksheets in all open workbooks.

Shift+F9 Calculates the active worksheet.

Ctrl+Alt+F9 Calculates all worksheets in all open workbooks, regardless of whether they have changedsince the last calculation.

Nav Tip:The majority of these options are also available from the SS Ribbon by selecting Recalc and thenselecting the appropriate option.


7.10.2 View/Refresh Local Cache

When spreadsheets are calculated, Spreadsheet Server stores the account balances in the either the local or globalcache database (based upon an option in the user's SS Settings). Spreadsheet Server looks first at the cache foraccount balances prior to retrieving the information from the host. As a result, it may be necessary to clear andrecalculate the cache file when any of the following change since the prior calculation:

Data on the host systemSegment listsAccounts profile

While the workbook calculates, the value “Pending” appears in each cell containing a GXL formula and the status of“Processing” appears in the Excel status bar. Once all formulas are processed, the workbook is refreshed with theactual values and the status is changed to “Ready".

To View/Refresh Local Cache:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select View Cache. The Local Cache panel appears displaying cached records.

2. To refresh the account balances during an Excel session, the cache records should be cleared.To clear all records in the cache -- click the Clear All button.To clear selected records -- select the desired records in the grid and click the Clear Selected Rows button.To clear cache for a selected worksheet -- click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, and then clickthe Clear Selected Sheet button.

3. After the cache records have been cleared, the system assigns a default Recalculation Option. If necessary, clickthe down arrow and select a different recalculation option. Value options are:

Trigger Excel to recalculate all open workbooks after closing the Local Cache panel.Trigger Excel to recalculate all worksheets cleared during this session after closing the Local Cache panel.Do not trigger Excel to recalculate the after closing the Local Cache panel.

4. Click Close.

Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.

To Clear and Recalculate Local Cache:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Clear Cache and Recalculate. The system clears and recalculates cache.

GL Reporting 74


To Clear and Recalculate Local Cache for Selected Cells:1. Select any cells on a sheet, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Clear Cache and Re-Calc Selected

Cells. The system clears and recalculates cache for only the selected cells.


7.10.3 View/Refresh Global Cache

Two Global Cache cache types are available and require additional component(s) to be installed.Global Cache -- the Global SmartCache component must be installed on a web server or a server running InternetInformation Services (IIS).Global Cache with Redis Technology -- both a Redis database and the Global SmartCache WRT component must beinstalled on a server.

When GXL or GEXQ formulas are submitted to cache for calculation the system returns the value "Pending" ascalculations occur. When items are pending the Cache icon on the ribbon is red, and when all items are completedthe Cache icon is green. Pending items may be automatically refreshed in the workbook based upon an option in theuser's SS Settings.

To View/Refresh Global Cache:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select View Cache. The Global Cache panel appears displaying cached records.

Global Cache

Global Cache with Redis Technology

2. To view the cache records that are pending, in progress, completed or failed select accordingly:To view completed records in the cache -- click the View Completed button.To view currently caching records -- select the View In-Process button.To view pending cache records -- select the View Pending button.To view failed cache records -- select the View Errors button.

GL Reporting 76


3. To reprocess the current records in the cache during an Excel session:To reprocess all records in the cache for the user -- click the Reprocess All Items button.To reprocess all records in the cache for all users -- click the Reprocess All Items All Users button. Thisfunction is password protected. Contact Global for more information.

Note: After reprocessing the items in cache, the system does not automatically refresh the balances in theworkbook. Instead the user must select Recalculate from the SS Ribbon, in order to update the balancesin the workbook with the reprocessed values.

4. To refresh the account balances during an Excel session, the cache records should be cleared.To clear all records in the cache -- click the Clear Cache button.To clear selected records -- select the desired records in the grid and click the Clear Selected Rows button.To clear cache for a selected worksheet -- click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, and then clickthe Clear Selected Sheet button.

Note: When using the Global Cache with Redis Technology, the option to Clear Buffer will appear on the Cachedrop down list on the SS Ribbon. Select this option to clear the internal SmartCache buffer.

5. After the cache records have been cleared, the system assigns a default recalculation option. If necessary, clickthe down arrow and select a different recalculation option. Value options are:

Trigger Excel to recalculate all open workbooks after closing Global Cache.Trigger Excel to recalculate all worksheets cleared during this session after closing Global Cache.Do Not Trigger Excel to recalculate after closing Global Cache.

6. Click Close.

Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features.

To Automatically Trigger the Global Cache Refresh:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Recalculate. The system recalculates cache.

To Clear and Recalculate Cache for Selected Cells:1. Select any cells on a sheet, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Clear Cache and Re-Calc Selected

Cells. The system clears and recalculates cache for only the selected cells.

To Use Buffering in Global Cache:When using Global Cache with Redis Technology, balances from different periods with the same account key may bereturned from an internal buffer to speed up processing based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. When usingbuffering the option, Clear Buffer, appears in the Cache drop down list on the SS Ribbon allowing the user to clear theinternal SmartCache buffer.


7.10.4 Disable/Enable Formula Calculations

Disabling calculations will effectively halt the various Spreadsheet Server formula calculations when Excel calculatesspreadsheets. As a result of disabling calculations, GXD and GEXQ formulas will return <SS Not Connected>values and GXL formulas will return zero values. When disabled, Spreadsheet Server does not communicate to thehost.

Disabling Spreadsheet Server formula calculations can be extremely useful when:Discontinuing calculation of a complex or long-running spreadsheet. A workbook is inadvertently opened whose calculation option is set to automatic.Creating a new worksheet or modifying an existing worksheet by adding columns and/or rows with SpreadsheetServer formulas, and switching a format to/from the range type period.

To Disable Formula Calculations:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Enabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Disable) -orselect

Tools>Disconnect All Open Connections. The system disconnects from the host system(s).

To Enable Formula Calculations:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The

appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger.

Note: For Data Warehouse and most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears.

2. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, and then click Login or OK.

Note: When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, step 2 is not applicable.






GL Reporting 78


7.11 Drill Down Functionality

7.11.1 General Grid Features

Drill down panels in Spreadsheet Server offer the following features. Some of these basic grid features are alsoavailable in other functions (i.e. List Accounts, Local Cache, Execute Query).

Feature Description

Ad Hoc DrillDown

To drill down from a predefined drill down panel (i.e. Account Balances, Journals, etc.) to dataretrieved by an ad hoc query, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right click and select AdHoc Drill Down. Then from the Ad Hoc Drill Down sub-menu select the query to be used fordrilling down (see Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc).

The Ad Hoc Drill Down option is only available when the user is licensed to the General Ledgerfeature, ad hoc processing is allowed (a Configurator security setting), and ad hoc queries existfor the predefined drill down level.

Sub Queries To drill down from one drill down grid to data retrieved by a user-defined query, select thedesired record(s) in the grid, right click and select Sub Queries. Then from the Sub Queriessub-menu, select the query to be used for drilling down.

The Sub Queries option is only available when the user is licensed to the Query or QueryDesigner feature, and sub queries exist for the drill down (see Sub Query Column).

Refresh To refresh data for the current drill down tab/panel, click the refresh button ( ).

Display SQLStatement

To display the execution time and SQL statement run for the current drill down tab/panel, click

the information button ( ).

Re-sortColumns

To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort a column indescending order, click the column heading a second time.

AutosizeColumns

To automatically resize column widths in a grid to the maximum length required for the headerand/or data, right click and select Autosize.

Re-size/HideColumns

To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of the column header and dragto the desired width.

Move Columns To move a column, click and hold the column header and drag to the desired location.

Copy To copy records to the Windows clipboard, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right clickand select Copy to Clipboard (see Copy/Export Records).

DynamicColumnGroupings

To selectively group records and summarize amount columns by any column, drag the columnheading into the summary section of the panel. To display detail records associated with agrouping, click the '+' next to the desired grouping level. Click the '-' to collapse the expandedview. Multiple levels of summary may be created.


Feature Description

Filter Row To filter data in the grid, enter the desired value in the appropriate column filter field. Alphafields filter character by character. Numeric fields filter upon entry of the full field value.

Options Fly OutWindow

Use the Options fly out window to group drill down data by account segment, to selectexporting options, to create and maintain custom grid layouts, and to control grouping andsubtotaling options. The Options fly out window may be pinned to remain open.

Group bySegment:

Note: This Option pane is only available when drill down on a GXL formula.

Full Detail To display detailed drill down data, select Full Detail.

Segment To display drill down data summarized at the segment level, select the desired accountsegment (see Drill Down - Group By Segment).

Export:

Select All To select all rows in the grid, select Select All.

Copy/Export To copy or export drill down/query results, select the desired rows in the grid, and then selectthe appropriate copy/export function (see Copy/Export Records or Copy to Excel with Layout).

CreateWorkbook

To create a new workbook containing all the drill down/query results, select Create Workbook,then specify the file name on the Save As panel and click Save.

GL Reporting 80


Feature Description

Grid Layouts: By default the basic grid layout is displayed. Alternate layouts may be created and applied ata later time, or set as the default.

List Box Displays the name of the layout currently being used. Click the down arrow and select thelayout to be applied to the grid.

AutoSize To automatically re-size columns widths in a grid to the maximum length required for theheader and/or data, select AutoSize Column Headers.

Fore Color /Back Color

To change the color of the text or background color of the rows on the drill down grid, selectFore Color or Back Color, then select the desired color from the Color panel and click OK.

Font To change the font of the text on the drill down grid, select Font and then select the desired fontfrom the Font panel and click OK.

Save CurrentLayout

To save the current grid layout, click Save Current Layout. If the layout is new, then specify thename to be assigned to the new layout and click OK.

Save CurrentLayout As

To save the current grid layout as a new layout, select Save Current Layout As. Specify thename to be assigned to the new layout and click OK.

RemoveLayout FromList

To remove a layout, click the down arrow and select the layout to be removed, and then selectRemove Layout From List.

Use Default To apply the default layout to the grid, select Use Default.Note: This feature only applies to the ResultsContainer grid panel.

Set Layout asDefault

To set a default layout to be used for the drill down level and/or query, click the down arrow andselect the desired layout, and then select Set Layout as Default.Note: This feature only applies to Sub Query drill downs and ResultsContainer grid panels.

ColumnHeaders

To display only the standard column headers, select Default Column Headers, or to display theSQL field name beside the standard column header, select Column Headers w/ SQL Fields. Note: This feature does not apply to Ad Hoc, Query or Sub Query drill downs, orResultsContainer grid panels.

Groups andSubtotals:

To apply subtotals to grouped data, select the check box next to the desired column headerdescription(s). To remove a subtotal, clear the check box for the desired column.

Expand All To expand all grouped data in the grid, click the Expand All button.

Collapse All To collapse all grouped data in the grid, click the Collapse All button.

Sum Footers To display totals for numeric columns at the bottom of the drill down panel, select the SumFooters check box.

Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, List Accounts for a GXL Formula, View/Refresh Local Cache, orExecute Query.


7.11.1.1 Copy/Export Records

Spreadsheet Server allows for copying or exporting records from various panels (i.e. drill down, List Accounts, LocalCache, ResultsContainer). Copying and/or exporting options may vary slightly for different functions; however, basicprocessing is the same.

1. From the drill down or List Accounts grid, select the desired record(s):To copy/export a single record -- select the desired record.To copy/export select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows.To copy/export multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key,and select the last record in the range. To copy/export all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All -or- on the Options>Export fly out windowselect Select All.

2. Right click and select the appropriate copy/export function -or- on the Options>Export fly out window, select theappropriate copy/export function.

Copy to Clipboard -- places data on Windows clipboard. Copy to Clipboard w/Headings -- places data including headings on Windows clipboard. Copy to Excel (Simple) -- displays the Copy into Excel panel. See step 3.Copy to Excel with Layout -- displays the Export to Excel panel. See Copy to Excel with Layout.Export to CSV, PDF, RTF, or Excel (Full Format) -- brings up Windows Explorer panel.Export to Excel -- displays the Copy into Excel panel. See step 3.

3. On the Copy into Excel panel, specify the following processing criteria:Include Headings -- if selected, column headings are included in the copy. Select the appropriate radio button to indicate whether to copy to a worksheet, range or table destination. Whencopying to a worksheet, enter the starting cell in which to place the data and the target worksheet (new orexisting). When copying to a range or table, click the down arrow to select select the desired range or table.

4. Click OK. The system copies the data to the selected destination.

Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, List Accounts for a GXL Formula, View/Refresh Local Cache, orExecute Query.

GL Reporting 82


7.11.1.2 Copy to Excel with Layout

When copying selected drill down records to Excel, use the Copy to Excel with Layout function to apply the currentgrid layout to the copied data and to select other options such as grouping and subtotaling.

1. From the drill down grid, select the desired record(s):To copy a single record -- select the desired record.To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows.To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and selectthe last record in the range. To copy all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All -or- on the Options>Export fly out window selectSelect All.

2. On the Options>Export fly out window, select the Copy to Excel with Layout function. The Export to Excel panelappears.

3. Use the table to enter data on the Export to Excel panel.

Field Description

Excel Target

Worksheet/Range Name/Table Specify whether to export to a worksheet, range or table destination. Available parameters will vary based upon the option selected.

Target Click the down arrow and select an existing worksheet, range or table towhich to send the export data. When the Worksheet option is selected, anew name may be keyed in the field and the system will create the new worksheet when exporting the data.


Field Description

Starting Cell When the Worksheet option is selected, specify the starting cell intowhich to place the data.

Convert to Table When the Worksheet option is selected, select the check box to indicateto create a new table when exporting the data -and- specify the name to beassigned to the new table in the associated field.

Include Column Headings If selected, the export process includes column headers.

Format Non-Numeric Cells asText

If selected, the system formats non-numeric target cells as text.

Grouping and Subtotaling Note: The following options do not apply when either the Excel TargetTable or the Convert to Table option is selected.

Group By Click the down arrow and select the column(s) to subtotal. If columngrouping has been defined in the data grid, the column grouped automaticallyappears as a selected value.

Generate Outline for Subtotals If selected, the system activates Excel row grouping by subtotal for theexported data.

Subtotal By Select the corresponding check box to indicate to subtotal based on thechosen column(s).

Button Function

Reset Subtotal Clears all previously selected subtotal values.

Export to Excel Exports selected data to the target destination.

Cancel Cancels the export process and closes the panel.

4. Click Export to Excel. The system copies the data and displays the worksheet containing the exported data.

Click the link to go to a related topic: Copy/Export Records.

GL Reporting 84


7.11.2 Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from an amount on the spreadsheet to see what account balances make upthe value. The drill down results will appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet, and exclude zero balanceaccounts based upon options in the user's SS Settings.

1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and selectSpreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Account Balances drill down appears showing the balance for each individualaccount.

Nav Tip:Drill down results may also be pushed directly to a panel or worksheet by selecting the SS Ribbonequivalent.


7.11.2.1 Drill Down - Group By Segment

Group by Segment functionality allows the user to select an account segment for which to summarize the accountbalances, multiple account balances or summary drill down data. The group by results will exclude zero balanceaccounts based upon an option in the user's SS Settings.

Group by Segment will not function when:The selected segment contains an @ field, a partial/full account string, BLANK or NOTBLANK, or the selectedsegment contains a segment list which references an @ field or a partial/full account string.The GXL formula references a hard coded segment value.For Infinium - the GXL formula references user fields.For SAP special ledgers - the selected segment contains a dash or exclusion character.

To Group by Segment:1. From the Account Balances, Multiple Account Balances or Summary drill down panel, on the Options>Group By

Segment fly out window select the desired account segment. The system groups the drill down data by theselected account segment.

Note: The level of group by results will vary based upon the original account segment value.If the original account segment value does not reference segment lists and/or hierarchies, then results displayindividual segments.If the original account segment value references segment lists and/or hierarchies, then results break down byindividual segment lists and/or hierarchies, and the Options>Group By Segment navigation area will expand tolist appropriate segment lists and/or hierarchies.

2. As necessary, select another segment or segment break out to see additional summary data -orselect Full Detailto see original drill down data.

GL Reporting 86


7.11.2.1.1 Drill Down - Expand by Segment

Expand by Segment functionality allows the user to select an account segment for which to summarize grouped byaccount balances, multiple account balances or summary drill down data. The expand by results will appear in asingle panel or tabbed panel, and exclude zero balance accounts based upon options in the user's SS Settings.

To Expand by Segment:1. From the Account Balances, Multiple Account Balances or Summary drill down panel, on the Options>Group By

Segment fly out window select the desired account segment. The system groups the drill down data by theselected account segment.

2. Select the desired row(s), then right click and select the appropriate Expand by segment. The Expand By drilldown appears displaying a list of the account segments making up the selected group by drill down data.


7.11.3 Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances

Summary drill down functionality allows the user to select which account segments to use for grouping or summarizingthe accounts when displaying the account balances which make up the single GXL value. The drill down results willappear in a single panel or tabbed panel, exclude zero balance accounts, and display or omit the Summary Drill Downprompt panel based upon options in the user's SS Settings.

1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down>Summary Drill Down -or- rightclick and select Spreadsheet Server>Summary Drill Down. The Summary Drill Down panel appears listing accountsegments based upon the GXL formula and defaulting selections based upon the last time the function was used.

Note: For JDE ledgers only, multiple cells on the same row containing GXL formulas may be selected.

Nav Tip:This panel may be by-passed based upon an option in the user's SS Settings -or- by selecting the SSRibbon equivalent.

2. On the Summary Drill Down panel, select the account segments to be used for summarizing.

3. Click OK. The Summary Drill Down appears showing the balance for each detail account summarized based uponthe account segments selected on the previous panel (i.e. company, department, account in the example below).

Note: Journal List for Selected/All Accounts and Ad Hoc Drill Down options are not available from the SummaryDrill Down panel.

GL Reporting 88


7.11.4 Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from multiple cells on the same row on a spreadsheet to see what accountbalances make up the values. A maximum of 80 columns may be selected. The drill down results will appear in asingle panel, tabbed panel or worksheet, and exclude zero balance accounts based upon options in the user's SSSettings.

1. Select multiple cells on the same row containing GXL formulas, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- rightclick and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Multiple Account Balances drill down appears showing detailaccount balances for each column. If only two columns were selected, a variance column will automatically bedisplayed.

Nav Tip:Drill down results may also be pushed directly to a panel or worksheet by selecting the SS Ribbonequivalent.


7.11.5 Drill Down to Journals per Account(s)

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down to journals from detail account balances or directly from a GXL formula. Whendrilling down from detail account balances, the results appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon an option inthe user's SS Settings. When drilling down directly from a GXL formula, results appear on a panel or worksheet basedupon the method used to execute the function.

Note:Drill down to journals displays YTD journals when the specified Format is LTD.This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse, Designer GL ledgers and SAP special ledgers.For older versions of Infinium ledgers where the TXPJNO field does not exist, ensure that the exclude option isselected in the Configurator for the Infinium host configuration.

To Drill Down to Journals from a Drill Down panel:1. From the Account Balances or Expanded by Segment drill down, select the desired account(s):

Note: Drill down to journals from the Expanded by Segment drill down panel does not apply to BPCS 405, Infinium or Movex ledgers.

To select a single account -- double click the account. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals forthe selected account.To select multiple accounts -- press and hold the Ctrl key as accounts are selected on the grid rows, and thenright click and select Journal List for Selected Accounts. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals forthe selected accounts.To select multiple accounts in a range -- select the first account in the range, press and hold the Shift key andselect the last account in the range, and then right click and select Journal List for Selected Accounts. TheJournals drill down appears displaying journals for the selected accounts.To select all accounts in the grid -- right click and select Journal List for All Accounts. The Journals drill downappears displaying journals for the selected accounts.

From the Multiple Account Balances drill down, select the desired account(s):To select a single account/period -- double click the desired account, specify the desired column number andclick OK -or- double click the desired amount. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for theselected account/period.Note: To select multiple accounts, see above for basic processing steps.

GL Reporting 90


2. For BPCS 6+ users only, click the Analysis Fields button to populate the analysis fields on the current panel.

Warning:Response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system.

To Drill Down to Journals from a GXL Formula:1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon:

To display results on a panel -- click Click Drill Down>Drill Down>Panel>GL Journals. The Journals drill downappears displaying journals for all accounts associated with the selected GXL formula (see screen shot above).To push results to a worksheet -- click Drill Down>Drill Down>Worksheet>GL Journals. The system pushes thedrill down journal results for all accounts associated with the selected GXL formula to a worksheet.


7.11.6 Drill Down to Journal Entry Lines

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the journal entry lines which make up the journal (batch). Thedrill down results will appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon an option in the user's SS Settings.

Note: This function only applies to BPCS, Infinium, JDE, and Movex ledgers. For BPCS ledgers, an option in theuser's SS Settings controls a user's authority to this function. For Infinium and JDE ledgers, user settings in theConfigurator control a user's authority to this function.

1. From the Journals drill down, double click the desired journal -orselect the desired journal, right click and selectDisplay All Lines of Selected Journal. The Journal Entry Lines drill down appears displaying all the entry lines forthe journal.



GL Reporting 92


7.11.7 Drill Down to Detail Journal Entry Lines

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the detail journal entry lines which make up the journal. Thedrill down results will appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon an option in the user's SS Settings.

Note: This function only applies to BPCS ledgers.

1. From the Journals drill down, select the desired journal, right click and select View Detail Journal Lines. TheJournal Entry Lines drill down appears displaying detail journal entry lines for the journal.




7.11.8 Drill Down to Subsystem Detail

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the subsystem detail which make up the journal. The drilldown results will appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon an option in the user's SS Settings.

Note: This function only applies to Infinium, JDE, and Movex ledgers.

1. From the Journals drill down, select the desired journal, right click and select View Subsystem Detail. The SubSystem Lines drill down appears displaying subsystem details for the journal.

GL Reporting 94


7.11.9 Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc

Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from a predefined drill down panel or directly from a GXL formula to an ad hocquery. The Ad Hoc Drill Down option is only available when the user is licensed to the General Ledger feature, ad hocprocessing is allowed (a Configurator security setting), and ad hoc queries exist for the predefined drill down level. When drilling down from another drill down panel, the results appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon anoption in the user's SS Settings. When drilling down directly from a GXL formula, results appear on a panel orworksheet based upon the method used to execute the function.

Note: When processing an ad hoc query drill down, the list of available ad hoc queries is controlled by the Filter by GLoption on the Settings - Ad Hoc Queries panel (see SS Settings).

To Drill Down to a Selected Ad Hoc from a Drill Down Panel:1. From the predefined drill down panel, select the desired record(s) in the grid:

To select a single record -- click the record. To select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows.To select multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key andselect the last record in the range.To select all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All.

2. Right click and select Ad Hoc Drill Down. Then from the Ad Hoc Drill Down sub-menu select the query to be usedfor drilling down. The system displays the appropriate Ad Hoc Drill Down panel.

To Drill Down to a Selected Ad Hoc from a GXL Formula:1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon:

To display results on a panel -- click Drill Down>Drill Down>Panel>GL Journals>Prompt. The Select an Ad HocQuery panel appears. To push results to a worksheet -- click Drill Down>Drill Down>Worksheet>GL Journals>Prompt. The Select anAd Hoc Query panel appears.

2. Select the query to be used for drilling down and click OK. The drill down results for all accounts associated withthe GXL formula are displayed on a panel or pushed to a worksheet.


7.12 Miscellaneous Features

7.12.1 Account Security

An Accounts Profile allows an administrator to control the account strings that a particular user may access. AnAccounts Profile may be set up via the Maintain Accounts Profile button (see instructions below) or via theConfigurator. If Override User Account Profile values are assigned to the user in the Configurator, then the MaintainAccounts Profile function is only used to display, not maintain, the Accounts Profile.

Note: This feature is not applicable for Infinium, JDE or Oracle ledgers, nor does it apply when processing queries inQuery Designer or in Excel. Refer to the Oracle Database Security Notes section in the Configurator UserManual for Oracle security processing.

1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Settings. The Spreadsheet Server Settings - General panel appears.

2. Select GL Reporting on the navigation pane. The Spreadsheet Server Settings - GL Reporting panel appears.

3. Click the Maintain Accounts Profile button. The Accounts Profile panel appears.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting Accounts Profile from the ribbon on the Control Panel -GL Balances tab.

4. Click the Segment Labels down arrow and select the ledger or Designer GL definition for which to display accountsegments.

5. In the Account Mask fields on the Accounts Profile panel, specify the account string to which the user will haveaccess and click the Add button. Single account values, masks, ranges, value lists and segment lists. Whenusing a segment list, the segment list may not include "excluded" values. A maximum of 20 different accountstrings is allowed per profile.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all account masks for the account profile have been added.

GL Reporting 96


7. To remove an account mask from the list, select the value in the list and click the Remove button. To remove allaccount masks from the list, click the Clear All button.

8. To lock the account profile for security purposes (i.e. prevent others from making changes to the account profile),click the Lock icon button. The Password dialog box appears. Enter the desired password and click OK. Thispassword is required to change the account profile. It is not mandatory to lock an account profile.

9. To unlock the account profile, click the Unlock icon button. The Password dialog box appears. Enter the validpassword and click OK.

Note: In the event the individual password is lost or forgotten, contact your administrator for the override password.

10. When the account profile is complete, click the Close button.


7.12.2 List Accounts

Spreadsheet Server enables the user to generate a list of existing accounts. Filtering is available to control whichaccounts are listed.

Note: This function is not applicable for Designer GL ledgers.

1. In Excel right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The List Accounts panel appears.

2. On the List Accounts panel, specify the desired criteria (fields vary based upon selected ledger) and filter for whichaccounts to display, and then click the List Accounts button. The appropriate accounts are displayed on the ListAccounts panel. If the filter is left blank, the system will retrieve all account masters. When using a filter, a validaccount string combination should be used. In addition, the filter can include masks, ranges, and/or segment lists.

Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts for a GXL Formula, General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.

GL Reporting 98


7.12.3 Expand Detail Reports (GXE)

The Expand Detail option allows the user to select a single or multiple financial statement lines using GXL formulas andexpand the line(s) into the individual account details, similar to the Generate Account Detail option. This process isprimarily used to launch detailed financial statements into the same template. This option can be used for multipledepartments to ensure consistency for each report. Instead of creating each possible account number as different rowsin the spreadsheet, a single line can be created that contains ranges, segment lists, or wildcards. This line will then beexpanded into the applicable individual accounts and placed into a formatted worksheet via table, range, or row. Themaximum number of columns to be expanded is based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. See Expand toAccount Balances.

Additionally, the Expand Detail option allows the user to create a detail journal voucher listing for a specific summarybalance of accounts using the GXE formula. This process works similarly to the Expand Detail option for accountdetail, but uses additional parameters. See Expand to Journals.

The GXE formula contains a Part 1 and Part 2. Both parts are identical. Optionally use Part 2 to add a second GXEcalculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing for both account and journal details to be expanded from one GXEformula.


7.12.3.1 Expand to Account Balances

1. Create a standard Spreadsheet Server report for the GXL formula using Build a Template (see Build a Template). The single report line becomes the basis for the expanded report. When the process is executed the single linewill be expanded into individual account lines and placed into the final formatted worksheet (see below). Themaximum number of columns to be expanded is based upon an option in the user's SS Settings.

The example below shows a report based on an account mask.GXL formulas are created in a single line. In the example, the account string parameters are shown in cells B9:B13. The balance parameters of the GXL (i.e. type, budget name, year, format, period, translated, currency) areentered in each column heading (B1:C7). The actual GXL formulas are contained in cells B16 and C16.Standard Excel formula is used to calculate the variance in cell D16.Various literals are entered in cells E16:K16. This designation will generate the associated value into thatparticular column. Valid literals are ACCTNUM (account number), ACCTDESC (account description) andACCTSEGnn (where nn equals the account segment number, such as 01, 02, 03, etc.).Note: The GXE summarizes the generated results based upon the account segment literals (i.e. ACCTSEG01, ACCTSEG02, etc.)

specified on the GXE source detail row. The account segment literals entered on the source detail row will override the value

entered in the Summarize Balance Level field to determine how to summarize the results.

Example: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-AccountData: 001-10-1000-A, 001-10-1000-B, 001-20-1000-C, 002-10-1000-A , 002-10-1000-B Ex 1: Source Row contains ACCTSEG03 only; GXE Results = 1000Ex 2: Source Row contains ACCTSEG01 and ACCTSEG03; GXE Results = 001-1000 and 002-1000

Note: The GXE also supports legacy SSInfinium user field literals (UF01, UF02, UF03 and UF04), in addition to legacy SSJDE

account (i.e. ACCTCO, ACCTBU, ACCTOBJ, etc.) and category code (CATCODE, CATDESC) literals.

GL Reporting 100


2. Using Build a Template (see Build a Template) for the GXE formula, define the starting column and row andparameters for the formula.

Field Description Example

Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. A

Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. 18

Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summaryformulas that will be expanded.

GXE Source

Target Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the final formattedworksheet and will receive the expanded detail.

GXE Target

Source Detail Row Specify the row number in the source worksheet that contains thesummary formulas.

16

Target Table, Range,or Row

Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the targetworksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail.Note: When using a target range, identify the Excel range as all cellsunder the columns headers. In the example, Range1 is for cells A5thru J5.

Range1

Headings Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to include column headingswhen expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

N

Autofit Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to autofit columns whenexpanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

N

Clear Sheet Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to clear the target worksheetbefore expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specifiedfor the Target Table/Range/Row parameter.

N

Journals OnlyColumn

Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank)

Journals Ad HocQuery


Summarize BalanceLevel

If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to beused for summarizing data when expanding account balances.Note: Any ACCTSEGnn literals entered on the Source Detail Row willoverride this value.

In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify an @ field alias orfield name (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode orBUCatCode to control how to group expanded data.

4

Total Journal Level Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank)

Convert Journals toTable


3. After the GXE data has been entered and verified, click the Insert icon or button. The parameters and GXE formulaare inserted to the selected worksheet (see the sample spreadsheet above).

Formula Example:=GXE(B20,B19,B22,B21,B23,B24,B25,B26,B27,B28,B29,B30)


4. Format the Target Worksheet with headings in rows 1-3, blank rows in rows 4-6, and totals in row 7. Set each totalto a range of rows 4-6 (i.e. =SUM(B4:B6)). When the Expand Detail Reports function is initiated, the total line isshifted down or up, based upon the number of data rows populated each time the expansion is processed.

5. To generate detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook, from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>AllDetail Reports (GXE Formulas). The results for all GXE formulas are expanded into the appropriate formattedsheets.

To generate a detail report for a single GXE formula, select the cell containing the GXE formula, then from the SSRibbon select Generate Reports>Selected Detail Report (GXE Formula) -or- right click and select SpreadsheetServer>Generate This Detail Report (GXE). The results for the selected GXE formula are expanded into theappropriate formatted sheet.

GL Reporting 102


7.12.3.2 Expand to Journals

Note: The GXE expand to journals feature is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

1. Create a standard Spreadsheet Server report for the GXL formula using Build a Template (see Build a Template). The single balance becomes the basis for the journal entry detail. When the process is executed the singlecolumn balance will be expanded into detail journal lines and placed into the target worksheet (see below).

The example below shows a GXL formula totaling on an account mask. In the example, the account stringparameters are shown in cells B10:B14. The balance parameters of the GXL (i.e. type, budget name, year, format,period, translated, currency) are entered in the cells B1:B7. The actual GXL formula is contained in cell B17.

2. Using Build a Template (see Build a Template) for the GXE formula, define the starting column and row andparameters for the formula.

Field Description Example

Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. A

Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. 19


Field Description

Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summaryformulas that will be expanded.

GXE Source

Target Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the final formattedworksheet and will receive the expanded detail.

GXE Target

Source Detail Row Specify the row number in the source worksheet that contains thesummary formulas.

17

Target Table, Range,or Row

Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the targetworksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail.

1

Headings Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to include column headingswhen expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Y

Autofit Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to autofit columns whenexpanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Y

Clear Sheet Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to clear the target worksheetbefore expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed.

Y

Journals OnlyColumn

Specify the column containing the GXL balance for which to generatejournal detail.

B

Journals Ad HocQuery

If desired, identify the ad hoc query to be used to generate journaldetail.Note: An ad hoc query is required to expand journal detail for DataWarehouse and Designer GL ledgers.

Summarize BalanceLevel

For JDE ledgers only, if desired specify an @ field alias or field name(as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode tocontrol how to group expanded data. Otherwise field is not applicablewhen using the GXE to expand journal detail.

(leave blank)

Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generatesubtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals aregenerated at the selected level and each previous level.Note: This function is not applicable for Data Warehouse or DesignerGL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segmentnumber for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the numberof segments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use themaximum allowable number of segments.Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is anAcctCatCode or BUCatCode @ field alias or field name then an 'extra'account segment representing the category code is added to the frontof the account string. This will need to be taken into considerationwhen specifying the account segment number for which to generatesubtotals.

4

Convert Journals toTable

If desired, click the down arrow and select whether or not to placeexpanded journal entry details into a table. When this option is used,the system creates a new table on the specified target worksheet andassigns the next available standard Excel table name. The tableincludes headers and grand totals, except when a journals ad hocquery is used. This option is ignored if the specified Target is a rangeor table, or if Total Journal Level is not blank. If not specified, N (No) isassumed.Note: When this option is set to Y and have multiple GXEs to journalsin the workbook, then set the Clear Sheet option to Y to avoid errors.

N

GL Reporting 104


3. After the GXE data has been entered and verified, click the Insert icon or button. The parameters and GXE formulaare inserted to the selected worksheet (see the sample spreadsheet above).

Formula Example:=GXE(B20,B19,B22,B21,B23,B24,B25,B26,B27,B28,B29,B30)

4. To generate detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook, from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>AllDetail Reports (GXE Formulas). The results for all GXE formulas are expanded into the appropriate formattedsheets.

To generate a detail report for a single GXE formula, select the cell containing the GXE formula, then from the SSRibbon select Generate Reports>Selected Detail Report (GXE Formula) -or- right click and select SpreadsheetServer>Generate This Detail Report (GXE). The results for the selected GXE formula are expanded into theappropriate formatted sheet.


7.12.4 Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet

The Generate Account Detail option allows the user to create an audit trail which lists the individual accounts andbalances included in the GXL formulas of the worksheet.

1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Generate Reports>Account Detail Report. The Generate Account DetailOptions panel appears.

2. On the Generate Account Detail Options panel, specify the following processing criteria:Source Worksheet Input - Column - Identify the column within the worksheet that contains the report linedescription. This description is used as the first column in the extracted audit trail.Source Worksheet Input - Row - Identify the first row containing a GXL formula to be used in generating thedetail. This will set the starting point for the extracted audit trail. Target Options - Indicate whether to copy the selected records to the standard Windows clipboard or topaste data directly to a target worksheet in the spreadsheet. When pasting directly to a worksheet, astarting cell into which to place the data and a target worksheet (new or existing) must be specified.

3. Click OK. An audit trail showing the line description, all included accounts, and their balances will be generated.

GL Reporting 106


7.12.5 Hide Rows with Zero Balances

The Hide Rows with Zero Balances function will analyze the active workbook or worksheet and perform a row hidefunction for any spreadsheet row that contains GXL formulas in which the net result is zero for all cells. This function isvery effective for standardized reporting templates such as departmental reports. Multiple rows can be created as atemplate but the function can then hide non-used or zero rows.

To Hide Rows with Zero Balances in the Workbook: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Hide Rows with Zero Balances.

To Hide Rows with Zero Balances on the Worksheet: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Hide Rows>Hide Zero Balance Rows (Worksheet).

To Restore Hidden Rows in the Workbook:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Restore Hidden Rows (Workbook).

To Restore Hidden Rows on the Worksheet:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Restore Rows>Restore Hidden Rows (Worksheet).


7.12.6 Reset Host Server Connection

Spreadsheet Server allows the user to switch from one host server to another without having to close and restartExcel.

1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Enabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Disable) -or- selectTools>Disconnect All Open Connections. The system disconnects from the host system(s).

2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). Theappropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger.

Note: For Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears.

3. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, and then click Login or OK.

Note: When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, step 3 is not applicable.






GL Reporting 108


7.12.7 SS Validation

Spreadsheet Server gives the user the ability to create a validation list in a specific cell in Excel. Validation lists aredrop down lists that allow the user to choose from a valid list of options/field values.

1. Select a cell to hold the validation list, then from the SS Ribbon select Tools>Data Validation -or- right click andselect Spreadsheet Server>Validation. The Data Validation panel displays. The available types of data on thepanel vary based upon the selected ledger.

2. Select the type of data for which to build a list -or- enter valid values separated by a comma in the Custom field,and click OK to push validation to the current cell. When Year is selected, a prompt panel appears allowing theuser to specify the range of years to be included in the validation list.

Note: Validation Lists are limited by Excel to 255 characters.

3. On the Excel worksheet when the appropriate cell is selected, a drop down button appears indicating that validvalues exist for the cell. Click on the drop down arrow button to display the Validation List.

4. Click on the desired value. The system returns the selected value to the appropriate cell.

5. To maintain valid values for a cell, select the cell and from the Excel menu, select Data>Validation -orfrom theExcel ribbon select Data>Data Tools>Data Validation. The Data Validation panel appears. Refer to Excel Help foradditional instructions.


7.12.8 SS View Log

During all processing, various logging information is recorded. If the Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected,then the system records additional error message logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or emailed.

1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Tools>View Log. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date,time, task ID, and description for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays acount of the number of entries listed.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the View Log button on the Spreadsheet Server Settings -General panel.

Note: To select a different time format or font size, click the respective drop down arrow in the bottom right handcorner.

2. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and then eitherclick the Copy Selected Errors button -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on the popuppanel:

To copy a single record -- select the desired record.To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list.To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and selectthe last record in the range.

GL Reporting 110


3. To email the entire log file to the helpdesk, click the Email Error Log button. The system opens a new Outlook®email panel with the log file attached. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body as necessary andclick the Send button.

Note: When emailing the log via the View Log button from the Settings function, system information isautomatically added to the body of the email.

4. To filter the entries in the log file, select the desired message type(s), date/time range, containing text, class,method and/or task ID in the Filter section. The system displays only entries matching the selection criteria. Click the Clear Filter button to reset all filter fields to their default value.

5. To search for a specific value in the log file, key the desired value in the Find What field and click the Find Nextbutton. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Click the Find Next button again, to find thenext occurrence of the selected value.

6. To clear the log file, click the Clear Log button.

7. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panelappears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Properties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in thelist. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click the Copy button. Click the Close button toreturn to the Log Viewer panel.

8. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click the Close button.


7.12.9 Upgrade Segment List

The Upgrade Segment List function is used to convert pre-V14 Spreadsheet Server segment lists to the revised V14segment list file format. A user's ability to upgrade/maintain segment lists is determined by a parameter settingdefined in User settings in the Configurator.

Note: If the segment list has not been converted to the revised V14 format, then the user may be prompted to convertthe segment list file during the install of V14, when starting Spreadsheet Server, or when accessing the SegmentList function.

To Upgrade the Segment List File:1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Upgrade Segment List. The

Upgrade Segment List panel appears.

2. Click OK. The system makes a backup of the segment list file, converts the file and displays message(s)indicating the results.

Note: After the segment list upgrade process is complete, Global recommends reviewing all segment lists via theSegment List function.

GL Reporting 112


7.12.10 Upgrade Workbook

The Upgrade Workbook function is used to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in aworkbook to revised Spreadsheet Server formulas.

Legacy Formulas Revised Formulas Ledger(s)

GXA, GXAB, GXU, FXA (see note) GXL BPCS, Infinium, JDE, Movex,select Designer GLs

EXQ, EXD, EXI, EXS GEXQ, GEXD, GEXI, GEXS respectively not applicable

Description formulas (i.e. GXD,BUDESC, CODESC)

GXD Infinium, JDE

Report formulas (i.e. GXE, GXECC) GXE Infinium, JDE

GXSALES GXSALES JDE

Note: Legacy JDE FXA formulas convert to JDE_FXA Designer GL GXL formulas.

To Upgrade a Workbook:1. Open the workbook containing the formula(s) to be converted, then from the SS Ribbon select Tools>Upgrade

Workbook. The Upgrade Workbook Options panel appears. The available options will vary based upon theselected ledger and the user's licensed features.

2. Select the desired formula(s) to be converted, then click Convert. The system makes a backup of the workbook,converts the formulas accordingly and displays message(s) indicating the results.

Note: After converting legacy JDE FXA formulas assigned to multiple host configurations (i.e. SSFXA1, SSFXA2),manual intervention may be required to modify the Designer GL definition assigned to the GXL formulas.


7.12.11 User Defined Functions

Multiple user defined functions are available in Spreadsheet Server for retrieving various data. Below is a list of the non-formula (i.e. GXL, GXD) user defined functions supported by Spreadsheet Server.

User Defined Function Description

SS_GetComment() Retrieves the comment entered in Excel for the specified cell reference(i.e. SS_GetComment(A10)).

SS_Layout() Retrieves a custom layout definition as a parameter. This functionaccepts one parameter (i.e. SS_Layout(<xml>) where <xml> representsthe entire xml string of the layout definition.

SS_ProfileSetting() Retrieves a property from a Designer GL profile. This function acceptstwo parameters (i.e. SS_ProfileSetting(SettingName as String,OptionalProfileName as String). Available setting names are ProfileName,Key1Name, Key2Name and SegmentName## (where ## is the segmentnumber).

SS_Setting() Retrieves a property from the SSSettings file. This function accepts oneparameter (i.e. SS_Setting(SettingName).

SS_ValueListFromRange() Creates a value list of cells that may be referenced in other formulas.This function accepts an array of values or actual ranges (i.e. A10:A15)up to 35 parameters.

UpdateDesignerGLAccountString() Updates an account string without a delimiter based upon the defaultDesigner GL definition. This function may only be called as a macro. The user must highlight the range of data to be updated, then executethe macro.

GL Reporting 114


7.13 Analyst

7.13.1 Analyst Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Analyst ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Sign Onto Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears.

3. Various methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server based upon the connection protocol beingused: Options 1 - iSeries or SQL Server:

Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library or catalog containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries or SQL Server sign onPassword - standard iSeries or SQL Server password

Option 2 - Oracle Direct Connect:Select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:

Host Name or IP Address - host or IP Address that hosts the databaseService - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is locatedPort - port numberUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator


Option 3 - Oracle Client:Do not select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:

Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net ManagerUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

4. Click OK.

Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset HostServer Connection.

GL Reporting 116


7.13.2 Analyst Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Analyst panel. A link is availableat the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Analyst Build a TemplateOptions:

QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build aTemplate>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building aGXL formula.

Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item.

Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.


7.13.3 Analyst Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor an Analyst ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for which to retrieve data. Valid values are ACTUALAMT, ACTUALQTY, BUDGETAMT, andBUDGETQTY.

Budget Name When Data Type is BUDGETAMT or BUDGETQTY, click the down arrowand select the budget name for which to retrieve data.


Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE.


Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

GL Reporting 118


7.13.4 Analyst GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for an Analyst ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Data Type","Budget Name","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Data TypeIdentifies the data type. Valid types are ACTUALAMT, ACTUALQTY, BUDGETAMT, and BUDGETQTY.

Budget NameIdentifies the budget name. This value is required when Data Type is BUDGETAMT or BUDGETQTY.

Key 3Currently not used. Enter 0.


FormatFormat options are:

PER Activity for the selected period







Account Segment 1 - 9Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, GL Account, Department, Product, SalesRep, Region, Customer Type, Budget Account, Employee). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segmentlist, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using a Mask:=GXL("ACTUALAMT","*","2004","PER","1","10","1*","*","*","*","*","*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 1 of 2004 with a mask for every GL account beginning with "1".


Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for AccountValues.

GL Reporting 120


7.13.5 Analyst GXD

For an Analyst ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment.

Syntax:=GXD("Segment Num","Value")

Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters.

Parameters:Segment NumIdentifies the segment number of the account string for which to retrieve the description.

ValueIdentifies the value of the account segment for which to retrieve the description.

Formula Example - Using a Single Segment:=GXD("2","1200")Retrieves the description for account segment 2 value 1200.

Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments:=GXD("1","10")& "-" &GXD("2","1200")Retrieves the description for company segment 10 and concatenates the description for account segment1200.

Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.


7.14 BPCS

7.14.1 BPCS Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a BPCS ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 thru 5 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information:Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries sign onPassword - standard iSeries password

4. Click OK.

5. For BPCS 6.02 users only, on the BPCS Chart of Accounts Name panel specify the name of the chart of accountsto be used and click OK.


GL Reporting 122


7.14.2 BPCS 4.05 Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 4.05CD panel, or to accessother functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

BPCS 4.05CD ConnectionOptions:

Retrieve Account Balancesand Descriptions for PreloadedLocal PC Database

If selected, Spreadsheet Server retrieves GL balances from the preloadedlocal PC database. Otherwise, the system retrieves balances from thehost General Ledger system.

Operate CompletelyDisconnected from Host

When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PCDatabase and this option are selected, the user works disconnected fromthe host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail.

BPCS 4.05CD Library Options:

Budget Library Specify the name of the library containing budget data.

Budget File Name Specify the name of the file containing budget data.

Library for RCOL01 Specify the name of the library containing the RCOL01 file.

BPCS 4.05CD ProcessingOptions:

GXL: Include Opening Balancein YTD Format Calculations

If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculatingthe YTD format.

GXL/Drill Down: IncludeConsolidated Accounts

If selected, the GXL formula and drill downs include consolidated accountsin the account balance.


Field Description

Drill Down: Allow Journal Lines If selected, drill down to journal lines is allowed. This function is passwordprotected.

List Accounts: ExcludeInactive Accounts

If selected, the List Accounts function excludes inactive accounts.

BPCS 4.05CD Build aTemplate Options:



Button Function

Load Local PC Database Displays the Load Local PC Database panel, allowing the user todownload account balances to a local database in order to optimizecalculation speeds (see BPCS Load Local Data).


GL Reporting 124


7.14.3 BPCS 6.02 Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 6.02 panel, or to accessother functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

BPCS 6.02 ConnectionOptions:

Retrieve Account Balances andDescriptions for PreloadedLocal PC Database



When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded LocalPC Database and this option are selected, the user works disconnectedfrom the host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail.

BPCS 6.02 Chart of AccountOptions:

Default Chart of Accounts Click the down arrow and select the BPCS chart of accounts from whichto retrieve data.

Number of Segments inAccount Structure

Specify the number of segments in the account structure (i.e. Company,Division, etc.) and to be displayed in Spreadsheet Server.


Field Description

Segments 1 - 14 Specify the title for each account segment in the account structure. These default based upon the chart of accounts selected, but may bechanged if necessary.

Account Segment NumberUsed for GXD Descriptions

Specify the segment number to be used for retrieving account descriptionsfor GXD formulas and on the Account Balances drill down panel.

BPCS 6.02 ProcessingOptions:



GXE: Display Analysis Data inJournal Results

If selected, Analysis Data fields are populated when expanding the GXEformula for journals. When selected, response time will vary based uponthe size of the journal detail file on the host system.



Journal Entry Drill Down: ViewPreference

Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display in thejournal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only,Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted.

BPCS 6.02 Build a TemplateOptions:



Button Function


Refresh Clears the current segment descriptions and then retrieves them basedupon the selected chart of accounts, and refreshes the list of availablechart of accounts.


GL Reporting 126


7.14.4 BPCS 6.04+ Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Sever Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 6.04+ panel, or to accessother functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

BPCS 6.04+ ConnectionOptions:

Retrieve Account Balancesand Descriptions for PreloadedLocal PC Database



When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PCDatabase and this option are selected, the user works disconnected fromthe host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail.

BPCS 6.04+ Chart of AccountOptions:

Default Chart of Accounts Click the down arrow and select the appropriate BPCS chart of accountsfrom which to retrieve data.


Specify the number of segments in the account structure (i.e. Company,Division, etc.) and to be displayed in Spreadsheet Server.


Field Description

Segments 1 - 14 Specify the title for each account segment in the account structure. Thesedefault based upon the chart of accounts selected, but may be changed ifnecessary.

BPCS 6.04+ ProcessingOptions:



GXE: Display Analysis Data inJournal Results

If selected, Analysis Data fields are populated when expanding the GXEformula for journals. When selected, response time will vary based uponthe size of the journal detail file on the host system.




Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display in thejournal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only,Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted.

BPCS 6.04+ Build a TemplateOptions:



Button Function


Refresh Clears the current segment descriptions and then retrieves them basedupon the selected chart of accounts, and refreshes the list of availablechart of accounts.


GL Reporting 128


7.14.5 BPCS Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a BPCS ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Datagroup (Version 4.05) Specify the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE,BUDGETA, BUDGETB, and CBnn (where nn is the budget number).

Ledger (Version 6+) Specify the CEA ledger.

Book (Version 6+) Specify the CEA book.

Year (Version 6+) Click the down arrow and select the reporting year.

Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, PERJ, QTRJ andYTDJ.




7.14.6 BPCS GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a BPCS ledger.

Syntax - Version 4.05:=GXL("Datagroup","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3")

Syntax - Version 6+:=GXL("Ledger","Book","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Datagroup (Version 4.05)Identifies the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB and CBnn(where nn equals the budget number).

Ledger (Version 6+)Identifies the CEA ledger.

Book (Version 6+)Identifies the CEA book.

Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessaryliteral and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by asemi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used.

Enter the literal "STAT=Y" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances.Enter the literal "LIBRARY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library to be used. If left blank,Spreadsheet Server uses the library specified during sign on.Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision.

Year (Version 6+)Year identifier.





YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including theopening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel



PERJ Period activity for the selected month, including unposted JVs

QTRJ Activity for periods included in the selected quarter number, including unposted JVs

YTDJ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including theopening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel

GL Reporting 130



Account Segment 1 - 14Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based uponthe account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchyvalue or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Single Values:=GXL("JRH","JRH-E ACT","0","2001","PER","4","50","000","15130")Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2001 for a single account string.

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using a Mask and a Range:=GXL("JRH","JRH-E ACT","0","2001","PER","4","50","*","21454.22999")Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2001 for all departments for the account range of 21454 thru 22999.



7.14.7 BPCS GXD

For a BPCS ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. For BPCS6.02 ledgers, an option in the user's Ledger Specific Settings determine the account segment used to retrieve theaccount description.

Syntax - Version 4.05:=GXD("Account String")

Syntax - Version 6+:=GXD("Account String","Ledger")


Parameters:Account StringEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number ofaccount segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger.


Formula Example - Version 4.05:=GXD("30-000-31112")Retrieves the account description for the account string 30-000-31112.

Formula Example - Version 6+:=GXD("50-000-31112","JRH")Retrieves the account description for the account string 50-000-31112 from the JRH ledger.


GL Reporting 132


7.14.8 BPCS 6+ GSV

For a BPCS Version 6+ ledger only, the GSV formula is used to retrieve a segment description for any segment in theaccount string.

Syntax - Version 6+:=GSV("Segment Value","Segment Name")

Note: It is most common to use cell references within GSV formulas to identify parameters.

Parameters:Segment NameThe segment name represents the exact name of the segment within CEA.

Formula Example:=GSV("540","DEPT")Retrieves the segment description for DEPT 540.


7.14.9 BPCS GXA

The GXA formula is a legacy formula used to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. Thefollowing is an overview for the GXA formula for a BPCS ledger.

Note: The GXA formula has been retained for backwards compatibility with prior Spreadsheet Server releases. TheGXL formula has been created to replace the GXA formula (see BPCS GXL). Use the Upgrade Workbookfunction to convert GXA formulas to GXL formulas (see Upgrade Workbook).

Syntax - Version 4.05:=GXA("Account String","Datagroup","Format","Period","Key 3")

Syntax - Version 6+:=GXA("Account String","Ledger","Book","Year","Format","Period","Key 3")

Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXA formulas to identify parameters.

Parameters:Account StringThe account string represents the account segments delimited by a dash. The number of account segments willvary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, orsegment list (see Account Segment Syntax).

Datagroup (Version 4.05)Identifies the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB and CBnn(where nn equals the budget number).


Book (Version 6+)Identifies the CEA book.

Year (Version 6+)Year identifier.







PERJ Period activity for the selected month, including unposted JVs

QTRJ Activity for periods included in the selected quarter number, including unposted JVs

YTDJ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including theopening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel

GL Reporting 134



Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessaryliteral and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by asemi-colon. Enter leave blank if not used.

Enter the literal "STAT" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances.Enter the literal "XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library to be used. If left blank, SpreadsheetServer uses the library specified during sign on. Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision.

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Single Values:=GXA("50-000-31112","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4")Retrieves the monetary balance for period 4 of 2001 for a single account string.

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Statistics:=GXA("50-*-*","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4","STAT")Retrieves the statistics balances from the actual book within the JRH ledger for period 4 for an account mask.

Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Alternate Library Name:=GXA("50-000-31112","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4","BPCS")Retrieves the monetary balance for period 4 of 2001 for a single account from the alternate library, BPCS.


Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Budget Manager:=GXA("50-000-31112","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2004" "PER","4","Budget:Fiscal2005:003")Retrieves the budget balance from budget Fiscal2005 revision 003, for period 4 of 2004 for a single account string.

GL Reporting 136


7.14.10 BPCS Load Local Data

For BPCS ledgers, the option exists to download account balance information into a local database, allowing foroptimized calculation speeds.


Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings button on the Control Panel.

2. From the navigation pane under Ledger Specifics, select the appropriate BPCS ledger. The selected SpreadsheetServer Settings - Ledger Specifics panel appears.

3. On the Ledger Specifics panel, click the Load Local PC Database button. The Load Local PC Database panelappears.

4. The top portion of the panel identifies the location for the local database. This setting defaults from user's SSSettings but may be changed by clicking the Browse button and selecting a new location.

5. Select whether or not to include the chart of accounts and/or segment descriptions in the download. In addition,the middle portion of the panel displays the existing data in the database. Click the ledger to be downloaded. Tomake multiple selections, hold down the Ctrl key and click on the desired ledgers -or- to select all ledgers, clickthe Select All button.

6. Once selection is complete, click the Load BPCS Local Database button. The progress of the download displayson the bottom portion of the panel. To stop the download process, click the Stop Loading button.

7. When the download is complete, click OK.


7.15 Data Warehouse

7.15.1 Data Warehouse Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Data Warehouse ledger.

Note: When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is notapplicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable).


GL Reporting 138


7.15.2 Data Warehouse Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Data Warehouse panel, or toaccess other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Data Warehouse Options:

Current Profile Click the down arrow and select the Data Warehouse profile to load.

Data Warehouse Build aTemplate Options:



Button Function

Load Data Warehouse Displays the Load Data Warehouse From GL panel. Use this panel toload data into the Data Warehouse profile.



7.15.3 Data Warehouse Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Data Warehouse ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section toreview generic processing fields.

Field Description

Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for theselected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Balance Type

Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for theselected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Organization




Profile Click the down arrow and select the desired Data Warehouse profile.


GL Reporting 140


7.15.4 Data Warehouse GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Data Warehouse ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Key1","Key2","Year","Format","Period","Profile","Account Segment 1","Account Segment2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Key 1Value entered for key 1 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Data Warehouseprofile. Ex: Balance Type

Key 2Value entered for key 2 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Data Warehouseprofile. Ex: Organization










ProfileIdentifies the Data Warehouse profile.

Account Segment 1 - nnEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based uponthe account structure for the selected Data Warehouse profile. May be a single value, mask, range, value list,segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using a Mask:=GXL("Actuals","ABC","2009","PER","1","SS_Sample","ABC","1*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 1 of 2009 with a mask for every account beginning with "1".



GL Reporting 142


7.15.5 Data Warehouse GXD

For a Data Warehouse ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string.

Syntax:=GXD("Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","AccountSegment 5"...)


Parameters:Account StringEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number ofaccount segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected Data Warehouse profile.

Formula Example:=GXD("ABC","115","00","01")Retrieves the account description for the account string ABC-115-00-01.



7.16 Designer GL

7.16.1 Designer GL Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Designer GL ledger.

Note: When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is notapplicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable).

Note: For most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears.


GL Reporting 144


7.16.2 Designer GL Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Designer GL panel, or to accessother functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Designer GL Options:

File Name Specify the Designer GL file name. May use alpha, numeric or underscorecharacters.

Connection Name Click the down arrow and select the connection name. Right click andselect Refresh to refresh the data.

Key 1 Caption Specify the caption for key 1.

Key 1 Data Validation Specify the values to be included in the Key 1 drop down list.

Key 2 Caption Specify the caption for key 2.

Key 2 Data Validation Specify the values to be included in the Key 2 drop down list.



SAP: Secondary DatabaseConnection

For SAP designer GLs only, if desired specify the name of the secondarydatabase connection to be used for processing.


Field Description

SQL TRIM Supported If selected, the TRIM function used in SQL to remove a specified prefix orsuffix from a string is supported.

Preload HSegments If selected, HSegment values are preloaded into cache when SpreadsheetServer is started. If not selected, the Hierarchy option in the LocateSegment function is disabled, as there are no values to display.

Reset Connections on ClearCache & Recalculate

If selected, the system closes and reopens connections when the ClearCache & Recalculate function is processed in an effort to improveperformance. This option should only be selected in specific scenarios. Please contact Global prior to selecting this option.

Button Function

Set Default Designer GL Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select/setthe default Designer GL without having to enter a password.

Load Default GL Definition Loads the default Designer GL data on the panel. This function ispassword protected.

Browse for GL Definition Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select aDesigner GL. This function is password protected.

Refresh Acct Key Sec Cache Refreshes the account segment security cache to process any changesmade to ad hoc files.

Save Saves changes to the Designer GL definition.

Note: The various Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Designer GL - suboptions are used to maintainDesigner GL definitions. These panels are password protected. Contact Global for more information.


GL Reporting 146


7.16.3 Designer GL Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Designer GL ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Key 1 Click the down arrow and select a value, or manually key a value (see note). The header and field value will vary based upon selected Designer GL requirements. Ex: APlus - Key 1 = Library

Key 2 Click the down arrow and select a value, or manually key a value (see note). The header and field value will vary based upon selected Designer GL requirements. Ex: APlus - Key 2 = Balance Type




Designer GL Defaults the value from Available Designer GL Definitions.

Available Designer GLDefinitions

Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which toretrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameterson the panel to match the selected definition.

Note: The system does not verify that the value manually keyed is a valid value (i.e. contained in the drop down list).



7.16.4 Designer GL GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Designer GL ledger.

Note: The Designer GL definition for APlus is being used in the examples below.

Syntax:=GXL("Key 1","Key 2","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Key 1Value entered for key 1 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Designer GL. Ex:APlus - Key 1 - Library

Key 2Value entered for key 2 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Designer GL. Ex:APlus - Key 2 = Balance Type

Key 3Identifies the Designer GL Definition.










Account Segment 1 - nnEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based uponthe account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchyvalue or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Note: For ASI Designer GLs ONLY, when the actual account segment value is '*' in the GL database, use '#' in theGXL formula instead of '*' for the account segment value.

GL Reporting 148


Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL("APLUS","ACTUAL","CUSTOMGL="APLUS";","2007","PER","8","1","0000","0","8050","5010","310.350")Retrieves the actual activity for period 8 of 2007 for a range of account codes 310 to 350.

Formula Example - Using a Mask:=GXL("APLUS","ACTUAL","CUSTOMGL="APLUS";","2007","PER","8","1","0000","0","8*","5010","310")Retrieves the actual activity for period 8 of 2007 with a mask for every department beginning with "8".



7.17 Infinium

7.17.1 Infinium Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Infinium ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server:Option 1 - Pre-defined Connection User Name:

Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the ConfiguratorRetrieve account balances from local database

Option 2 - <Sign-On>:Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries sign onPassword - standard iSeries passwordRetrieve account balances from local database

4. When the Retrieve account balances from local database option is selected, click More... and specify the following:Local Database Type - indicates the database type and connection or database pathWork in Local Mode without a connectionNote: When working without a connection, the user only has access to account balances in the local database file. As a result drill

downs to journals, GXEs to journals, GXDs, and list accounts will not be functional. In addition, Infinium security is not

utilized; however, the system continues to verify that the user is a valid Spreadsheet Server user, thus the user must have the

Configurator on their hard drive.

5. Click OK.


GL Reporting 150


7.17.2 Infinium Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Infinium panel. A link is availableat the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Infinium Segment Options:


Specify the maximum number of account segments to be used forprocessing in Spreadsheet Server.

Account Segments Specify the name for each account segment.

User Fields Specify the name for each user field.

Infinium Processing Options:



Infinium Build a TemplateOptions:





7.17.3 Infinium Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor an Infinium ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are M(Monetary), S (Statistical), D (Debit Balances), C (Credit Balances), 1(Numeric User Field 1) and 2 (Numeric User Field 2). Note: Currency must be blank when balance type is S.

Budget/Actuals Specify whether to retrieve actual or budget data. Valid values areACTUALS or the name of the budget.




Currency Specify a valid currency code, or leave blank when retrieving statisticalbalances. Enter * to retrieve all currencies.

Database Library If applicable, specify the database library from which to retrieve the data. The library entered here overrides the default library in the Configurator orthe library specified during the sign on process.

GL Reporting 152


Field Description

Append If selected, adds an AND/OR user list comparison to the account stringcriteria.

And/Or When Append is selected, specify the appropriate user list criteriaoperand. Valid values are AND (account must meet both the accountstring and user list criteria) and OR (account must meet either the accountstring or user list criteria).

User List When Append is selected, specify the user list to be used by the formula.Note: The user list must be established in the segment list file (seeCreate/Maintain Segment Lists). The syntax used for entering the user listis @nnnn (where nnnn is the user list name).

User Fields Click the down arrow and select whether to toggle the account segmentsto user fields. Valid values are NA (use account segments), Y (use userfields), or N (use account segments). If not specified, NA is assumed.



7.17.4 Infinium GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for an Infinium ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Balance Type","Budget/Actuals","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Balance TypeBalance types are:

M Monetary balances

S Statistical balances (currency code must be blank)

D Debit balances

C Credit balances

1 Numeric User Field 1

2 Numeric User Field 2

Budget/ActualsIdentifies whether to retrieve actual or budget data. Valid values are ACTUALS or the budget name. The value inKey 2 is ignored when the Key 3 parameter contains references to Budget Manager.

Key 3Optionally identifies currency, alternate database library, append user list (AND or OR), use user fields instead ofaccount segments, and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon.

Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Must be blank whenretrieving statistical balances. Enter * to retrieve all currencies.Enter the literal "LIBRARY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library which overrides the default library inthe Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process.Enter the literal "ANDUSERLIST:NNNN" where NNNN is the user list name. Account must meet both the accountstring and user list criteria.Enter the literal "ORUSERLIST:NNNN" where NNNN is the user list name. Account must meet either the accountstring or user list criteria.Enter the literal "INFINIUMUSERFIELDS=X" where X is NA (use account segments), Y (use user fields), or N (useaccount segments). If not specified, NA is assumed.Enter the literal "BUDGETNAME=NNNN" and "BUDGETREVISION=XXX where NNNN is the budget name and XXXis the budget revision.


GL Reporting 154










Account Segment 1 - 9Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Segment 2 - 9). The number of accountsegments are based upon the number specified in the user's Ledger Specifics Settings. May be a single value,BLANK value, NOTBLANK value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see AccountSegment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using Single Values:=GXL("M","Actuals","CURRENCY=USD";"LIBRARY=","2001","PER","1","001","000","1070","001")Retrieves the actual monetary activity for period 1 of 2001 for account string 001-000-1070-001.


Formula Example - Using User Fields:=GXL("M","Actuals","CURRENCY=USD";"LIBRARY=";"INFINIUMUSERFIELDS=Y","2001","PER","1","001","BEN","4000","DIST","PROD")Retrieves the actual monetary activity for period 1 of 2001 for company 001 using user fields 1, 2, 3 and 4 criteria.

Formula Example - Using a User List:=GXL("M","Actuals","LIBRARY=";"CURRENCY=USD";"ANDUSERLIST=@Tax","2002","YTD","11","001","310","6*","*")Retrieves actual monetary year-to-date activity thru period 11 for accounts beginning with 6 which also meet the userfield criteria in the TAX segment list.


GL Reporting 156


7.17.5 Infinium GXD

For an Infinium ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. In theevent multiple accounts are referenced in a single GXD formula, then the system returns the description for the firstaccount string found, and adds a warning message to the log indicating that the GXD results returned more than onerecord.

Syntax:=GXD("Library","Account String")


Parameters:LibraryIdentifies the alternate library from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional. If left blank, the system uses the default library in the Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process.

Account StringEnter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number ofaccount segments are based upon the number specified in the user's Ledger Specifics Settings.

Formula Examples:=GXD(,"001","310","6000","005")Retrieves the account description for the account string 001-310-6000-005.



7.18 Jack Henry

7.18.1 JH Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Jack Henry ledger.When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information:Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries sign onPassword - standard iSeries password

4. Click OK.


GL Reporting 158


7.18.2 JH Ledger Specifics

Jack Henry Silverlake

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Jack Henry Silverlake panel. A linkis available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Jack Henry SilverlakeOptions:

Current Year Specify the current accounting year in the ledger.

Use Alternate Open BalanceCalculation (CMEB1 - CMTD1)

If selected, an alternate opening balance calculation is performed resolvinga Retained Earnings/Consolidation issue in BEGCYR fields.

Jack Henry Silverlake Build aTemplate Options:



Jack Henry 20/20


Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Jack Henry 20/20 panel. A link isavailable at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Jack Henry 20/20 Options:

Current Year Specify the current accounting year in the ledger.

Jack Henry 20/20 Build aTemplate Options:




GL Reporting 160


7.18.3 JH Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Jack Henry ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for which to retrieve data. Silverlake valid values are ACTUAL, AGGREGATE, AVERAGE,BUDGETA, BUDGETB, CURBAL and YESBAL.CIF 20/20 valid values are ACTUAL, AGGREGATE, BUDGETA,BUDGETB, CBAL and YESBAL.

Time Span Click the down arrow and select the time span for which to retrieve data. Silverlake valid values are CURRENT, PRIOR1, PRIOR2 and FUTURE.CIF 20/20 valid values are CURRENT and PRIOR1.

Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. This field is forinformational purposes only.



Level Click the down arrow and select the account posting level. Zero indicatesdetail level account, 1-8 indicates roll up level account, and blank includesall account levels.



7.18.4 JH GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Jack Henry ledger.

Syntax - Silverlake:=GXL("Data Type","Time Span","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5")

Syntax - CIF 20/20:=GXL("Data Type","Time Span","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment2")


Parameters:Data TypeIdentifies the type of data to retrieve. Valid data types are:

Data Type Description Silverlake CIF 20/20

ACTUAL Actual period to date data * *

AGGREGATE Sum of daily balances * *

AVERAGE Aggregate total divided by number of daysNote: This data type only applies when Format = PER.

*

BUDGETA Budget balances * *

BUDGETB Budget balances * *

CBAL Current daily balance *

CURBAL Current daily balance *

YESBAL Yesterday balance * *

Time SpanIdentifies the time span for data to retrieve. Valid time spans are:

Time Span Description Silverlake CIF 20/20

CURRENT Current Year * *

PRIOR1 Prior Year * *

PRIOR2 2 Years Prior *

FUTURE Future Year *

Key 3Identifies the level and the optional alternate library to be used. Enter the necessary literal and a value as definedbelow. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon.

Enter the literal "LEVEL=X" where X is the account posting level. Zero indicates detail level account, 1 - 8indicates roll up level account, and blank includes all account levels.Enter the literal "LIBRARY=NNNN" where NNNN is the name of the alternate library.

YearYear identifier. For information purposes only (not used in the actual calculation). May enter 0.

GL Reporting 162










Account Segment 1 - 5Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based uponthe account structure for the selected ledger (i.e. Silverlake = Bank, Branch, Account, Cost Center, Product Code;CIF 20/20 = Branch, Account). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Silverlake - Using Single Values:=GXL("ACTUAL","CURRENT","LEVEL=0","0","PER","8","1","1","2102100","0","0")Retrieves the actual balance for period 8 of the current year for a single account string.

Formula Example - CIF 20/20 - Using Single Values:=GXL("ACTUAL","CURRENT","LEVEL=0","0","PER","8","1","11200")Retrieves the actual balance for period 8 of the current year for a single account string.



7.18.5 JH GXD

For a Jack Henry ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string.

Syntax:=GXD("Account String")


Parameters:Account StringIdentifies the account string for which to retrieve the description.

Formula Example - Silverlake:=GXD("1-1-2102100-0-0")Retrieves the account description for the account string 1-1-2102100-0-0 (BANK-BRANCH-ACCOUNT-COSTCENTER-PRODUCT CODE).

Formula Example - CIF 20/20:=GXD("1-11200")Retrieves the account description for the account string 1-11200 (BRANCH-ACCOUNT).


GL Reporting 164


7.19 JD Edwards

7.19.1 JDE Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a JD Edwards (JDE) ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The JDEdwards Login dialog box appears.

3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server:Option 1 - Pre-defined Connection User Name:

User ID - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the ConfiguratorRetrieve account balances from local database

Option 2 - <Sign-On>:User ID - standard database sign onPassword - standard database passwordRetrieve account balances from local database

4. When the Retrieve account balances from local database option is selected, click More... and specify the following:Local Database Type - indicates the database type and connection or database pathWork in Local Mode without a connectionNote: When working without a connection, the user only has access to account balances in the local database file. As a result drill

downs to journals, GXEs to journals, GXDs for company and business unit, and list accounts will not be functional. In

addition, JDE security is not utilized; however, the system continues to verify that the user is a valid Spreadsheet Server user,

thus the user must have the Configurator on their hard drive.

5. Click OK.



7.19.2 JDE Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - JD Edwards panel. A link isavailable at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

JD Edwards ProcessingOptions:

Number of Decimal Positionsfor Amounts

Specify the number of positions to move the decimal when displayingdollar amounts. Ex: JDE stores the amount as a whole number (i.e.262350), thus when a '2' is entered for this option, Spreadsheet Serverwould display the amount as 2623.50.

Alternate Language Code Specify the alternative language from the F0901D file to be used fordisplaying account descriptions. Leave the field blank to retrieve accountdescriptions from the F0901 file.

Limit Segment Lookup Resultsto nnnn Records

If selected, the number of segment records loaded during a segment valuelookup (i.e. Locate Segment panel, or when click the ellipse button for anaccount segment on the Build a Template or Control Panel panel) islimited by the number of records specified.

Category Codes: Set Value toUpper Case

If selected, @ field values (i.e. business unit and account category codes)are set to upper case for calculation purposes.

GL Reporting 166


Field Description

Drill Down: Display Blank orNull Dates as 1/1/1900

If selected, blank or null dates are displayed as 1/1/1900 on various drilldowns and GXE journal entry detail expanded reports. If not selected,blank or null dates appear as blank.

Journal Drill Down: Do NotInclude MA Code and MA TypeFields

If selected, journal drill downs and GXE journal entry detail expandedreports exclude MA Code and MA Type fields as data output.

Journal Drill Down: Do NotInclude GLAID Field (OutsiderLease)

If selected, journal drill downs and GXE journal entry detail expandedreports exclude the GLALID (Outsider Lease/Well ID) field as data output.


Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display onthe journal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only,Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted

Default Configuration Click the down arrow and select the JDE host configuration to default onthe Build a Template and Control Panel panels.

JD Edwards Batch Types:

Accounts Payable / AccountsReceivable / Inventory

Specify the single character batch type codes used for the applicablesubsystems. Choices should be separated by a comma.

JD Edwards Build a TemplateOptions:





7.19.3 JDE Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a JDE ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The listonly displays configurations to which the user is authorized.Note: In Demo Mode the value is hard coded to GXL Demo.

Ledger Type Click the down arrow and select the ledger type code containing thebalances.


Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, BLTD,BLTDAPR, BLTDREQ.


Currency Specify a valid currency code. Leave blank to use the base currencyassigned in the user's SS Settings. Enter * to retrieve all currencies.

Weekly If selected, the formula retrieves weekly balances instead of periodbalances.


GL Reporting 168


7.19.4 JDE Formula Assistant for GXL

As fields on the Formula Assistant - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a JDE ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Formula Assistant section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Configuration Specify the host configuration to be used.

Ledger Type Specify the ledger type code containing the balances.


Format Specify the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER,QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, BLTD, BLTDAPR, BLTDREQ.

Period Specify the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e.1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format.

Currency Specify a valid currency code. Leave blank to use the base currencyassigned in the user's SS Settings. Enter * to retrieve all currencies.

BU Status Code If selected, the business unit status code is included as part of the formulacriteria. Note: When the Budget Manager option is selected, the BU Status Codeoption may not be selected.


Field Description

Blank / Not Blank / Value When BU Status Code is selected, specify whether to compare thebusiness unit status code to blank, not blank or a value. Specific validvalues are K, N, and P (or the cell reference containing the value). Note: When a specific value is entered, double quotes are not requiredaround the value.

Budget Manager If selected, the formula retrieves budget amounts which have been loadedinto Spreadsheet Server from Global's Budget Manager.Note: When the BU Status Code option is selected, the Budget Manageroption may not be selected.

Budget Name / Budget Version When Budget Manager is selected, specify the budget name and budgetversion number (or the cell reference containing the values) from which toretrieve budget data.

Weekly If selected, the formula retrieves weekly balances instead of periodbalances.


Click the link to go to a related topic: Formula Assistant.

GL Reporting 170


7.19.5 JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES

Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXSALES panel.

Field Description

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The listonly displays configurations to which the user is authorized.

Total Field Click the down arrow and select the field to be totaled.

Total Type Click the down arrow and select the type of total to be calculated. Validtypes are Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, and Summary.

Criteria 01 - 07 Click the down arrow and select the field(s) to be used as filtering criteriafor the formula.

Value Cell Specify the cell location containing the selection value for thecorresponding criteria field.

Retrieve Data from Sales HistoryFile (F42119)

If selected, the formula retrieves data from the Sales History file (F42119). Otherwise, data is retrieved from the Sales Order Detail file (F4211).

Click the link to go to a related topic: Formula Assistant or JDE GXSALES.


7.19.6 JDE GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a JDE ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Configuration","Ledger Type","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5","Account Segment 6")


Parameters:ConfigurationIdentifies the host configuration from which to retrieve account balances. May specify either the full configurationname or just the number.

Ledger TypeIdentifies the ledger type code containing the account balances. May be a single value, mask or value list (noexcludes allowed); however, a mask or value list is not supported when processing in local mode.

Key 3Identifies currency and balance type, and optionally identifies the business unit status and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined,separate the variables by a semi-colon.

Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. If not specified, the systemuses the base currency from the user's SS Settings. Enter '*' to retrieve all currencies. Note: In JDE currency amounts are stored in one of two fields, GBCRCX or GBCRCD. If the formula is not returning values, insert an

X before the currency. Ex: =GXL("1","AA","CURRENCY=XUSD";"WEEKLY=FALSE","2012","PER","1","00001","1","1110","FIB")

Enter the literal "WEEKLY=NNNN" where NNNN is either TRUE or FALSE. Enter the literal "BUSTATUS=NNNN" where NNNN is either BLANK, NOTBLANK, K, N or P.Enter the literal "BUDGETNAME=NNNN" and "BUDGETREVISION=XXX where NNNN is the budget name and XXXis the budget revision.









BLTD Activity for period 1 thru the designated period number including the original budgetamount (Budget Ledger Type)

BLTDAPR Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the approved budgetamount (Budget Ledger Type)

BLTDREQ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the requested budgetamount (Budget Ledger Type)

GL Reporting 172



Ledger Type Format Period(s) Results

Actual PER 0 Retrieves balance forward amount

Budget ANY 55 Retrieves beginning original budget amount

Budget ANY 56 Retrieves beginning approved budget amount

Budget ANY 57 Retrieves beginning requested budget amount

Actual orBudget

PER, QTR or RANGE X.X Pulls activity for a range of periods where X.Xrepresents the beginning and ending range of periodnumbers

Account Segment 1 - 6Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Business Unit, Object, Subsidiary,Subledger Type, Subledger). The company, business unit and object are required elements. May be a single value,BLANK value, NOTBLANK value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see AccountSegment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using Single Values:=GXL("1","AA","CURRENCY=***";"WEEKLY=FALSE","1998","PER","6","00001","1","1110","FIB","*","*")Retrieves the activity for period 9 of 1998 using ledger type AA for account string 00001-1-1110-FIB for all subledgers.



7.19.7 JDE GXD

For a JDE ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account string, or company or businessunit segment.

Syntax:=GXD("Configuration","Value","Description Type")


Parameters:ConfigurationIdentifies the host configuration from which to retrieve the description. May specify either the full configurationname or just the number.

ValueIf description type is Account String (AC), identifies the account string. If description type is Company (CO), identifies the company. If description type is Business Unit (BU), identifies the business unit.

Description TypeIdentifies the segment type for which to retrieve a description. Valid values are Account String (AC), Company (CO),and Business Unit (BU).

Formula Example - Retrieve an Account String Description:=GXD("1","00001-1-1110-FIB","AC")Retrieves the account description for the account string 00001-1-1110-FIB.

GL Reporting 174


Formula Example - Retrieve a Company Description:=GXD("1","00001","CO")Retrieves the description for company 00001.

Formula Example - Retrieve a Business Unit Description:=GXD("1","1","BU")Retrieves the description for business unit 1.



7.19.8 JDE GXSALES

Use the GXSALES formula to retrieve sales totals based upon sales criteria. Sales data may be retrieved from eitherthe Sales Order Detail file (F4211) or the Sales Order History file (F42119).

Syntax:=GXSALES("Configuration","Total Field","Total Type","Retrieve Data from Sales History File","Criteria01","Criteria 02","Criteria 03","Criteria 04","Criteria 05","Criteria 06","Criteria 07")

Parameters:ConfigurationIdentifies the host configuration from which to retrieve sales totals. May specify either the full configuration nameor just the number.

Total FieldIdentifies the related sales field to be totaled. Total field options are:

Description Table.Field

Extended Cost F4211.SDECST

Extended Price F4211.SDAEXP

Gross Weight F4211.SDGRWT

Open Amount F4211.SDAOPN

Qty Backordered F4211.SDSOBK

Qty Canceled F4211.SDSOCN

Qty Committed F4211.SDSONE

Qty Open F4211.SDUOPN

Qty Ordered F4211.SDUORG

Qty Shipped F4211.SDSOQS

Qty Shipped To-Date F4211.SDQTYT

Trade Discount F4211.SDTRDC

Total TypeIdentifies the type of total to be calculated. Valid types are Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, and Summary.

Criteria / ValueIdentifies up to 7 criteria parameters and the associated value to be used for selecting data. The list of availableselection criteria fields is maintained in the Configurator by the administrator.

Retrieve Data from Sales History FileIdentifies to retrieve data from the sales history file (F42119) instead of the sales order detail file (F4211).

Formula Example - GXSALES Extended Price - Average Sales:=GXSALES(1, "F4211.SDAEXP","AVG","SALES;HISTORY=YES","F4211.SDTRDJ|D","6/01/1998.6/30/1998","F4211.SDMCU|B12","30","F4211.SDDCTO|A02","SO")Retrieves the average sales totals from sales history file F42119 for order date range 6/1/1998 to 6/30/1998.

GL Reporting 176


Click the link to go to a related topic: JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES.


7.19.9 JDE GXSALES Drill Down

Once GXSALES formulas are constructed, drill down capability to the sales detail related to the amount, quantity orweight exists. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon an option inthe user's SS Settings. Additionally, GXSALES criteria in the Configurator determines whether or not a field appears inthe Sales Detail drill down grid.

1. Select a cell containing a GXSALES formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and selectSpreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Sales Detail drill down appears showing the associated sales detail from theF4211, F4101 and F0101 files.

Nav Tip:The drill down data may also be pushed directly to a panel or worksheet by selecting the SS Ribbonequivalent.

GL Reporting 178


7.19.10 JDE Fixed Asset Balances

Global delivers Designer GL definitions, JDE_iSeries_FXA, JDE_Oracle_FXA and JDE_SQL_FXA, for retrieving JDEfixed asset account balances from the F1202 file. In addition, associated ad hoc queries are delivered for drilling downfrom JDE_FXA Designer GL GXL account balances to asset details.

Below is a high level summary of the steps required for setting up and using a JDE_FXA Designer GL.

To Setup and Process a JDE_FXA Designer GL:1. Application Configurator>Application Settings>JD Edwards -- ensure the appropriate JDE host connection(s) is

created. Contact your administrator for more information.

Note: JDE host connection(s) created function for both the standard JDE ledger and JDE_FXA Designer GL.

2. Spreadsheet Server Settings>General -- verify the General Ledger Type = JD Edwards.

3. Spreadsheet Server Settings>File Locations -- verify the Ad Hoc Queries and Designer GL Definition file locations.

4. Spreadsheet Server Settings>Ledger Specific>Designer GL -- ensure the proper host connection is assigned to theJDE_FXA Designer GL definition being used, and set the appropriate default Designer GL definition.

5. On the Control Panel or Build a Template panels, criteria defaults to JDE parameters; however, to process for theJDE_FXA Designer GL, select the appropriate Designer GL definition and criteria on the panel will changeaccordingly. Continue processing as normal.


7.19.11 JDE FASTR Report Conversion

For JDE World customers only (iSeries), Spreadsheet Server offers a utility to convert FASTR report definitions intoExcel workbook formats. Using the template provided, users can select the FASTR program number and revision viathe Get Report lookup feature and convert the report to Excel format.

1. From Windows Explorer, navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\Users\Public\Public Documents\Global SoftwareInc\Spreadsheet Server\Components. Open the Excel spreadsheet named JDE Fastr Template and enable themacros. The spreadsheet loads and a new menu called FASTR is added to Excel.

2. In Excel from the FASTR menu, select Get Reports. The Host Signon for Reports dialog box appears.

3. On the Signon dialog box identify the host name, user ID and password, and click Sign On. The FASTR Reportspanel appears.

4. On the FASTR Reports panel, specify the name of the library containing the FASTR reports and click ShowReports. A list of reports appears.

GL Reporting 180


5. Double click on the desired report (Program ID and Version ID) to be converted. The conversion process createsan Excel workbook using the Program ID and Version ID as the name and stores it in the location identified at thebottom of the FASTR Reports panel.


7.20 Lawson

7.20.1 Lawson Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Lawson ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Sign Onto Spreadsheet Server dialog box.

3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server:Option 1 - Direct Connect:

Select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:




4. Click OK.


GL Reporting 182


7.20.2 Lawson Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Lawson panel. A link is availableat the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Lawson Options:

Apply SQL Trim to AccountSegments

If selected, the system automatically applies the TRIM function to allaccount segments when processing.

Lawson Build a TemplateOptions:





7.20.3 Lawson Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Lawson ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A(Actual Dollars), B (Budget Dollars), AU (Actual Units), BU (Budget Units),ADBP (Average Daily Balance Period), ADBQ (Average Daily BalanceQuarter) and ADBY (Average Daily Balance Year).

Budget # When Balance Type is B or BU, specify the budget number.





GL Reporting 184


7.20.4 Lawson GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Lawson ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Balance Type","Budget #","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5")


Parameters:Balance TypeIdentifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), AU (Actual Units), B (Budget), BU (Budget Units), ADBP(Average Daily Balance Period), ADBQ (Average Daily Balance Quarter) and ADBY (Average Daily Balance Year).

Budget #Identifies the budget number. This value is required if Balance Type is either B or BU.

Key 3Not used currently. Enter 0.










Account Segment 1 - 5Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Account Unit, Account, Sub-Account,Chart of Accounts). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using Masks:=GXL("A",,"0","2005","PER","12","10","6044*","3*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 12 of 2005 for company 10, account units starting with 6044 and all accountsstarting with 3.


Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL("A",,"0","2005","PER","12","10","5500*","30100.32999","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 12 of 2005 for company 10, account units starting with 5500 and all accountsin the range of 30100 thru 32999.


GL Reporting 186


7.20.5 Lawson GXD

For a Lawson ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string.

Syntax:=GXD("Account","Sub Account","Chart Name")


Parameters:AccountIdentifies the account value of the account string for which to retrieve the description.

Sub AccountIdentifies the sub account value of the account string for which to retrieve the description.

Chart NameIdentifies the name of the chart of accounts from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional if the specifiedaccount string only exists in one chart of accounts.

Formula Example:=GXD("40100","0","DCHHEALTHSYS")Retrieves the segment description for account 40100 and sub-account 0.



7.21 Movex

7.21.1 Movex Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Movex ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information: Host Name or IP Address - iSeries system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library or catalog containing the General Ledger dataUser Name - standard iSeries or SQL Server sign onPassword - standard iSeries or SQL Server password

4. Click OK.


GL Reporting 188


7.21.2 Movex Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Movex panel. A link is available atthe bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

Movex Options:

Chart of Accounts by Division If selected, accounts in Movex are division specific. Otherwise, accountsin Movex are not division specific.

Use RVFRFN for Budget Data(Older Movex Versions)

If selected, budget names/data are retrieved from RVFRFN.

Drill Down: By Balance Key If selected, drill downs use the balance key specified on the GXL formula. Otherwise, drill downs use a balance key of 8.

Drill Down: Include ThirdCurrency Amount

If selected, drill downs include the third currency amount.

Period Type for RetrievingBegin/End Dates

Specify the period type to be used for retrieving beginning and endingdates for the company/division. Period types are defined in the CSYPERtable in the Movex database.

Dimension Number Used forAccount Descriptions

Specify the dimension number to be used for retrieving the accountdescription when processing a GXD formula.

Journal Entry Drill Down: MaxDimensions

Specify the maximum number of dimensions to be used when drilling downto journal entry detail. Valid values are 0 - 7.

Movex Build a TemplateOptions:





7.21.3 Movex Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a Movex ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Budget Number If applicable, specify the budget number from which to retrieve data. Leaveblank to retrieve actual data.

Budget Revision If applicable, specify the budget revision from which to retrieve data. Entryis required if a budget number is specified.




Balance Key Click the down arrow and select the balance key to be used to retrievedata.

Stat Enter a Y to return statistic values; otherwise enter an N.

Exchange Rate If applicable, click the down arrow and select the exchange rate to bemultiplied by the balances to calculate the reporting amounts.


GL Reporting 190


7.21.4 Movex GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a Movex ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Budget Number","Budget Revision","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Budget NumberIdentifies the budget number. If left blank, actual data is retrieved.

Budget RevisionIdentifies the budget revision. A budget revision is required if a budget number is specified.

Key 3Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library, balance key, Budget Manager name/revision and/orexchange rate. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to bedefined, separate the variables by a semi-colon.

Enter the literal "STAT=Y" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances.Enter the literal "LIBRARY=NNNN" where NNNN is the name of the alternate library.Enter the literal "BALANCE KEY=XX" where XX is the balance key.Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision.Enter the literal "EXCHRATE=NNNN" where NNNN is the exchange rate.










Account Segment 1 - 9Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Division, Dimension 1 - 7). May be asingle value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

Formula Example - Using Masks:=GXL(,,"STAT=N";"BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","51*","*","*","*")Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2004 for accounts starting with 51 using balance key 8.


Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL(,,"STAT=N";"BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","5100.5500")Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2004 for accounts 5100 thru 5500 using balance key 8.

Formula Example - Retrieving Budget Data:=GXL("1","1","BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","5710","*","*","*")Retrieves the budget balance for period 4 of 2004 for an account mask using balance key 8, for Budget Number 1and Budget Revision 1.


GL Reporting 192


7.21.5 Movex GXD

For a Movex ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string.

Syntax:=GXD("Company","Division","Dimension Number","Dimension Value")


Parameters:CompanyIdentifies the company.

DivisionIdentifies the division.

Dimension NumberIdentifies the dimension number associated with the dimension value.

Dimension ValueIdentifies the dimension value for which to retrieve the description.

Formula Example:=GXD("210","AAA","1","5710")Retrieves the account description for company 210, division AAA and dimension 1 value of 5710.



7.22 Oracle

7.22.1 Oracle Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Oracle ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel start up, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 thru 6 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Logindialog box appears.

3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Direct Connect:

Select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:

Host - host or IP Address that hosts the databaseService - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is locatedPort - port numberUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

GL Reporting 194




4. Click Login. The Oracle Default Responsibility panel appears, displaying the Responsibility previously selected.

5. Click on the drop down arrow to select a different Responsibility.

6. Click Continue.



7.22.2 Oracle Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Oracle panel, or to access otherfunctions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processingfields.

Field Description

Oracle Options:

Select Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger or ledger set and responsibilityto be used to adjust values on the panel (i.e. number of segments,segment labels, segment security, etc.). Right click and select Refresh torefresh the data. This value does not update the default responsibility forGXL formulas.

Number of Segments Specify the number of segments which make up the account. This valueis automatically filled by the Select Ledger selection.

Segment Number Used forDescriptions

Displays for the currently selected ledger the segment number to be usedfor retrieving account descriptions on drill down panels and whenprocessing GXE formulas. Use the Set Segment Number for All Ledgersbutton to change the value for all ledgers -or- use the Segment Mappingbutton to change the value for a single ledger.

GL Reporting 196


Field Description

Language Specify the language to be used for account descriptions.

Balance SQL Statement Hintby Balance Type

Click the down arrow and select the balance type (i.e. A (Actual), B(Budget), E (Encumbrance) or P (Project)) and then in the adjacent fieldspecify the user-defined index to be used with the associated balance typewhen processing Spreadsheet Server calculations.

Use Summary Accounts If selected, summary accounts are included with non-summary accountsin the GXL formula calculation. Otherwise only non-summary accounts areused. This option only applies if the GXL Summary Accounts parameter isnot specified or equals NA.

Segments Displays the segment names for the ledger specified above.

Oracle Build a TemplateOptions:



Button Function

Segment Mapping Displays the Segment Mapping panel, allowing the user for each ledger toassign the segment number to be used for descriptions and to re-orderaccount segments to match the order defined in the Oracle application(see Segment Mapping).

Set Segment Number for AllLedgers

Displays the Oracle Segment Number Used For Descriptions panel,allowing the user to assign the same segment number to be used fordescriptions to all ledgers. This function is password protected.

Add Sample Hint Inserts a sample index in the Balance SQL Statement Hint field.

View Segment Security Displays any account restrictions based on the current sign-on ID andresponsibility.



7.22.3 Oracle Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor an Oracle ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A(Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance), and P (Project). Note: When Balance Type = P, then Format should = PER. Balancesretrieved are 'to-date' (i.e. running totals). In addition, drill down is onlyavailable to account balances, not to journals.

Budget/En Type When Balance Type is B or E, click the down arrow and select the budgetor encumbrance name.




Translated Click the down arrow and select whether to display entered or translatedcurrency balances. Valid values are E (Entered), T (Translated), and M(Multiple Reporting Currencies).Note: E must be used if the selected currency is the database'sfunctionality currency or STAT. Note: Prior to selecting T, ensure that the currency translation has beenprocessed in Oracle for the selected currency and reporting period.

GL Reporting 198


Field Description

Currency Specify a valid currency code.

Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger or ledger set for which toretrieve data.

Summary Accts Click the down arrow and select which account types to use. Valid valuesare NA (use Summary Accounts option from Spreadsheet Server Settings- Ledger Specifics to determine whether to include Summary Accountswith Non-Summary Accounts), Y (include only Summary Accounts), and N(include only Non-Summary Accounts).

FSG Report If desired, select the check box and then use the drop down box to selecta FSG Report for which to create a Spreadsheet Server report. When thisoption is selected various fields on the panel will be disabled.

Convert Missing Values toParent Hierarchies

When FSG Templates is selected, this option becomes enabled. Ifselected, missing single segment values are converted to parenthierarchies when the Spreadsheet Server report is created.



7.22.4 Oracle GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for an Oracle ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Balance Type","Budget/EnType","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Balance TypeIdentifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance), and P (Project).

Budget/En TypeIdentifies the budget or encumbrance name. This value is required if Balance Type is either E or B.

Key 3 Optionally identifies translation type, currency, ledger, account type, and translated flag criteria. Enter thenecessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate thevariables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used.

Enter the literal "TRANSLATED=X" where X is the translation type. Valid types are E (Entered in the selectedcurrency), T (Translated to the selected currency), and M (Multiple reporting currencies). E must be used ifthe selected currency is the database's functionality currency or STAT. Prior to selecting T, ensure that thecurrency translation has been processed in Oracle for the selected currency and reporting period.Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Enter the literal "BOOK=XXX" where XXX is the name of the ledger or ledger set to be used. If not specified, thesystem uses the default ledger identified on the SS Ribbon (Tools>Select Responsibility>xxx).Enter the literal "SUMMARY=XX" where XX indicates which account types to use. Valid values are NA (useSummary Accounts option from Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics to determine whether or not toinclude Summary Accounts with Non-Summary Accounts), Y (include only Summary Accounts), and N (includeonly Non-Summary Accounts). If not specified, NA is assumed.Enter the literal "TRANSLATEDFLAG=X" where X is the name of the translated flag to be used. Enter * to retrieveall records regardless of their assigned translated flag.










GL Reporting 200



Formula Example - Using Masks:=GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";"&"BOOK="VISION OPERATIONS(USA)";"&"TRANSLATEDFLAG="*";","2003","PER","6","01","*","1110","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for an account mask using Vision Operations (USA) set of books.

Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";"&"BOOK="VISION OPERATIONS(USA)";"&"TRANSLATEDFLAG="*";","2003","PER","6","01","*","1110.1999","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for accounts 1110 thru 1999 using Vision Operations (USA) set of books.



7.22.5 Oracle GXD

For an Oracle ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment.

Syntax:=GXD("Segment Num","Value","Ledger")


Parameters:Segment NumIdentifies the segment number of the account string for which to retrieve the description.

ValueIdentifies the value of the account segment for which to retrieve the description.

LedgerIdentifies the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional if only one ledger isreferenced in the workbook.

Formula Example - Using a Single Segment:=GXD("3","1110","Vision Operations (USA)")Retrieves the description for segment 3 value 1110 from the Vision Operations (USA) set of books.

Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments:=GXD(("1","01")& "-" &GXD("3","1640")Retrieves the description for segment 1 value 01 and concatenates the description for segment 3 value 1640.


GL Reporting 202


7.22.6 Segment Mapping

Account segments may be re-ordered in the Oracle application. Use the following to re-order account segments in theSpreadsheet Server application to match the order defined in the Oracle application. In addition, use the SegmentMapping function to assign individually for each ledger (a.k.a. set of books) the segment number to be used forretrieving descriptions.

Note: If segments are remapped, then standard delivered segment ad hoc queries will need to be modified. ContactGlobal for assistance.


Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings tab on the Control Panel.

2. From the navigation panel, select Ledger Specifics>Oracle. The Ledger Specifics - Oracle panel appears.

3. On the Oracle panel, click the Segment Mapping button. The Segment Mapping panel appears.

4. On the Segment Mapping panel, use the appropriate drop down boxes to specify the following data:Ledger - Identify the ledger for which to assign the segment number for descriptions or to map/re-order accountsegments in Spreadsheet Server. The system will modify the available account segments based upon theselected ledger. Segment Number Used for Descriptions (SEGMENT X) - Identify the segment number to be used for retrievingaccount descriptions on drill down panels and when processing GXE formulas. Account Segments - Identify the proper segment number for each account segment.

5. Click the Save button to write the changes.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5, until changes have been made for each ledger.

7. To exit the panel, click the Close button.


7.23 PeopleSoft

7.23.1 PSoft Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a PeopleSoft ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.

1. Start Excel.


3. Various methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server based upon the connection protocol beingused: Option 1 - SQL Server or DSN:

Host Name or IP Address - system name or IP address that hosts the databaseDatabase Library - name of library containing the General Ledger dataDSN Name - name of the DSN connectionUser Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the ConfiguratorPassword - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

Option 2 - Oracle Direct Connect:Select the Direct check boxSpecify the following fields:


GL Reporting 204




4. Click OK.



7.23.2 PSoft Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - PeopleSoft panel. A link isavailable at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

PeopleSoft Options:

Set ID Specify the PeopleSoft set ID.

Drill Down: Apply EffectiveDate Criteria

If selected, drill downs include the effective date as part of the searchcriteria.

Multi-Column Drill Down:Ignore Ledger

If selected, multi-column drill downs ignore the ledger account segmentparameter.

Available Business Units forUser

Displays the business units available for the current user.

PeopleSoft Build a TemplateOptions:




GL Reporting 206


7.23.3 PSoft Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor a PeopleSoft ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to reviewgeneric processing fields.

Field Description

Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A(Actual), B (Budget), and E (Encumbrance).

Business Unit Specify the reporting business unit.




Currency Specify the reporting currency code.



7.23.4 PSoft GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a PeopleSoff ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Balance Type","Business Unit","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:Balance TypeIdentifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), B (Budget, and E (Encumbrance).

Business UnitIdentifies the business unit.

Key 3Optionally identifies currency. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. Enter 0 or leave blank if notused.

Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used.









OBAL or OPE Opening balance (i.e. period 0). Note: Any period value entered is ignored.

CBAL or CLO Year to date activity including closing balances and/or adjusting entries (i.e. period 0 - 54). Note: Any period value entered is ignored.

BP Budget amount for the selected period


Account Segment 1 - 10Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Ledger, Fund Code, Department, Class Field,Program Code, Chart Field 1, Account, Project, Affiliate, Statistics Code). May be a single value, mask, range, valuelist, segment list, hierarchy value or @ field (see Account Segment Syntax).

GL Reporting 208


Formula Example - Using Masks:=GXL("A","US005","CURRENCY=USD","2003","PER","6","LOCAL","*","20000","*","*","*","400000","*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for business unit US005, ledger LOCAL, department 21400 and allaccounts starting with 4.

Formula Example - Using a Range:=GXL("A","US005","CURRENCY=USD","2003","PER","6","LOCAL","*","21000.21999","*","*","*","400000","*","*","*")Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for business unit US005, ledger LOCAL, departments in the range of21000 thru 21999, and account 400000.



7.23.5 PSoft GXD

For a PeopleSoft ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment.

Syntax:=GXD("Segment Value")


Parameters:Segment ValueIdentifies the segment value for which to retrieve the description.

Formula Example - Using a Single Segment:=GXD("402000")Retrieves the description for account segment 402000.

Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments:=GXD("402000")& "-" &GXD("3000")Retrieves the description for account segment 402000 and concatenates the description for project segment3000.


GL Reporting 210


7.24 SAP

7.24.1 SAP Sign On

Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a SAP ledger.When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable.When single signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable.The dialog boxes used to sign onto Spreadsheet Server are determined by the connection type assigned to the hostconfiguration in the Configurator.

1. Start Excel.

2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The SAPLogon dialog box appears.

3. On the SAP Logon dialog box specify the following information:Option 1 - Using Legacy SAP GUI connection type:

From the list of SAP systems in your organization, select the desired system to sign onto.Specify the Client, User ID, Password and Language.

Option 2 - Using SAP NetCo 3.0 connection type:Specify the Client, User ID, Password and Language.Select Remember Me to retain the User ID and Password.If necessary, click the System button, and select the desired system to sign onto.

4. Click OK.



7.24.2 SAP Ledger Specifics

Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP panel. A link is available atthe bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields.

Field Description

SAP Options:

Language (SPRAS) Specify the language ID to be used for all descriptions.

Client Specify the SAP client number. This value is updated during signon.Note: This only applies when using a Legacy SAP GUI host configuration.

Limit Segment Lookup Resultsto nnnn Records

If selected, the number of segment records loaded during a segment valuelookup (i.e. when click the ellipse button for an account segment on theBuild a Template or Control Panel panel) is limited by the number ofrecords specified.

Use Optimized Array for SQL(NetCo 3.0)

If selected, the SAP Adapter sends back results in an array/table withlength optimized for the results being returned, in an effort to reducenetwork traffic going between Excel and SAP.

SAP Build a TemplateOptions:

FI QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build aTemplate>General Ledger sub menu to identify the FI ledger for building aGXL formula.

GL Reporting 212


Field Description


CO QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build aTemplate>General Ledger sub menu to identify the CO ledger for building aGXL formula.


COOR QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build aTemplate>General Ledger sub menu to identify the COOR ledger forbuilding a GXL formula.


PCA QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build aTemplate>General Ledger sub menu to identify the PCA ledger for buildinga GXL formula.


SAP RFC Trace Options: Note: These options only apply when using a NetCo 3.0 SAP hostconfiguration.

Enable RFC Trace If selected, indicates to run the SAP RFC trace and create the appropriatetrace logs. When selected additional options become available.

Default Trace Level Click the down arrow and select the trace level to be run. The higher thelevel, the more tracing data collected.

CPIC Trace Level Click the down arrow and select the trace level to be run. The higher thelevel, the more detailed the tracing data collected.

Trace Directory Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the tracelogs.

SAP User Authorizations:

Authorized Companies Displays a list of companies to which the current user is authorized. These values are updated during signon.

Currency Precisions Displays a list of each currency setup within SAP and its' applicablecurrency precision. These values are updated during signon.

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used forlisting SAP T-Codes. The list only displays SAP NetCo 3.0 connectiontype configurations.

T-Code List Displays a list of SAP T-Codes for the selected configuration. Data in thegrid may be filtered or re-sorted as necessary. To pin favorite or mostoften used T-Codes to the SS Ribbon Query>SAP TCodes drop down list,select the Pinned option for each desired T-Code. Note: After mak ing changes to pinned settings, save the changes andthen from the SS Ribbon select Refresh>SAP T-Codes to repopulate thelist of pinned T-Codes displayed on the ribbon. See Execute SAP T-Codewithout a GEXD Formula for more information.

Note: The Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP - Special Ledgers panel is used to maintainprocessing criteria for special SAP ledgers. This panel is password protected. Contact Global for moreinformation.



7.24.3 SAP Build a Template for GXL

As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data uniquefor an SAP ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review genericprocessing fields.

Field Description

Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger. Valid values are FI, CO,COOR, PCA and special SAP ledgers. Use the drop down list to selectthe appropriate value. The system changes the account segments andvalid currency types on the panel to match the selected ledger.

Currency Type Click the down arrow and select the currency type. Valid values varybased upon the ledger selected.

If ledger = FI, valid values are TRANS, LOCAL and GROUP. If ledger = CO or COOR, valid values are TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA,PV, TOTALQTY and FIXEDQTY. If ledger = PCA, valid values are TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP and QTY.


Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD (not applicable for CO,COOR and various special ledgers) and RANGE.


Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The listonly displays configurations to which the user is authorized. If left blank,the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator.


GL Reporting 214


7.24.4 SAP GXL

Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview forthe GXL formula for a SAP ledger.

Syntax:=GXL("Ledger","Currency Type","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","AccountSegment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...)


Parameters:LedgerIdentifies the specific ledger in SAP. Valid values are FI, CO, COOR, PCA and special SAP ledgers.

Currency TypeIdentifies the currency type.

Ledger Valid Values

FI TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP

CO TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, FIXEDQTY

COOR TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, FIXEDQTY

PCA TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP, QTY

Key 3 Optionally identifies host configuration criteria. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more thanone variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used.

Enter the literal "CONFIGURATION=X" where X is either the full configuration name or just the number. If leftblank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator.







LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balanceNote: Not applicable for CO, COOR and various special ledgers.





Ledger Valid Segments

FI Type, Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Company, Account, Business Area

CO Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Value Type, Controlling Area, CostCenter, Cost Element, Activity

COOR Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Value Type, Controlling Area, OrderNumber, Cost Element

PCA Type, Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Company, Profit Center, FunctionArea, Controlling Area, Account

Type - valid values are 0 (Actual) and 1 (Plan)

Plan Version - use 000 if actual results are desired

Formula Example - FI Ledger - Using a Value List, Range and Mask:=GXL("FI","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=SAP 1 - Prod","1999","PER","1","0","1000","000","DEM","[1000,2000]","800000.859999","*")Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 1999 for companies 1000 and 2000, accounts in the range of 800000 thru859999, and all business areas.

GL Reporting 216


Formula Example - CO Ledger - Using Single Values:=GXL("CO","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=SAP 1 - Prod","1999","PER","1","INT","000","DEM","01","1000","2000","435000","100")Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 1999 for controlling area 1000, cost center 2000, cost element 435000and activity 100.

Formula Example - COOR Ledger - Using Single Values:=GXL("COOR","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=1","2003","PER","2","1000","000","USD","01","1000","000000100000","0000000802")Retrieves the actual balance for period 2 of 2003 for controlling area 1000, order number 000000100000 and costelement 0000000802.


Formula Example - PCA Ledger - Using a Value List, Masks and a Range:=GXL("PCA","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=1","2007","PER","1","0","1000","000","DEM","2000","9999","100","1000","800000")Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 2007 for company 2000, profit centers 5000 and 9999, all function areas,range of controlling areas from 1000 thru 2500, and accounts that begin with 80.


GL Reporting 218


7.24.5 SAP GXD

For a SAP ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment (i.e. account, costcenter, internal order, profit center).

Syntax:=GXD("Descriptions","Parm 1","Parm 2","Parm 3")


Parameters:DescriptionsIdentifies the segment type for which to retrieve a description. Valid values are Account (ACCOUNT), Cost Center(CC), Internal Order (IO), and Profit Center (PC).

Parm 1If description is Account (ACCOUNT), identifies the chart of accounts. If description is Cost Center (CC) or Profit Center (PC), identifies the controlling area. If description is Internal Order (IO), then leave the field blank.

Parm 2Identifies the value of the account, cost center, order number, or profit center for which to retrieve the description.

Parm 3Optionally, identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve the description. May specify either the fullconfiguration name or just the number. If left blank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in theConfigurator.

Formula Example - Retrieve an Account Description:=GXD("ACCOUNT","INT","430000","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for account 430000 from the INT chart of accounts.


Formula Example - Retrieve a Cost Center Description:=GXD("CC","1000","1200","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for cost center 1200 from the 1000 controlling area.

Formula Example - Retrieve an Internal Order Description:=GXD("IO",,"702267","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for internal order 702267.

Formula Example - Retrieve a Profit Center Description:=GXD("PC","1000","1010","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for profit center 1010 from the 1000 controlling area.


Query 220


8 Query

Summary of Query Formulas for ExcelSpreadsheet Server retrieves data from the assigned database into Excel using the following formulas:

Formula Description

GEXQ Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query into the spreadsheet. This value may be "drilled down" upon to see the detailed results in a drill down panel or on aworksheet (see GEXQ Formulas).

GEXD Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas).

GEXS Opens a selector panel with the values returned from the query (see GEXS Formulas).

GEXI Opens the detail portion of the query and displays results in a drill down panel or on aworksheet (see GEXI Formulas).

Note: Formulas available for processing are based upon the user's licensed features. See GL Reporting for GL related formulas.

These formulas can be used in a spreadsheet cell in the same manner as other spreadsheet functions.

Spreadsheet Server provides tools for starting a spreadsheet (see Build a Template) and for entering formulas (seeFormula Assistant).

Setup Prior to using Query Formulas in ExcelFor Standard Queries:1. Queries must exist in Query Designer or Query Exchange before they can be used in formulas in Excel. Use one

of the following methods to create/add a query to Query Designer:Download a query from Query Exchange (see Download Queries from Query Exchange)Manually create a query in Query Designer (see Create a New Query)

2. Prior to using a new or modified query, in Excel from the SS Ribbon select Refresh>Queries. The systemrefreshes query data.

For SAP Queries (SQ00):1. Queries must exist in the SAP database.

2. In the Configurator, both selected users and SAP host configurations must be set to allow the execution of SAPqueries.

For SAP T-Codes:1. Execution variants for the appropriate T-Codes must exist in the SAP database.

2. In the Configurator, T-Codes must be assigned to SAP host configuration(s) (NetCo 3.0 connection types only).


8.1 Build a Template for Queries

Build a Template is a tool used to aid in quickly creating a template on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. This toolpopulates the necessary rows and columns with required parameters as provided by the user. The tool inserts aGEXQ, GEXD, GEXS, or GEXI formula using the parameters. Formulas available in the Build a Template function arebased upon the user's licensed features. The availability of the SAP Explorer button on the GEXS and GEXI panelsand the Search Online button is based upon user and/or connection authority settings in the Configurator.

Note: See Build a Template for GL related formulas.

1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears opening to the lastused formula.

Nav Tip:The Build a Template - GEXQ or GEXD panel may be accessed and pre-populated by selecting from the SS Ribbon Build a Template>Query and then selecting the desired GEXQ or GEXD query. Only querieswith a GEXQ or GEXD QuickText defined will be available for selection (see QuickText Panel).


3. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXQ panel.

Field Description

GEXQ: Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query intothe spreadsheet (see GEXQ Formulas).

Query Name Click the Open From File button ( ) to navigate to and select the queryto be executed.

Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query tobe executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange).

Total Field Click the down arrow and select the field to be used for summarizing. Only fields assigned an alias in the query appear in the drop down list. Ifleft blank, the system uses the GEXQ summary field assigned in thequery.

Total Type Click the down arrow and select the operation to be applied to the TotalField (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, etc.). If left blank, the system usesthe GEXQ summary type assigned in the query.

Query 222


5. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXD panel.

Field Description

GEXD: Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas).



Click the SAP Explorer button ( ) to search for and select the T-Codeor SAP query (SQ00) to be executed (see SAP Explorer).

Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the output. Defaults the current active worksheet.

Starting Cell/Range/Table Specify the upper-left corner of the output target. This value may be asingle cell, a range or a table. If Include Column Headings is selected,then it represents the left-most column heading as defined in the query. Otherwise it represents the left-most cell of the first row of data.

Fill Down Columns Specify the number of columns that contain formulas/values to the right ofthe results grid. These columns will fill down to match the number ofrecords in the results. Valid values are 1, 2, 3, etc. Note: When using Fill Down Columns targeting a range the fill downformulas/values must reside outside of the output range. Note: When Include Column Heading is selected, the fill down columnsare required to be on the first row following the headings. When IncludeColumn Headings is not selected, the fill down columns are required to beon the first two rows for the GEXD data. Note: In some instances, the GEXD Row function may be used in place offill down columns (see GEXD Row Function).

Clear a Range of Cells Specify the range of cells to be cleared prior to executing the formula.Note: When using Fill Down Columns, exclude the first row from the clearrange to avoid deleting the fill down formula/value (i.e. if the Starting Cell isA7, the Clear Range of Cells should be "A8:xx").

Include Column Headings If selected, the generated output data will contain column headings fromthe query. Do not select the option if column headings will be manuallyentered in Excel.

Auto Fit Column Sizes If selected, the system performs the Auto Fit Column Width feature ofExcel when the formula is executed.


Field Description

Clear Sheet/Range/Table If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or therange or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is clearedwhen the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXDformula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet. Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data.

6. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXS panel.

Field Description

GEXS: Opens a selector panel based upon query results (see GEXS Formulas).



Click the SAP Explorer button ( ) to search for and select the SAPquery (SQ00) to be executed (see SAP Explorer).

Selector Text Specify the label for the GEXS.

Cell for Value Specify the cell destination for the selected query value(s).

Query 224


7. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXI panel.

Field Description

GEXI: Displays query detail in a drill down panel (see GEXI Formulas).



Click the SAP Explorer button ( ) to search for and select the SAPquery (SQ00) to be executed (see SAP Explorer).

8. Use the table to enter data in the bottom section of the Build a Template - GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI panel.

Field Description

Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the formula. Defaults the current active worksheet.

Starting Column/Row Specify the starting column and row for the formula template.

Use Absolute Cell References If selected, the system automatically locks both the column and rowvalues of the query's parameter cell references. If not selected, thesystem only locks the column value when the parameter is assigned to arow or the row value when the parameter is assigned to a column.

Line Description Specify a description to be assigned to the formula. This value is placed inthe cell prior to the cell containing the formula.

Clear Worksheet If selected, the target worksheet is cleared prior to inserting data.

Do Not Clear Worksheet If selected, the target worksheet is not cleared prior to inserting data.

Shift Worksheet Data If selected, the formula is inserted in the target cell and parameter columnsand rows are inserted to the top left of the existing worksheet data.

Parameters: The parameter related fields only appear when parameters have beenspecified in the selected query definition.

Display/Use If selected, the query parameter is included in the formula. If a parameteris required, the associated Display/Use field is selected and disabled.Note: For SAP T-Code or SAP query (SQ00) queries, a maximum of 25parameters may be selected for processing.


Field Description

Row/Col Select the button to toggle between Row and Col. This button determinesif the query parameter will be located on the row to the left of the formula orin a column above the formula.

Value Key the value (i.e. single value, wildcard, list, range or segment list) or ifavailable click the ellipse button to execute the user defined "look up"query to select the value to default on the template for the query parameter(see Assign Query). When a value is entered, the system automaticallyselects the associated Display/Use field for the parameter.

Thru Value When the selected query is SAP T-Code or SAP query (SQ00) and theparameter is set to allow a selection range, key the ending range value forthe parameter if desired.

Button Function

Modify Layout For GEXD formulas only, opens the Custom Layout Editor, allowing theuser to create, modify or select the custom layout to be used when theGEXD formula is generated.

Remove Layout For GEXD formulas only, removes the assigned custom layout from theGEXD formula. If the layout is not assigned to another GEXD formula inthe workbook, then the custom layout is also deleted.

9. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons.Insert (icon) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet, and keeps thepanel open for additional inserts.Insert (button) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet and closes thepanel.Close (button) -- closes the panel.

Query 226


8.1.1 SAP Explorer

The SAP Explorer panel allows the user to search either the T-Codes or queries built in SAP (SQ00), and then selectthe desired T-Code to be processed in a GEXD formula or select the desired SAP query to be processed in either anGEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula. Prior to using a T-Code in Spreadsheet Server, the T-Code must be assigned to theappropriate SAP host configuration(s) in the Configurator.

To Select a SAP T-Code for Processing:

1. From the Build a Template - GEXD panel, click the SAP Explorer button ( ) -orfrom the SS Ribbon select Builda Template>SAP T-Code. The SAP Explorer panel appears.

2. Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used for listing SAP T-Codes. The list only displaysSAP NetCo 3.0 connection type configurations.

3. Select the desired T-Code by double clicking the T-Code in the list -or- selecting the T-Code in the list and clickingNext. A list of execution variants available for the selected T-Code appears.


4. Select the desired execution variant:To view and/or modify the parameters to be used to process the T-Code -- select the desired execution variant bydouble clicking the execution variant in the list -or- selecting the execution variant in the list and clicking Next. The system selects the T-Code and execution variant, and returns to the Build a Template - GEXD listing allparameters for the selected variant. To process the T-Code using default parameters for an execution variant -- select the Run by Execution Variantoption and if desired select an execution variant, then click Next. The system selects the T-Code and executionvariant, and returns to the Build a Template - GEXD, where Execution Variant is the only parameter.

To Select a SAP Query (SQ00) for Processing:

1. From the Build a Template - GEXD, GEXS or GEXI panels, click the SAP Explorer button ( ) -orfrom the SSRibbon select Build a Template>SAP Query (SQ00). The SAP Explorer panel appears.

Note: When the panel is accessed from the SS Ribbon via Build a Template>SAP Query (SQ00), the systemassumes it is processing a GEXD formula.

2. If necessary, click the SAP Query (SQ00) tab.

Query 228


3. Use the table to enter data on the SAP Explorer - SAP Query (SQ00) panel.

Field Description

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used forlisting SAP queries. The list only displays SAP configurations which areallowed to execute SAP queries (SQ00).

Area Specify whether to list SAP queries from the Global or Standard area.

User Group If desired, specify the user group from which to list SAP queries. Thevalue may be a single value or mask.

Search For If desired, specify the name of the SAP query to be listed. The value maybe a single value or mask.

Query List Displays a list of SAP queries meeting the search criteria. Data in the gridmay be filtered or re-sorted as necessary.

4. Enter the desired search criteria and click the Browse button ( ). The system lists the SAP queries meeting thesearch criteria.

5. Select a query by double clicking the query in the list -or- selecting the query in the list and clicking Select. Thesystem selects the query and returns to the appropriate Build a Template panel.


8.2 Formula Assistant for Queries

The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating formulas on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. Formulas available in the Formula Assistant function are based upon the user's licensed features. The availability ofthe Search Online button is based upon a user setting in the Configurator.

Note: See Build a Template for GL related formulas.

1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant opens to the GXL or GEXQ panel-or- if Formula Assistant was launched while on a SS formula, the corresponding formula panel appears.


Note: For efficient processing use cell references to identify individual query parameters. However, if literal valuesare keyed in the entry boxes, they must be placed in double quotes (").

Hint: Shortcut for selecting cell references:On the Formula Assistant panel, select the desired field.Press the Control Key. The Formula Assistant panel becomes transparent and is shifted up.On the worksheet, select the desired cell.Press the Control Key or click the Expand button. This system returns the selected cell to the field.

Hint: If necessary, use F4 to lock either the row and/or column value of the cell reference.

Query 230


3. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXQ panel.

Field Description

GEXQ: Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query intothe spreadsheet (see GEXQ Formulas).





Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This areaassumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, soentering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of thefields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the downarrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.).

Note: Values to be entered in the GEXQ formula will vary based upon whether the GEXQ summary field is defined in the query or the

formula.


4. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXD panel.

Field Description

GEXD: Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas).









Clear Sheet/Range/Table If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or therange or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is clearedwhen the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXDformula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet.Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data.


Button Function

Modify Layout Opens the Custom Layout Editor, allowing the user to create, modify orselect the custom layout to be used when the GEXD formula is generated.

Query 232


Button Function

Remove Layout Removes the assigned custom layout from the GEXD formula. If the layoutis not assigned to another GEXD formula in the workbook, then the customlayout is also deleted.

5. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXS panel.

Field Description

GEXS: Opens a selector panel with the values returned from the query (see GEXS Formulas).







6. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXI panel.

Field Description

GEXI: Opens the detail portion of the query and displays it in a drill down panel(see GEXI Formulas).




7. The Results Box near the bottom left of the panel displays the formula as it is being built. Verify the data in theResults Box is correct, and then click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons.

Insert (icon) or Insert (button) -- inserts the formula to the previously selected cell on the current worksheet andcloses the panel.Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard.Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.

Query 234


8.3 GEXQ Formula

The GEXQ formula is used to return a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of a query into a spreadsheet. Auser may drill down upon the summary value to see detailed results. The drill down results can appear in a singlepanel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon options in the user's SS Settings and how the drill down function isexecuted.

Note: A SHELL Statement may be added to the query to launch an external program in replace of query detail as partof the drill down (see SQL SHELL Function).

1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside, then from the SS Ribbon menu select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the formula (GEXQ) on the Formulas fly out window.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXQ panel.

Field Description






Field Description


Note: Values to be entered in the GEXQ formula will vary based upon whether the GEXQ summary field is defined in the query or the

formula.

Example 1 - GEXQ Summary Field Defined in the Query:See Create the GEXQ Field for more information on creating the GEXQ summary field in the Query Designer.

Example 2 - GEXQ Summary Field Defined in the Formula Assistant:

Query 236


3. Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the summary portion of the query in the GEXQ formula isimmediately executed. The true formula (GEXQ(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar.

4. Copy the GEXQ formula to the appropriate destination cells.

Note: If the GEXQ formula is used in conjunction with data generated via an GEXD formula and is in an adjacentcolumn, use the GEXD Fill Down Column feature to copy the GEXQ formula to the same number of rowsgenerated by the GEXD formula (see GEXD formulas).

5. To view detail records underlying an GEXQ summary value, select the cell containing the GEXQ formula, then fromthe SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Drill Down panelappears displaying the detail records for the GEXQ summary value or the data is pushed to a worksheet.


8.4 GEXD Formula

The GEXD formula is used to directly insert the detail results of a query into a spreadsheet.

Note: See GEXD Limit to define the maximum the number of query output records in Excel.

1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside, then from the SS Ribbon menu select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the formula (GEXD) on the Formulas fly out window.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXD panel.

Field Description





Query 238


Field Description





Clear Sheet/Range/Table If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or therange or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is clearedwhen the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXDformula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet. Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data.


Button Function

Modify Layout Opens the Custom Layout Editor, allowing the user to create, modify orselect the custom layout to be used when the GEXD formula is generated.

Remove Layout Removes the assigned custom layout from the GEXD formula. If the layoutis not assigned to another GEXD formula in the workbook, then the customlayout is also deleted.


3. Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and a label (GenQueryDetail...) appears in the cell. The trueformula (GEXD(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar.

4. To generate detail reports for all GEXD formulas in the workbook, from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>AllDetail Reports (GEXD Formulas). The results for all GEXD formulas are expanded into the appropriate formattedsheets.

To generate a detail report for a single GEXD formula, select the cell containing the GEXD formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>Selected Detail Report (GEXD Formula) -or- right click and selectSpreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GEXD). The results for the selected GEXD formula areexpanded into the appropriate formatted sheet.

Note: When generating a GEXD to a table set to be cleared, if the system detects extra '"non-fill down" columnsat the end of the output table, a prompt message appears indicating that the data in these extra columns willbe lost and allows the user to continue or abort processing for the GEXD.

Query 240


8.4.1 GEXD Targeting a Cell

The following example demonstrates targeting a cell as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value.

1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR).Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459).Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula).Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside.Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example).Cells A7-G7 - represents the first row of output data.Cell H7 - identifies the fill down column formula (i.e. D7*.09).

2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab:Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices).Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet7).Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the starting cell for the output data (i.e. A7).Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from thequery. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet.Clear a Range of Cells - indicates the area of output data to be cleared prior to executing the GEXD formula. Asthis example contain a fill down column (i.e. H7), the clear range starts on the second row of output data (i.e. A8:H500), allowing the fill down formula to remain for future executions of the GEXD.Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4).


3. The completed worksheet after GEXD execution:

Query 242


8.4.2 GEXD Targeting a Range

The following example demonstrates targeting a range as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value.

1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR).Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459).Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula).Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside.Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example).Cells A7-G7 - a range was created in Excel for these cells and the range was named GEXDTargetRange.Cell H7 - contains a formula (i.e. D7*.09) which will automatically be filled down based upon the rows in the rangewhen the GEXD is generated. This column MUST be directly to the right of the range.

2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab:Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices).Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet5).Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the name of the range for the output data (i.e. GEXDTargetRange).Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from thequery. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet.Clear Sheet/Range/Table - indicates whether or not to clear the range of output data prior to executing the GEXDformula. Selected in this example.Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4).



Query 244


8.4.3 GEXD Targeting a Table

The following example demonstrates targeting a table as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value.

1. Initial Excel setup for the example:Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR).Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459).Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula).Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside.Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example).Cells A6-H7 - a range was created in Excel for these cells and the range was named GEXDTargetTable.Cell H7 - contains a formula (i.e. D7*.09) which will automatically be filled down based upon the rows in the rangewhen the GEXD is generated. This column is in the table.

2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab:Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices).Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet6).Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the name of the table for the output data (i.e. GEXDTargetTable).Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from thequery. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet.Clear Sheet/Range/Table - indicates whether or not to clear the range of output data prior to executing the GEXDformula. Selected in this example.Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4).



Note: When generating a GEXD to a table set to be cleared, if the system detects extra '"non-fill down" columnsat the end of the output table, a prompt message appears indicating that the data in these extra columns willbe lost and allows the user to continue or abort processing for the GEXD.

Query 246


8.4.4 Custom Layout Editor

Custom Layouts allow the user to modify the output (i.e. which fields display and the order of the fields) when a GEXDformula is generated in Excel, without having to modify the query in Query Designer.

Note: When assigning or modifying a custom layout for an existing GEXD, previous data may be lost and columnformatting may change.

To Assign/Modify a Custom Layout to a GEXD Formula:1. From either the Build a Template - GEXD -or- Formula Assistant - GEXD panel, click Modify Layout.

If custom layouts exist for the query in the workbook, the Custom Layouts panel appears listing existing layouts. Continue with step 2.If no custom layouts exist for the query in the workbook -or- if a custom layout is already assigned to the GEXDformula, the Custom Layout Editor panel appears. Continue with step 3.

2. On the Custom Layouts panel, select an existing layout to use -orclick Create New Layout to create a newcustom layout. The Custom Layout Edit panel appears.


3. Use the table to enter data on the Custom Layout Editor panel.

Field Description

Query Name Displays the name of the selected query.

Layout Name Specify the name to be assigned to the custom layout.

Include If selected, indicates that the field is to be included in the results when theGEXD formula is generated. When deselected, the associated field ismoved to the bottom of the list.

Field Name Displays the name of fields available in the query.

4. To modify the order of the fields, drag and drop a field to the desired position in the list.

5. Click OK. The system creates/updates the custom layout for the query and displays on the Build a Template -GEXD or Formula Assistant - GEXD panel the name of the custom layout in use.

Query 248


To Remove a Custom Layout from a GEXD Formula:1. From either the Build a Template - GEXD -or- Formula Assistant - GEXD panel, click Remove Layout.

2. Complete all data on the panel, then click Insert. The system removes the custom layout from the GEXD formula,and if the custom layout is not assigned to the another GEXD formula in the workbook, the system also deletes thecustom layout.

To Remove a Custom Layout from the Workbook:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Tools>Custom Layouts. The Custom Layouts panel appears listing all custom

layouts in the workbook.

2. Select the desired layout to be removed, click Remove Layout. A confirmation panel appears.

3. Click OK. The system removes the custom layout from all GEXD formulas in the workbook and deletes thecustom layout.


8.4.5 Execute Query without a GEXD Formula

Similar to the GEXD formula, the Query function is used to return the detail results of a query. The Query functiondiffers from a GEXD formula, as no actual formula resides on the spreadsheet and the results are displayed in aseparate panel instead of on the spreadsheet.

To Setup:1. In Query Designer, create or open the desired query, from the Ribbon select Available on Ribbon, and then save the

query.

2. Repeat step 1 for each desired query.

To Process:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Query. The system lists all queries flagged as Available on Ribbon.

2. Navigate to and select the desired query.If no parameters exist for the selected query, the Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records.If parameters exist for the selected query, the Query pane appears in Excel. Continue with step 3.

Query 250


3. On the Query pane, enter the appropriate parameters and click Execute. The Drill Down panel appears displayingthe detail records.


8.4.6 Execute SAP T-Code without a GEXD Formula

Similar to the GEXD formula, the SAP T-Code function is used to return the detail results of a SAP T-Code andexecution variant. The SAP T-Code function differs from a GEXD formula, as no actual formula resides on thespreadsheet and the results are displayed in a separate panel instead of on the spreadsheet.

To Setup:1. Ensure T-Codes are assigned to the appropriate SAP host configuration(s) in the Configurator.

2. On the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP panel, select the T-Codes to be pinned to theribbon.

3. Prior to using a new or modified pinned T-Code, in Excel from the SS Ribbon select Refresh>SAP T-Codes. Thesystem refreshes pinned T-Codes.

To Process:1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon select Query, and then:

To select a T-Code -- select SAP T-Codes. The SAP T-Codes - Select T-Code pane in Excel appears. Continuewith step 2.To select a pinned T-Code -- navigate to and select the desired T-Code. The SAP T-Codes - Select ExecutionVariant pane in Excel appears. Continue with step 4.

2. Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used for listing SAP T-Codes. The list only displaysSAP NetCo 3.0 connection type configurations.

Query 252


3. Select the desired T-Code by double clicking the T-Code in the list -or- selecting the T-Code in the list and clickingNext. The SAP T-Codes - Execution Variant pane appears listing execution variants available for the selected T-Code.

4. Select the desired execution variant in the list and then:To process the T-Code using the default parameters -- click Execute. The Drill Down panel appears displayingthe detail records. To view and/or modify the parameters to be used to process the T-Code -- click Next. The SAP T-Codes -Parameters pane appears. Continue with step 5.

Note: When the variant <None> is selected, the Execute button is disabled. Click Next and continue with step 5.


5. On the SAP T-Codes - Parameters pane, enter the appropriate parameters and click Execute. The Drill Downpanel appears displaying the detail records (see screen shot above).

Note: A value other than * must be entered for required parameters (indicated by red description).A Thru Value field appears when a parameter is set to allow a range selection.Currently leading zeros must be entered when keying a value for the ACCOUNT parameter.

Query 254


8.5 GEXS Formula

The GEXS formula opens a selector panel with the values returned from the specified query. Selected values from thefirst column are then returned to Excel.

1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside (typically adjacent to the Cell for Value), then from the SSRibbon select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the formula (GEXS) on theFormulas fly out window.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXS panel.

Field Description







3. Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the specified Selector Text appears in the cell. The trueformula (GEXS(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar.

4. To execute the GEXS formula, select the cell containing the GEXS formula, then from the SS Ribbon select DrillDown -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Select Item panel appears.

5. Data in the list may be filtered, re-sorted and/or rearranged as necessary.To filter data -- enter a value in the appropriate column filter. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. Numeric fields filter upon entry of the full field value.To re-sort data -- click the column heading to re-sort a column in ascending order. Click the column heading asecond time to re-sort the column in descending order.To move a column -- click and hold on the desired column header, then drag and drop the column right or left tothe desired position.Note: Column order is important, as only the first column of selected data will be inserted in the formula.

Query 256


6. On the Select Item panel, specify the appropriate Parameter Type and then select the desired value(s) and clickthe Insert Selected Value(s) button. The selected value(s) are returned to the Cell for Value cell on thespreadsheet.

To select a single value -- double click the value -orselect the value and click Insert Selected Value(s).To select multiple values -- press and hold the Ctrl key as values are selected.To select multiple values in a range -- select the first value in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and thenselect the last value in the range.

Example 1:Multiple values for a field to be used by a Smart Parm are selected, and the Insert Selected Value(s) button isselected.


8.6 GEXI Formula

The GEXI formula is used to display the detail results of a query. The results can appear in a single panel, tabbedpanel or worksheet based upon options in the user's SS Settings and how the drill down function is executed.

1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside, then from the SS Ribbon select Formula Assistant. TheFormula Assistant panel appears. Select the formula (GEXI) on the Formulas fly out window.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXI panel.

Field Description




Query 258


3. Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the GEXI indicator (i.e. ???) appears in the cell. The trueformula (GEXI(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar.

Note: The GEXI indicator value used is determined by an application setting in the Configurator.

4. Copy the GEXI formula to the appropriate destination cells.

Note: If the GEXI formula is used in conjunction with data generated via an GEXD formula and is in an adjacentcolumn, use the GEXD Fill Down Column feature to copy the GEXI formula to the same number of rowsgenerated by the GEXD formula (see GEXD formulas).

5. To view detail records for the specified query, select the cell containing the GEXI formula, then from the SS Ribbonselect Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Drill Down panel appearsdisplaying the detail records for the query or the data is pushed to a worksheet.


Query 260


8.7 Execute Lookup

The Look function opens a selector panel with values returned from a specified query. Selected values from the firstcolumn are then returned to the active cell in Excel -orin a Parameters List. The Lookup function in Excel differs froma GEXS formula, as no formula resides on the spreadsheet. Queries (EDQs) available for processing from the Lookupfunction must reside in a specific location.

To Setup:1. Ensure a folder labeled, Explore, exists in the root of the user's EDQ location.

2. In Query Designer, create the desired queries and save them in the Explore folder.

To Process:1. In Excel select the desired cell and from the SS Ribbon select Lookup -orfrom either the SS Settings Writeback

Template or Select Oracle Public API panels, or from the SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel, selectthe desired cell in the Parameters List and click Lookup. The system lists the available queries located in theExplore folder.

Note: Only the first fifteen (15) queries located in the root of the Explore folder are listed.Only the first ten (10) sub-folders located in the Explore folder are listed. Only the first ten (10) queries located in a sub-folder are listed. No second level sub-folders are listed.

2. Navigate to and select the desired query. The Select Item panel appears.

3. If necessary, reorder the columns, as the system returns value(s) from the first column.

4. On the Select Item panel, select the desired value(s) and click Insert Selected Value(s). The selected values fromthe first column are returned to the active cell on the spreadsheet -orin the parameters list.


8.8 Download Queries from Query Exchange

Query Exchange is an online depository of queries. Query Designer allows the user to access the online querydepository, download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. Query Exchange may beaccessed from within either Query Designer or Excel. A user's ability to access Query Exchange is determined by auser setting in the Configurator.

Note: Must be connected to the internet to have access to the Query Exchange component.

To Download a Query from Query Exchange:1. From within Query Designer:

In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Search Online. Query Exchange opens.

From within Excel:In Excel, access either the Build a Template or Formula Assistant panel and select the appropriate GEXQ,GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula or tab.

Click the Search Online button ( ). Query Exchange opens.

2. Select and/or key the appropriate search criteria and click Search -orclick Advanced Search, enter theappropriate search criteria and click the Advanced Search button. The system lists all queries matching thesearch criteria.

Query 262


3. To download:

A single query -- click the Install Query icon ( ) next to the desired query. The Save As panel appears.Note: The Select a Connection panel appears prior to the Save As panel if the connection associated with the selected query does

not exist in the Configurator, allowing the user to select a connection to be assigned to the query.

Multiple queries -- select the appropriate check box(es) and click Download Selected Items. The Browse forFolder panel appears.

4. On the Save As or Browse for Folder panels, if necessary navigate to a different folder location and/or change thefile name, then click Save or OK. The Query Retrieved panel appears confirming that the query(ies) has beensaved to Query Designer.

5. On the Query Retrieved panel, click OK. Query Exchange reappears, allowing the user to select another query fordownloading.

6. Repeat steps 2 - 5 as necessary to download additional queries.

7. When all queries have been downloaded, click the X to close Query Exchange.If Query Exchange was accessed from Query Designer, then Query Designer reappears and opens the lastquery downloaded via the Install Query icon.If Query Exchange was accessed from Build a Template or Formula Assistant panels in Excel, then the originalpanel reappears and defaults the name of the last query downloaded via the Install Query icon in the QueryName field.Note: Refer to GEXD Formulas, GEXQ Formulas, GEXI Formulas, and GEXS Formulas for the steps required to complete a

formula.


9 Query Designer

9.1 Query Designer Architecture

The Query Designer is a visual tool which allows the user to design, maintain, and run queries. The following chaptergives an overview of the various parts of the Query Designer, and describes the basic navigation.

1. From the desktop, select Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Query Designer. The QueryDesigner panel appears.

Query Designer 264


9.1.1 QD Ribbon

The Query Designer's many functions are accessed via a ribbon.


Globe Button: Menu used to create, open, close and save queries.

New Closes any open query and begins the process to create a new query(see Create a New Query).

Open Query Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate a query anywhere onthe network.

Close Query Closes the active query.

Save Query Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save Asdialog box appears (see Save the Query for the First Time).

Save As Saves the active query to a different target location and/or file name.

Exit Exits the Query Designer application.

Recent Documents Lists recent queries previously opened in the Query Designer. Click on aquery in the list to reopen the query.

Quick Access Toolbar:

Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate a query anywhere onthe network.

Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save Asdialog box appears.

Closes the active query.



Home Tab: Main menu used to maintain and execute queries.

Add Table Allows the user to add an available table from the current connection.

Add Parameter Allows the user to define a parameter to be utilized as field criteria (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer).

Change Connection Allows the user to change the connection for the selected query.

Definition Copies the open query definition to Notepad. This is useful fordocumenting queries (see Textual Query Definition).

Lib= Defines the library of the active query.

GEXD Limit Specifies the number of records to be returned in Excel when a GEXDformula is generated.

Available on Ribbon If selected, indicates the query is listed under the Query option on the SSRibbon in Excel and is available for processing (see Execute Querywithout a GEXD Formula).

Un-Locked / Locked Locks or unlocks, based upon the current query status, the query toprevent modification of the query.

Save Query Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save Asdialog box appears.

Close Query Closes the active query.

All Records Executes the active query and returns all records. Note: Press F5 as a shortcut to execute all records for the query.

1,000 Records Executes the active query and returns the first 1000 records.

Single Record Executes the active query and returns the first record.

Prompted Executes the active query and returns a prompted number or records.

Execute GEDQ Executes the select statement only portion of the query.

Abort Aborts the currently active executing query.

Explorer File System Displays queries located in the EDQ file repository directory location asdefined in QD Settings.

Query View Returns the top left panel to the open query's table view.

Send to Query Exchange Sends the open query to Global's online query depository, QueryExchange. The user is prompted to key a query description if one is notcurrently assigned. Global reviews all queries prior to promoting them toQuery Exchange (see Download or Send Query Exchange Queries).

Search Online Goes to Global's online query depository, Query Exchange, allowing theuser to download queries to Query Designer (see Download Queries fromQuery Exchange).

Connection Tab: Menu used to manage active connections.

View Opens the Connections panel, allowing the user to view and testconnections to which the user is authorized (see Connections).

Disconnect All OpenConnections

Disconnects all open connections.

Update Query Connections Opens the Update Query Connections panel, allowing the user to masschange the original connection assigned to queries to a new connection.

Query Designer 266



File System Tab: Menu used to manage queries located in the EDQ file repository.Note: This menu is only available when the Explorer File System option isselected on the Home menu.

Clone Copies the selected query.

Delete Deletes the selected query.

Upgrade EDQs for File System Converts EDQ files from the Query Catalog to the Explorer File System.

View Tab: Menu used to modify QD settings, and to access Ad Hoc Queries andother reporting functions.

SQL Font Defines the font used in the SQL Text panel.

Font Size Defines the font size used in SQL Text panel.

Decrease Spacing Decreases the spacing in the tables on the Query View panel.

Increase Spacing Increases the spacing in the tables on the Query View panel.

Legacy Ad Hoc Queries Opens the Legacy Ad Hoc Queries panel, allowing the user to viewpreexisting ad hocs.

View Log File Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view information anderror log entries, copy selected log entries, email or clear the log file (see QD View Log).

Settings Opens the Query Designer Settings panel, allowing the user to definedvarious criteria to control processing (see QD Settings).

Field Options Tab: Menu used to access/process various functions associated with selectedquery fields (see Field List Menu).Note: This menu is only available when a query is open.

Totals (Group By) Toggles to display or hide the Totals column which is used for totaling andgrouping (see Create a Totals (Group By) Query).

Unique Rows When enabled changes the query to a SELECT DISTINCT query, thusremoving duplicate rows from the result set causing each row to be unique.

GEXQ (Summary) Field Creates summary SQL code for the selected field (see Create the GEXQField).

Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) Allows the user to manually assign an alias name to the selected field(see Assign Aliases to Fields).

Add Field Descriptions asAliases

Creates aliases for each field in the query using the field descriptions fromthe table schema (see Assign Aliases to Fields).

Add Smart Parm for This Field

Creates a smart parameter and assigns it to the selected field (see SmartParms in the Query Designer).

Add Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel that avails the user to the query source tables andparameters, and provides tools to aid in creating a calculated field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields).

Move Field Up/Down Moves the selected field up or down one line. An alternative to this is todrag the selected field with the mouse and drop it in the desired location.

Preview Data Opens the ResultsContainer displaying data for the selected field(s).

Delete Field(s) Deletes the selected field(s) from the query.



1,000 Records Executes the active query and returns the first 1000 records.

Single Record Executes the active query and returns the first record.

Prompted Executes the active query and returns a prompted number or records.

Execute GEDQ Executes the select statement only portion of the query.

Abort Aborts the currently active executing query.

Query Designer 268


9.1.2 Explorer File System Panel

The Explorer File System panel is a view of the default folder and subdirectories for EDQ files, and the query (EDQ)files located within the directories. An option in the SS Settings defines the default folder and an option in the QDSettings limits the fields displayed on the panel.

1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Home>Explorer File System. The Explorer File System panelappears.

2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Explorer File System panel.

Field Description

Explorer File System ViewDirectory Tree

Displays the default folder and subdirectories for query (EDQ) files, asdefined in the SS Settings.

Name File name for the query (EDQ).

Description User defined query description.

Connection Connection used by the query.

SmartPak SmartPak grouping value for the query.

Size File size of the query.

Modified Date and time the query was last modified.

Modified By User ID of the last user who modified the query.

3. Use the table to reference available functions on the Explorer File System panel.


Open Query To open a query, double click the query name. The Query View Panelappears.

Re-size / Hide Columns To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of thecolumn header and drag to the desired width.

Re-sort Columns To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort in descending order, click the column heading a second time.


9.1.2.1 Query Menu

The Query menu is accessed from the Explorer File System panel, and allows the user to maintain, clone, or delete aquery.

1. On the Explorer File System panel, right click on the desired query. The Query popup menu appears.

2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Query popup menu.


Change Description Opens the Description panel, allowing the user to change the querydescription.

Clone Query Opens the Clone Query panel, allowing the user to enter the name to beassigned to the cloned query.

Remove Query Opens the Delete File panel, allowing the user to confirm the deletion ofthe query.

Assign SmartPak Opens the SmartPak panel, allowing the user to maintain the SmartPakgrouping value(s) associated with the query.

Explore Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and open a querywhich resides outside the default query location.

Query Designer 270


9.1.3 Query View Panel

The Query View panel is used to visually layout a query. Tables and relationships for the query are displayed in thispanel.

1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Query View panel appears for the selected query.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed from the QD Ribbon, by selecting Home>Query View.

Note: An ellipse appears at the end of the table name indicating the name and description is too long to display. Hover the cursor over the table name to show a tool tip displaying the full table name and description.

2. Use the table for available functions on the Query View panel.


Add a Table Right click in any open gray space away from a relationship line, theTables panel appears allowing the user to select additional tables.

Move a Table Drag the table header to another spot on the screen.

Re-size a Table Left click and drag on the blue box at the bottom right of the table.

Create a Relationship Click on a field from one table, then drag and drop it on the appropriatefield in another table.

Modify a Relationship Double click on a relationship line -orselect a relationship line and rightclick (see Create Relationships).

Select a Field(s) Double click the desired field -or- drag and drop it to add it to the selectedfields on the Field List panel. In addition, one or more fields may beselected, and then right click and select Add Field(s) to add the selectedfield(s) to the list (see Fields Used Direct from Source Table).


9.1.3.1 Table Menu

The Table menu is accessed from the Query View panel, and allows the user to access/process various functionsassociated with the selected table.

1. On the Query View panel, right click on the header section of the desired table. The Table popup menu appears. The options available on the Table menu vary based upon the query connection type.

2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Table popup menu.


Change Database/Library For iSeries and SQL Server connection queries only, opens the SelectLibrary panel, allowing the user to select a different database/library fromwhich to retrieve the table data. The newly selected database/library nameappears in the table header section.

See Use Parameter to Supply Database/Library Name for how to use aparameter for assigning the database/library to be used when executingthe query.

Change Schema For Oracle connection queries only, opens the Change Schema panelallowing the user to specify a different schema for the table.

Change Table Owner For SQL Server connection queries only, opens the Change Table Ownerpanel allowing the user to specify a different owner for the table.

Refresh Field Names fromDatabase

Updates the fields listed for the table.

Set Table Alias For all connection queries except SAP, opens the Table Alias panelallowing the user to enter an alias name for the table.

Remove Table Removes the table and any associated relationships and selected fieldsfrom the query.

Query Designer 272


9.1.3.2 Table Field Menu

The Table Field menu is accessed from the Query View panel, and allows the user to access/process various functionsassociated with field(s) in the selected table.

1. On the Query View panel, selected the desired field(s) from the table and right click. The Table Menu popup menuappears. The options available on the Table Field menu vary based upon the field type selected.

2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Table Field popup menu.


Add Field(s) Adds the selected field(s) to the bottom of the Field List for the query.

Preview Data For non-image type fields only, opens the ResultsContainer displayingdata for the selected field(s).


9.1.4 Field List Panel

The Field List panel displays the fields included in the query and the field attributes that will be utilized to retrieve thedata. In addition, the panel displays information as to how the data will be grouped, sorted, displayed and selected.

1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Field List panel appears for the selected query.

2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Field List panel.

Field Column Description

Type Type of field. Valid types are T (text), N (numeric), D (date), B (Boolean), U (unknown), I (image), and G (graphic, applies to iSeries connectiontypes only).

Field Name Field name from the source table. In addition, an alias name may beassigned to the field. The alias name appears in front of the actual fieldname.

Example: Field name is CNME and the alias name is Customer Name.

Totals Indicates how the field is being grouped (totaled). This column onlyappears when the Totals (Group By) function is being used (see Create aTotals (Group By) Query).

Table Name Source table from which the field is being retrieved. The value "(none)"appears for a calculated field.

Sort Type Indicates whether or not to use the field for sorting, and how to sort thefield. Valid values are (none), Ascending, and Descending.

Sort Order Indicates the order by which the query data will be sorted. The field withthe lowest number is the first sort key.

Visible Indicates whether or not the field will be visible in the query output. Bydefault all fields are visible. De-selecting the option for a selected field willallow the field to be used as selection criteria, but not included in the queryoutput.

Criteria 1 - 6 Selection criteria (i.e. specific values, parameters, expressions) to be usedwhen retrieving query data. Criteria entered vertically in the same columnare combined with a logical AND. Criteria entered horizontally across

columns are combined with a logical OR. Click the ellipse button ( ) forthe appropriate field to access the Builder for entering criteria expressions(see Builder Panel).

Query Designer 274


9.1.4.1 Field List Menu

The Field List Menu is accessed from the Field List panel, and allows the user to access/process various functionsassociated with selected query fields. The same functions are available from the Field Options tab on the Ribbon.

1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field. The Field List popup menu appears.

Note: If no fields are in the list and right click in the Field List, only the Add Calculated Field option is available.

2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Field List popup menu.


Totals (Group By) Toggles to display or hide the Totals column which is used for totaling andgrouping (see Create a Totals (Group By) Query).

Unique Rows When enabled changes the query to a SELECT DISTINCT query, thusremoving duplicate rows from the result set causing each row to be unique.

GEXQ (Summary) Field Creates summary SQL code for the selected field (see Create the GEXQField).

Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) Allows the user to manually assign an alias name to the selected field(see Assign Aliases to Fields).

Add Field Descriptions asAliases

Creates aliases for each field in the query using the field descriptions fromthe table schema (see Assign Aliases to Fields).

Add Smart Parm for This Field Creates a smart parameter and assigns it to the selected field (see SmartParms in the Query Designer).

Add Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel that avails the user to the query source tables andparameters, and provides tools to aid in creating a calculated field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields).

Edit Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel for a selected calculated field (see Create/EditCalculated Fields).

Move Field Up/Down Moves the selected field up or down one line. An alternative to this is todrag the selected field with the mouse and drop it in the desired location.

Preview Data Opens the ResultsContainer displaying data for the selected field(s).

Delete Field(s) Deletes the selected field(s) from the query.


9.1.4.2 Builder Panel

The Builder is used to enter query criteria or create calculated fields. The Builder panel may be accessed from the Field Listpanel by:

Selecting the ellipse button located in one of the seven criteria fields.Selecting a field, right clicking and selecting Add Calculated Field -or- Edit Calculated Field (see Create/Edit CalculatedFields).

Builder Operation ButtonsOperation buttons are provided on the Builder panel to assist the user in building expressions.

Query Designer 276


Builder Functional ButtonsAdditional functional buttons are available on the Builder panel.

Button Function

iSeries, Oracle, SQL ServerTabs:

Each tab has specific features to support the appropriate server. Not allfeatures are available on each tab.

Current Date Inserts the expression for the current date into the query.

CASE Builder Opens the Case Builder panel, allowing the user to create a casestatement and push it into the Builder panel (see Use the CASE Builder).

90 Days Ago Inserts the (CURRENT DATE - 90 DAYS) expression. The "- 90" may thenbe changed to a different value.

TRIM (<expr>) Trims leading and trailing blanks.

In ('x','x') Inserts an IN expression (valid if field criteria is in a comma-delimited list).

Date Conversion Click the down arrow and select the original format of the date field to beconverted. The system then inserts the selected date field into anexpression that converts the field into an actual Date Type field.

YYDDD - Julian date format used by InfiniumCYYDDD - Julian date format used by JD EdwardsYYYYDDD - Julian date format used by Jack HenryYYYYMMDD - date format used by BPCS

Note: Date formats are not exclusive to the ledgers listed above.

Salesforce Tab: Refer to Salesforce documentation for more information regarding datefunctions and date literals.

Today Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day andcontinues for 24 hours.

Last_90_Days Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day andcontinues for the last 90 days.

Last_N_Days:30 Inserts the date literal, which for the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 ofthe current day and continues for the last n days. The "30" may then bechanged to a different value.

Last_N_Weeks:2 Inserts the date literal, which for the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 ofthe last day of the previous week and continues for the last n weeks. The"2" may then be changed to a different value.

Next_90_Days Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day andcontinues for the next 90 days.

Next_N_Days:30 Inserts the date literal, for which the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 ofthe current day and continues for the next n days. The "30" may then bechanged to a different value.

This_Year Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 on January 1 of the currentyear and continues through the end of December 31 of the current year.

Calendar_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendarmonth for the selected date field.

Calendar_Quarter Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendarquarter for the selected date field.

Calendar_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendaryear for the selected date field.


Button Function

Day_In_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the day inthe month for the selected date field.

Day_In_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the day inthe year for the selected date field.

Week_In_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the week inthe month for the selected date field.

Week_In_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the week inthe year for the selected date field.

Misc Tab:

%GEXDROW% Inserts the keyword %GEXDROW%, which replaces the ROW number ofthe Excel row when used as detail results in a GEXD formula (see GEXDRow).

%USER% Inserts the keyword %USER%, which replaces the username in theconnection to the data.

%WINDOWSUSER% Inserts the keyword %WINDOWSUSER%, which replaces the Windowsuser ID when executing the query.

%APPUSER% Inserts the keyword %APPUSER%, which replaces the application userfrom the Configurator for the user when executing the query.

COALESCE Converts null values to the value specified in the function (the default is 0).

Logic Click the down arrow to access additional %IF and %LOOP functions.

Simple Loop Inserts loop statement, allowing the query to loop through fields andsummarize them based on user defined parameters for the loop counter. The loop will continue to process from the first counter until it hits thesecond counter.

Loop Count Inserts the keyword %LOOPCOUNT%.

Loop Count NN Inserts the keyword %LOOPCOUNT2%. The "2" may then be changed toa different number to indicate the number of characters/digits to display forthe value.

Simple IF Inserts a basic IF-THEN-ELSE statement which may then be modified.

Custom Buttons Performs user defined function.

Test SQL Verifies the SQL statement for the calculated field.

Increases or decreases the font size in the work area on the panel.

Get Values Retrieves each distinct value of a selected field.

CommentsReference the following for entering comments on the Builder panel. Comments must be on a separate line.

Connection Type Comment Syntax

Access and SAP Comments are not supported.

DSN DSN owner should know whether or not comments are supported.

iSeries and Oracle /*this is a comment*/

SQL Server Two dashes then the comment text (i.e. --this is a comment)

Query Designer 278


9.1.4.2.1 Custom Buttons

The Builder panel contains two custom buttons. The user defines the function to occur when each button is selected.

To Maintain Custom Buttons:

1. On the Builder panel Misc tab, click the Edit Custom Buttons button ( ). The Customize Builder panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Customize Builder panel.

Field Description

Button to Customize Click the down arrow and select which custom button to modify.

Display Text Specify the label to appear on the custom button.

Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to appear for the custom button.

Preview Displays how the custom button will appear.

Assigned Function Specify the function to occur or the expression to be inserted into theBuilder when the custom button is selected.

Button Function

Clear Button Assignment Clears the text, tool tip and assigned function values previously assignedto the custom button.

3. Click OK. The system updates the custom button on the Builder panel.


9.1.5 Query Parameters Panel

The Query Parameters panel is used to maintain parameters for the query. Test values may be assigned to theparameters, enabling the user to test a query directly in the Query Designer prior to using it in Excel. Criteria assignedto parameters also controls drill down sub query processing and the listing of valid values in Build a Template.

1. In Query Designer, when a query not using a data services type connection is opened, the Query Parameters panelappears for the selected query.

2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Query Parameters panel.

Field Description

ID System assigned parameter ID number.

Description Parameter description, generally the field name.

Test Value Default test parameter value.

Sub Query Column Column name to be used for matching to drill down panel column nameswhen determining whether the query is a valid sub query for the associateddrill down.

Assign Query Query to be used for listing valid values for the parameter on the Build aTemplate panel.

3. Use the table to reference available functions on the Query Parameters panel.


Add a Parameter To add a new parameter, click the Add button ( ). The Add a Parameterpopup panel appears (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer).

Edit a Parameter To modify a parameter, click in the desired field and a blinking cursorappears allowing changes.

Save Changes To save parameter changes, click Save Query on the QD Ribbon.

Delete a Parameter To delete a parameter(s), select the parameter(s) and then click the Delete

button ( ) -or- right click and select Delete.

Switch Parameter Order (see Note)

To switch the order of two parameters, select the first parameter, rightclick and select Switch Parameter Order, then select the secondparameter and click OK.

Renumber All Parameters(see Note)

To fill in any gaps in parameter ID numbers, right click and selectRenumber All Parameters.

Note: Changing the parameter order will break any existing worksheets using the query.

Query Designer 280


9.1.6 Method Parameters Panel

The Method Parameters panel only appears for queries using a data services connection type and allows the user tospecify parameter values for retrieving data from the data services database.

1. In Query Designer, when a query using a data services type connection is opened, the Method Parameters panelappears for the selected query.

2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Method Parameters panel.

Field Description

Method Displays the method name. When parameters from different methods arejoined (see Create Relationships), the parameters are combined in the gridand assigned the method name of MultipleN (where N is a systemassigned number).

Parameter Displays the parameter name.

Required Displays Required or Not Required, indicating whether the parameter isrequired (i.e. a value must be specified) when processing the method.

Parm Usage Click the down arrow and select the appropriate value to indicate how theparameter is used. Valid options are:

Variable - value may be changed by users when processing.Fixed - value is preset in the Configurator or Query Designer; however,users will see the parameter and value when processing.Hidden - value is preset here in Query Designer and users will not seethe parameter when processing.

Filter Type Displays the filter to be applied to the parameter value. Equal is the onlyfilter type currently supported by MRI.

Value For variable Parm Usage fields, if desired specify the default parametervalue to be used for processing. The parameter value may be changed bythe user when processing the query.For fixed or hidden Parm Usage fields, specify the parameter value to beused when processing.


9.1.7 SQL Text Panel

The SQL Text panel displays the SQL text to be executed for both a detail query and a GEXQ (summary query).

Auto Generate ModeBy selecting the Auto Generate check box (the default) the application continually updates the text to reflect changesmade in the visual layout.

Note: The Auto Generate check box is disabled when the Use Query Designer Object Security option is turned on forthe user in the Configurator or when using JDE security.

Manual ModeIf desired, SQL text may be manually entered or the auto-generated SQL text may be manually modified. For example,manual entry is required for establishing a SHELL to process an external program (see SQL SHELL Function).

1. De-select the Auto Generate check box. A popup panel appears.

2. On the popup panel, specify whether or not to copy the auto-generated SQL text. The Auto Generate label is setto red, indicating in manual mode.

Yes -- leaves any previously auto-generated SQL text in the SQL text box.No -- clears all data from the SQL text box.

3. Toggling back and forth from auto-generate to manual mode, the system saves the changes for the life of the query. When the query is saved the text that is currently displayed in the SQL text box will be the executed SQLstatement.

Query Designer 282


9.1.8 QuickText Panel

The QuickText panel allows the user to specify, if desired, GEXD or GEXQ QuickText verbiage (button label) andassociated tool tips for a query. The queries to which a GEXD or GEXQ QuickText value is assigned will automaticallyappear in a list under the SS Ribbon Build a Template>Query sub menu in Excel as a short cut for easier and quickerprocessing.

Use the table to enter data on the QuickText panel.

Field Description

GEXD QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build aTemplate>Query sub menu to identify the query for building a GEXDformula.


GEXQ QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build aTemplate>Query sub menu to identify the query for building a GEXQformula.



9.1.9 SAP Panel

The SAP panel only appears for queries using a SAP connection type and allows the user to specify, if desired, the name of a secondary database connection to be used for processing the query.

Use the table to enter data on the SAP panel.

Field Description

Secondary DatabaseConnection

For SAP designer GLs only, if desired specify the name of the secondarydatabase connection to be used for processing the query.

Include SAP "AS" Alias If selected, the SQL statement is built such that aliases are identified as"AS alias name". This option must be selected in order to sort a groupedquery. When this option is selected, special character restrictions areenforced for SAP alias names.

Query Designer 284


9.2 QD Settings

Query Designer (QD) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. The majority of the optionsdefine processing for all users on the PC; however, the option Show EDQ Detail is defined for each individual user.

1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select View>Settings. The Query Designer Settings - General panelappears.


Field Description

Show EDQ Detail If selected, all query related fields are displayed on the Explorer FileSystem panel. If not selected, only query name, size and modified date/time are displayed thus reducing retrieval time.

Auto-Alias Fields If selected, the field description is automatically assigned as the aliaswhen a field is added to a query. If a field description does not exist, thenthe field name is assigned as the alias (see Assign Aliases to Fields).Note: This function does not apply to calculated fields.

Results Grid Render Right to Left If selected, text on the ResultsContainer panel is right justified.

Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, oncean error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and de-select the option (see QD View Log).

Limit Preview Data to nnnRecords

If selected, the number of values/records retrieved, when the Preview Dataoption from the Table or Field List grid is processed, is limited by thenumber of records specified.


Button Function

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and errorlog entries, copy selected log entries, email or clear the log file (see QDView Log).

3. The File Locations panel displays the location of various files utilized in Query Designer. These file locations aredefined in user's SS Settings.

Query Designer 286


4. The System Information panel displays various data related to the user's system and Query Designer. To email

this information to the helpdesk, click the Email button. The system opens a new Outlook® email panel with thecontents of this panel in the body of the email. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body asnecessary and click the Send button.



6. Click OK. The system writes the changes and closes the panel.

Query Designer 288


9.3 Connections

A database connection must be created in order to process Query Designer queries (i.e. GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXIformulas or sub queries). All connections are created and maintained in the Configurator. In Query Designerconnections may be viewed and/or tested.

1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Connection>View. The Connections panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Connections panel.

Field Description

Available Connections Displays a list of connections available for use in Query Designer to whichthe user is authorized. Note: The list excludes SQL Server connections flagged as load localconnections.

Host If applicable, displays the server name or IP address.

Database If applicable, displays the database -or- for Oracle databases displays theSID and Port values.

User Name Displays the user name to be used to test the database connection. Thevalue may be keyed when the connection is set to Prompt for Input.

Password Displays the password to be used to test the database connection. Thevalue may be keyed when the connection is set to Prompt for Input

Button Function

Test Displays a message in the Results field indicating whether or not theconnection was successful.

3. To test a connection, select the connection from the list and click the Test button. A message appears in theResults field indicating whether or not the connection was successful.


9.3.1 Update Query Connections

The Update Query Connections function is used to mass change the original connection assigned to queries to a newconnection.

1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Connection>Update Query Connections. The Update QueryConnections panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Update Query Connections panel.

Field Description

Original Connection From the list of connections, select the connection to be updated. Thesystem displays the selected connection in the All Queries UsingConnection section on the panel.

Available Connections From the list of connections available for use in Query Designer, select theconnection to be assigned to the queries associated with the originalconnection. The system displays the selected connection in the Will NowUse Connection section on the panel.Note: The list excludes SQL Server connections flagged as load localconnections.

3. Click OK. The system updates the appropriate queries, replacing the original connection with the new connection.

Query Designer 290


9.4 Create a New Query

Use the following steps to create a new query.

1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select the Globe button>New. The Query Name and Connection panelappears.

2. On the Query Name and Connection panel, specify a unique name and description (optional) for the query, andselect which connection to use, then click OK. Based upon the setup of the connection either a Login panel or theTables panel appears.

3. If necessary, on the Login panel enter the appropriate data (i.e. user ID and password), and click Login. TheTables panel appears.

Note: The first time the Tables panel is accessed for a connection, the system builds a cache of available tables. Time required may to load the tables may vary based upon the number of tables. Subsequent times theTables panel is accessed for the connection process faster because tables are loaded from cache.

4. Proceed to the next step, Add Tables.


9.5 Save the Query for the First Time

It is recommended to save frequently during query creation/editing. The initial save of a query functions differently thanwhen an existing query is saved.

1. In Designer Query from the QD Ribbon, select Home>Save Query. The Save As panel appears positioned to thedefault folder for EDQ files and the File Name is highlighted.

Nav Tip:This function may also be processed by selecting the Globe button menu or Quick Access Toolbarequivalent (see QD Ribbon).

2. On the Save As panel, if necessary navigate to a different folder location and/or change the file name for the query.

3. Click the Save button. The system saves the query file (.EDQ), and a confirmation panel appears.

4. Click OK.

Query Designer 292


9.6 Add Tables

New QueryWhen creating a new query, the first task is to select the tables (files or methods) required for the query. After logginginto a database, the Tables panel appears listing tables from the database assigned to the applicable connection orspecified on the previous Login panel. A user's ability to select a table, view and/or synonym for a specific standardconnection is determined by the Query Designer Object Security option in User settings in the Configurator.

Note: The first time the Tables panel is accessed for a connection, the system builds a cache of available tables. Time required may to load the tables may vary based upon the number of tables. Subsequent times the Tablespanel is accessed for the connection process faster because tables are loaded from cache. Refresh the tablelist to rebuild the cache.

Existing QueryTo add a table to an existing query, in Query Designer from the QD Ribbon select Home>Add Table.

To Add Table(s) to a Query:1. Use the table to enter data on the Tables panel.

Field Description

Library For iSeries or SQL Server connections, click the down arrow and selectthe library from which to retrieve tables for the list and query execution. The value &Lib defaults indicating to use the database library specified onthe Login panel.

Data Type For Oracle connections only, click the down arrow and select the typefrom which to retrieve tables for the list and query execution. Valid typesare Synonyms, Tables, and Views.

Search For Specify a name or description in order to search for the desired table.Each character typed filters the list.


2. To add tables to the Favorites list, from the All tab on the Tables panel, select the desired table(s) and click Add toFavorites. The selected tables are added to the Favorites tab. If desired, click on the Favorites tab and assign analias name and/or modify the description for selected tables to aid in identifying tables on the Favorites tab.

Note: If tables have added to the favorites list, then any subsequent time the Tables panel is displayed for theassociated connection, the Favorites tab defaults.

3. To select table(s) for a query, from the Tables panel, select the table(s) and click the Add button. The table(s) areadded and the Query View panel appears.

To select a single table -- double click the table -orselect the table and click the Add button. To select multiple tables -- press and hold the Ctrl key as tables are selected. To select multiple tables in a range -- select the first table in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and selectthe last table in the range.

4. To add another table to the query, from the QD Ribbon select Home>Add Table -or- right click in any open grayspace on the Query View panel. The Tables panel appears. Repeat step 3 until all tables have been selected.

5. If the database environment has been changed (i.e. install a new version or maintenance fix of the ERP software

that includes table additions or restructures), click the Refresh List from Database button ( ) to refresh the viewof tables. The system re-reads the database schema, refreshes the tables listed and their structures.

6. If more than one table was selected for the query, then proceed to the next step, Create Relationships. If only onetable was selected, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields.

Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features.

Query Designer 294


9.7 Create Relationships

If more than one table is selected in query, it is necessary to create a relationship or join between the tables.

To Create a Relationship Between Two Tables:1. On the Query View panel, drag and drop a field from one table to the corresponding field in another table. The

system will draw a line indicating which fields are joined.

Note: When parameters from different methods are joined, the parameters are combined in the MethodParameters grid and assigned the method name of MultipleN (where N is a system assigned number).

Below the left mouse was dragged from the F0411.RPAN8 field and dropped on the F0101.ABAN8 field.

2. If necessary, repeat step 1 to create additional joins which may be needed to create the appropriate one-to-one orone-to-many relationship between tables.

3. Once the relationship is properly defined, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields.

To Modify Relationship Properties:1. On the Query View panel, double click the line connecting the two tables -orselect the relationship line and right

click. The Relationship Properties panel appears.


2. Use the table to enter data on the Relationship Properties panel.

Field Description

Left Table In special cases, use the Left Table section to modify the field in the lefttable to adhere to SQL rules.

Example 1: To join a text field to a numeric field a SQL command mustbe entered to convert the numeric field to a text field (i.e CHAR(<field>)).

Note: An ellipse appears at the end of the table name indicating the nameis too long to display. Hover the cursor over the table name to show a tooltip displaying the full table name.

Right Table In special cases, use the Right Table section to modify the field in the righttable to adhere to SQL rules. See Example 1 above for the Left Tablesection.

Joined Fields Specify the appropriate join type. By default an inner join relationship isselected, which includes only rows where the joined fields from both tablesare the same. Additional options are available to join all records from theleft table and only records in the right table where the joined fields match,or to join all records from the right table and only records in the left tablewhere the joined fields match.

Trim Both Fields If selected, the system trims (removes leading blanks) for both of thejoined fields.

3. To delete the selected join relationship, click the Delete Relationship button -or- to delete all relationships in thequery, click the Delete All Relationships button.

4. Once all changes are made, click OK.

5. Once the relationship is properly defined, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields.

Query Designer 296


9.8 Select or Create Query Fields

Fields should be added to a query in the following general order:

1. Add fields that are to be used directly (as-is) from the source tables (see Fields Used Direct from Source Table).

2. Add table field descriptions as aliases (see Assign Aliases to Fields).

3. Add calculated fields (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields).

4. Rename any fields as desired (see Assign Aliases to Fields).


9.8.1 Fields Used Direct from Source Table

Use the following steps to add fields to the query that are to be used directly (as-is) from selected source tables.

1. To add a field(s) to a query, on the Query View select the desired field(s) from a table:To add a single field -- double click the field -or- right click and select Add Field(s). The field is added to thebottom of the Field List panel.To add a single field and assign the location in the list -- drag and drop the field to the desired location in the list.

If the arrow is blue ( ) for the associated position, the field is inserted before; if the arrow is yellow ( ) thefield is insert below. To add select multiple fields -- press and hold the Ctrl key as fields are selected from a table, then right click andselect Add Field(s). The fields are added to the bottom of the list.To add multiple field in a range -- select the first field in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select thelast field in the range, then right click and select Add Field(s). The fields are added to the bottom of the list.

In the example below fields RPAN8 and ABALPH were selected.

2. Repeat step 1 until all of the fields that are to be used "as-is" have been selected.

3. To search for a field, enter the field name or description in the Search field. Each character typed filters thesearch. For example, to find the Vendor Invoice Number field enter the word "invoice" in the search field. All fieldscontaining the word "invoice" are filtered in the table. Clear the Search field to remove the filter.

Query Designer 298


9.8.1.1 Add Image Field Type

The Query Designer component allows for displaying images and PDFs for Access, Oracle and SQL Server connection types. The images and/or PDFs must be stored in the database using the appropriate field type definition as noted below:

Access connection - OLE ObjectOracle connection - Binary Large Object (BLOB)SQL Server connection - Image

General rules for executing a query containing an image field are:When querying images, only the image field may be visible. If more than one record is returned, only the image for the first record is displayed.

To Add an Image Type Field to a Query:1. On the Query View panel, double click the desired field from a table -or- drag and drop the field to the Field List

panel. The Select Image Type panel appears.

2. Click the down arrow for the File Type field and select the image type to be assigned to the field (i.e. Image orPDF), and then click OK. The system adds the field to the Field List panel and assigns the selected image typeas the field alias.

In the example below the image field PHOTO was selected, and the alias IMAGE was assigned.


9.8.1.2 Preview Data

Query Designer allows for previewing data available for selected fields. This feature may be helpful to determine theproper field(s) or selection criteria to be used in the query. The Limit Get Values to nnn Records option in QD Settingsdetermines the maximum number of records retrieved.

To Preview Data for Selected Field(s) Not Yet Added to the Query:1. On the Query View panel, selected the desired field(s) from the table, right click and select Preview Data. The

Results Container panel appears displaying data for the selected field(s).

Note: This feature does not function for image type fields.

To Preview Data for Selected Field(s) Already Added to the Query:1. On the Field List panel, selected the desired field(s), right click and select Preview Data. The Results Container

panel appears displaying data for the selected field(s).

Note: This feature does not function for calculated or image type fields, nor when fields from multiple tables areselected.

Query Designer 300


9.8.2 Assign Aliases to Fields

As field names from tables may be nondescript and confusing, assigning an alias name to a field assists in clarifyingwhat the field is. There are three ways to assign aliases to fields. When assigning aliases to fields, it is important asto when each method may be used to assign aliases to fields.

Auto-Alias Fields -- If the Auto-Alias Fields option is selected in QD Settings, then the system automaticallyassigns the field description as the alias when a field is added to a query. If a field description does not exist, thenthe field name is assigned as the alias. This function does not apply to calculated fields.

Add Field Descriptions as Aliases -- The system creates aliases for each field in the query using the fielddescriptions from the table schema. Generally this option is used immediately after all fields that are to be useddirectly (as-is) from the source tables have been added to the query. Once a calculated field has been added, thismethod for assigning aliases is no longer available.

Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) -- Allows the user to manually assign or modify an alias field name to a selected field. Generally this option is used after any calculated fields have been added.

Note: For SAP connection only, aliases may not contain special characters.The system automatically assigns the appropriate alias for image type fields (see Add Image Field Type).

To Add Field Descriptions as Aliases:1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field and select Add Field Descriptions as Aliases. The system uses the

field descriptions from the table schema to assign aliases to each field in the query.

Note: This function is not available after a calculated field has been added to the query.

To Manually Assign or Modify a Single Alias -- Alias (... AS nnnnnn ):1. On the Field List panel, select the desired field, right click and select Aliases (...AS nnnnnn). The Modify Alias

panel appears.

2. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias value and click OK. The system assigns the alias field name tothe selected field.


Example:

BEFORE aliases have been assigned (and before calculated fields have been added).

AFTER Add Field Descriptions as Aliases has been processed.

AFTER Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) has been processed for RPAN8, ABALPH and RPDOC.

Note: When using an Access connection aliases are delimited by brackets instead of double quotes.

Query Designer 302


9.8.3 Create/Edit Calculated Fields

A calculated field is a field that is created instead of pulled directly from a source table. Use the following steps tobegin the process to create a new calculated field or to modify an existing calculated field.

Note: For SAP connections only, calculated fields are limited to basic arithmetic functions add (+), subtract (-),multiply (*) and divide (/), and signs must be bounded by spaces (i.e. X + Y, not X+Y).

To Create a New Calculated Field:1. On the Field List panel, select the desired field for which to add the calculated field below, right click and select

Add Calculated Field. The Builder panel appears.

2. All calculated fields are defined in this panel (see Select Fields from a Table, Create Date Fields, Use the CASEBuilder, GEXD Row, and Get Values).

To Edit an Existing Calculated Field:1. On the Field List panel, select the desired calculated field to be edited and double click -or- right click and select

Edit Calculated Field. The Builder panel appears.

2. On the Builder panel, make any necessary changes and click OK.

3. Additional changes may be made to a calculated field on the Field List panel, such as changing the field type orassigning an alias field name (see Field List Panel and Assign Aliases to Fields).


9.8.3.1 Select Fields from a Table

Often files do not store data in the form which is desired, but various fields in the file may be combined (i.e. added orsubtracted) to obtain the desired result. The Builder may be used to create an expression using fields directly fromsource tables to obtain the desired value.

Example - Calculate the Amount Paid for an Invoice:Calculate the amount paid by subtracting the open invoice amount (RPAAP) from the gross invoice amount (RPAG).

1. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. The system expands the list ofselected source tables.

2. From the expanded table list, select the source table which contains the field to be used in the expression (F0411in this example). The system populates the Field Listing panel based upon the selected table.

3. From the Field Listings panel, double click the desired field (RPAG in this example). The selected value<lib.file.field> appears in the work area on the Builder panel.

4. In the work area, enter any math symbols by typing them -or- by clicking the appropriate operation button (ifavailable) (a minus sign in this example).

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary until the expression is complete (RPAAP was selected in this example).

6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom ofthe list.

Query Designer 304


7. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel select the field, right click and selectAlias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the alias for the field and clickOK.


9.8.3.2 Create Date Fields

Occasionally date fields in the source tables are not in a true date format as recognized by Excel. When this occurs itmay be necessary to convert the field value to a date format.

Below are samples of date fields in other formats (C = century, YY = year, MM = month, DD = day):Excel Integer Date - converts date into an integer (i.e. 2/5/2013 converts to 41310)YYDDD - Julian date format used by InfiniumCYYDDD - Julian date format used by JDEYYYYDDD - Julian date format used by Jack HenryYYMMDD - date format used by BPCS

Note: Date formats are not exclusive to the ledgers listed above.

Query Designer provides a Date Conversion option on the Builder panel to convert these formats into true date formats.

Example - Converting a JDE Julian Date to a True Date Calculated Field:Convert the AP invoice date field (RPDIVJ), a Julian date field in JDE, to a true date calculated field. In this scenario,the host system is an iSeries (AS/400).



3. From the Field Listings panel, select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example).

4. On the iSeries tab, click the down arrow for the Date Conversion field and select the value CYYDDD. Theconversion expression appears in the work area on the Builder panel.

Query Designer 306



6. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel select the field, right click and selectAlias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field(Invoice Date in this example) and click OK.

7. Sample query results.

Note: OLEDB iSeries connections display dates in the format YYYY-MM-DD, where as ODBC connections displaydates as MM/DD/YYYY.


9.8.3.3 Use the CASE Builder

The Builder provides a tool to aid in constructing CASE statements. CASE statements may be used as calculatedfields or as selection criteria.

Note: For SAP connections only, CASE statements are not applicable.

Example - Build a CASE Statement:Look for null (or zero) AP invoice dates (RPDIVJ) and replace them with a predefined date to prevent errors, and thenconvert the remaining dates, to a true date calculated field.

1. On the Builder panel iSeries tab, click the CASE Builder button. The Case Builder panel appears.

2. In the WHEN field, enter the desired value -orclick the Builder button adjacent to the WHEN field to select a fieldfrom a table (the Builder button is being used in this example).

Query Designer 308


3. In this example a single field is being selected from a source table (see Select Fields from a Table). On the Builderpanel:

Click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables.Select the desired source table (F0411 in this example).Select (double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example). The selected value <lib.file.field> appears in thework area on the Builder panel.

4. Click OK on the Builder panel. The expression (&lib.F0411.RPDIVJ in this example) is pushed to WHEN field onthe CASE Builder panel.

5. On the CASE Builder panel, use the drop down list to select the appropriate expression operator (equal (=) in thisexample). A new field appears to the right of the Expression Operator field.


6. In the new field, enter the desired value -orclick the Builder button adjacent to the new field to select a field from atable (zero (0) has been keyed in this example).

7. In the THEN field, enter the desired value -orclick the Builder button adjacent to the THEN field to select a fieldfrom a table (DATE('01/01/1900') has been keyed in this example).

8. Click the ADD Expression button. This starts the CASE statement in the CASE Builder work area.

9. If additional WHEN expressions are required, then edit the WHEN and THEN fields as necessary. When therevised expression is complete, click the ADD Expression button again. The revised expression is added to thecurrent CASE statement in the work area. Repeat this process for as many fields as necessary for the CASEstatement.

10. In the ELSE field, enter the desired value -orclick the Builder button adjacent to the ELSE field to select a field

from a table (the Builder button is being used in this example).

11. In this example a Julian date is being selected and converted to a true date field (see Create Date Fields). On theBuilder panel:

Click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables.Select the desired source table (F0411 in this example).Select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example).On the iSeries tab, click the down arrow for the Date Conversion field and select the value CCYYDDD. Theconversion expression appears in the work area on the Builder panel.

Query Designer 310


12. Click OK on the Builder panel. The expression is pushed to the ELSE field on the CASE Builder panel.

13. Click the ADD Else button. The else expression is added to the current CASE statement in the work area.


14. Click the Done button. The completed CASE statement appears the original Builder work area.


16. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel select the field, right click and selectAlias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the fieldand click OK.

Query Designer 312


9.8.3.4 GEXD Row

The Builder functional button, %GEXDROW%, is used to return the Excel row number for each row of data when theGEXD is generated in Excel. This function may be used to create a calculated field, and may remove the need of usingfill down columns in Excel.

Note: Prior to Spreadsheet Server V14R1M1, the expression %EXDROW% was used instead of %GEXDROW%. Thesystem continues to support the legacy %EXDROW% expression.

Example - Using GEXD Row Function to Create a Calculated Field:Use the GEXD Row function to create a calculated field which will calculate/report the amount paid by subtracting theopen invoice amount column from the gross invoice amount column in Excel.

Initial Set Up:1. Create a new query, retrieving gross invoice amount and open invoice amount (see below).

To Add a Calculated Field using the GEXD Row Function:1. On the Field List panel select the field, right click and Select Add a Calculated Field on the Field List popup menu.

The Builder panel appears.

2. In the work area on the Builder panel, enter the appropriate to build the expression. In this example the followinghas been entered:

Type ' (a single quote).From the operation buttons, click = (Equal).Type D (capital letter D).From the Misc tab, click %GEXDROW%.From the operation buttons, click - (Minus).Type E (capital letter E)From the Misc tab, click %GEXDROW%.Type ' (a single quote).



4. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel select the field, right click and selectAlias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field(Amount Paid) and click OK.

5. From the Ribbon, select Home>Save Query.

6. From the Ribbon, select Home>Single Record to execute the query. The ResultsContainer panel appearsdisplaying one record.

7. In Excel create a GEXD formula with the following values (see Create and Use GEXD formulas).Select the query name identified in step 5.Specify the target worksheet.Type the Starting Cell/Range/Table.Select to Include Headings.Specify the cell reference for the Smart Parm.

8. Select the cell containing the GEXD formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>Selected DetailReport (GEXD Formula) -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GEXD). The %GEXDROW% creates a calculation, subtracting column E from column D, for all rows included in the generateddata output. This functions similar to the GEXD fill down columns feature.

Query Designer 314


9.8.3.5 Get Values

The Builder provides a Get Values button to display a list of the existing field values for a selected field. From the list,values may be selected and used as arguments/criteria in a variety of Builder functions. The Limit Get Values to nnnRecords option in QD settings determines the maximum number of values retrieved.

Example - Using Get Values in an IN( ) Statement:Add selection criteria to only retrieve records where Line Number (RPLNID) equals 10000, 11000 or 13000.

1. On Field List panel for the desired field (RPLNID in this example), click the ellipse button located in one of theseven criteria fields. The Builder panel appears.



4. From the Field Listings panel, select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPLNID in this example).

5. Click the Get Values button. The system displays a list of existing field values for the selected field.


6. Select the desired field value(s):To select a single value -- select the value. To select multiple values -- press and hold the Ctrl key as values are selected on the list.To select values in a range -- select the first value in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the lastvalue in the range.

Note: Double click ing a value in the list pushes the value directly to the Builder expression work area. Single clickthe value when an additional function is to be applied to the value before pushing it into the work area.

7. Select the desired function button. In this example the selected values (10000, 11000 and 13000) are beinginserted into an IN( ) statement, so the IN ('x','x') button is clicked. The IN statement using the selected valuesappears in the work area on the Builder panel.

Note: The IN ('x','x') button causes all arguments to be entered as text values (in single quotes). If the field isnumeric, then manually remove the quote marks.

8. When the expression is complete, click OK.

Query Designer 316


9.9 Add Criteria

9.9.1 Hard Coded Criteria

Field selection criteria may be hard coded. These hard coded values may not be altered at query run time (i.e. inExcel). Hard coded criteria may be entered directly on the Field List panel or via the Builder panel. Example of hardcoded criteria would be "Open Amount <> 0" or "Status = Active".

To Enter Hard Coded Criteria via the Field List Panel:1. On the Field List panel, click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field and manually key the

selection criteria (<>) in this example).

To Enter Hard Coded Criteria via the Builder Panel:1. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the

desired field. The Builder panel appears.

2. On the Builder panel, selection criteria may be keyed directly in the work area or by using the appropriate operationor functional buttons to develop the expression.

3. When the expression is complete, click OK.


9.9.2 Create and Use Parameters

9.9.2.1 Parameters in Query Designer vs Excel

Parameters are added to a query as a place-holder for when selection criteria is to be specified in Excel. A defaultparameter value may be defined in the query for testing purposes, and then the actual criteria is specified in Excel atthe time the formula is executed.

Query DesignerWhen a query is created or modified, it is normal to execute the query in Query Designer to test the results. Whentesting a query parameter values are specified in the Query Parameters Panel.

ExcelQuery Designer queries are executed from Excel via formulas (GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS, GEXI). Each of these formulashave arguments where parameter values may be specified. These values may be hard-coded in the formula definition;however, it is recommended to use cell references.

Query Designer 318


9.9.2.2 Standard Parameters in the Query Designer

Standard Parameters allow the user full control over how the system interprets a parameter. When using standardparameters the query writer must know various SQL rules for working with text fields, numeric values, lists and rangesof values.

Note: Standard Parameters differ from Smart Parms. Smart Parms simplify query writing by using standard rules forprocessing parameters (see Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules and Smart Parms in the Query Designer).

To Create a Parameter:

1. On the Query Parameters panel, click the Add button ( ). The Add a Parameter panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Add a Parameter panel.

Field Description

Parameter Description Specify a unique description for the parameter.

Test Value Specify the default value to be used for the parameter.

Sub Query Column If required, click the ellipse button ( ) to access the Select Sub QueryColumn panel for selecting the column name to be used for matching todrill down panel column names when determining whether the query is avalid sub query for the associated drill down.

Assign Query If required, click the down arrow and select the query to be used for listingvalid values for the parameter on the Build a Template panel.

3. Click Save. The new parameter appears on the Query Parameters panel.


To Insert a Parameter into a Criteria Field:1. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the

desired field. The Builder panel appears.

2. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Parameters. The system expands thelist of available parameters.

3. From the expanded parameter list, select the parameter to be used.

4. Double click <value as (number or string)>. The parameter, &PARM01, appears in the work area on the Builderpanel.

5. Enter any comparison operators and other characters as necessary to complete the criteria expression (i.e.=&PARM01).

6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears with the parameter inserted in the selected criteria field.

Query Designer 320


9.9.2.2.1 Use Parameter to Supply Database/Library Name

By creating a standard parameter and assigning the parameter as the database/library, the user may create a singlequery and connection, but process the query for multiple databases/libraries. This feature only applies to queries usingan iSeries or SQL Server connection type.

To Use a Parameter to Supply the Database/Library Name:1. In Query Designer, create a query and select the desired table(s).

2. On the Query Parameters panel, click the Add button ( ) or from the QD Ribbon, select Home>Add Parameter. The Add a Parameter panel appears.

3. In the Parameter Description field key the value, &PARM01, and if desired in the Test Value field key a defaultdatabase/library to be used for processing, then click OK. The new parameter appears on the Query Parameterspanel.

Note: This new parameter must be first in the parameter list (i.e. ID = 1).

4. On the Query View panel, right click on the header section of the desired table. The Table popup menu appears.

5. Select Change Database/Library. The Select Library panel appears.

6. Select &PARM01 from the list of databases/libraries and click Select. The system displays &PARM01 in the tableheader section.

7. When executing the query in Query Designer or Excel, change the %PARM01 parameter value to the desireddatabase/library to be used for processing the query.


9.9.2.3 Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules

When using standard parameters the query writer must know various SQL rules for working with text fields, numericvalues, lists and ranges of values. Smart Parms simplify query writing by using standard rules for processingparameters. The rules used by Smart Parms are similar to those used in Global's Spreadsheet Server products forspecifying segment values.

Below is a comparison by example of SQL (iSeries DB2) rules for specifying criteria values used by standardparameters versus Smart Parms.

Criteria Type Standard Parameters Smart Parms

Single Value - Text ='ABC' ABC

Single Value - Numeric =123 123

Single Value - Date =DATE('01/01/2007') 1/1/2007

Mask (wildcard) LIKE 'A%' A*

Mask (wildcard) for All Values LIKE '%' * or a blank

Mask (wildcard) for a Single Value LIKE '_500' *500

Range - Text (see Note) BETWEEN 'ABC' AND 'DEF' ABC.DEF

Range - Numeric BETWEEN 123 AND 456 123.456

Range - Date BETWEEN DATE('01/01/2007')AND DATE('03/31/2007')

1/1/2007.3/31/2007

Value List - Text (see Note) IN('A','B','C') [A,B,C]

Value List - Numeric IN(1,2,3) [1,2,3]

Value List with Exclude (see Note) N/A [AAA.CCC,/BBB]Note: May not exclude a segment list

Field is Blank N/A BLANK

Field is Not Blank N/A NOTBLANK

Greater Than or Equal To >=1000 1000.99999999

Less Than or Equal To <=1000 -99999999.1000

Logical NOT (using alphabet asdataset)

NOT IN('A','B','C') [D.Z]

Segment List N/A ^Country

@ Field (see Note) N/A @alias:value -or- @fieldname:value-or- @table.fieldname:value(i.e. @Company:001)Note: Alias as defined in the Configurator

Note: The range delimiter, list separator and exclusion characters may be defined in the user's SS Settings.

An @ Field allows for using different fields in the file as criteria for retrieving data without having to change the query.

With Smart Parms no comparison operators are used (=,<>,<,>,BETWEEN, LIKE, NOT).

The Smart Parm routine actually converts the expression to one that uses SQL rules.

Note: Generally only a single value may be entered for Method Parameters. Some exceptions exist for variousparameters for specific methods. Contact Global Software for more information.

mailto:@table.fieldname:value

Query Designer 322


9.9.2.4 Smart Parms in the Query Designer

Smart Parms may be added to a field directly on the Field List panel or via the Builder panel.

Note: Prior to adding a Smart Parm to a field an alias name must be assigned to the field (see Assign Aliases toFields).

To Add Smart Parms via the Field List Panel:1. On the Field List panel, select the desired field, right click and select Add Smart Parm for This Field. A parameter

for the field is added to the Query Parameters panel with a blank value, and the Smart Parm (&SPARM01) isinserted into the Criteria 1 field.

To Add Smart Parms via the Builder Panel:Note: This method must be used to add Smart Parms in other Criteria fields besides Criteria 1.

1. If the parameter doesn't already exist, create it (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer).

2. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click in one of the seven Criteria fields for the desiredfield. The Builder panel appears.

3. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Parameters. The system expands thelist of available parameters.

4. From the expanded parameter list, select the parameter to be used.

5. Double click <value as smart parm>. The Smart Parm appears in the work area on the Builder panel. No othersupporting characters (i.e. =, <, >) are required.

6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears with the Smart Parm inserted in the selected criteria field.


To Delete Smart Parms:Note: If multiple Smart Parms exist for a query, only the last (highest number) Smart Parm in the list may be deleted.

Example: Have Smart Parms 1, 2 and 3. Smart Parm 3 may be deleted; however, Smart Parm 2 may not bedeleted unless Smart Parm 3 is first deleted.

1. In the Query Parameters panel, select the highest number Smart Parm and click Del. The system displays aconfirmation panel. Click OK. The system removes the Smart Parm from the Query Parameters panel.

2. On the Field List panel, click the associated Smart Parm criteria field value. The Builder panel appears. Deletethe Smart Parm field value. Click OK. The system removes the criteria field value from the Field List.

3. Repeat the steps above to delete additional Smart Parms.

Query Designer 324


9.9.2.5 Parameters in Excel

Parameters are used in Excel in conjunction with query formulas to provide criteria for the query being executed.

To Use Parameters in Excel:1. Prior to using a new or modified query, in Excel from the SS Ribbon select Refresh or Refresh>Queries. The

system refreshes query data.

2. Layout the Excel report and assign cell references for each parameter.

3. Select the cell where the query formula is to reside, then from the SS Ribbon select Formula Assistant. TheFormula Assistant panel appears.

4. Select the appropriate formula on the Formulas fly out window, assign values to the arguments, including the cellpositions of the parameters.

5. Click the Insert button to save the formula into the cell.

6. To change the query criteria value, enter the new value in the cell designated and re-run the query.


9.9.3 Sub Query Column

On drill down panels in Query Designer and Spreadsheet Server, a Sub Queries option exists allowing the user to drilldown from the current drill down panel to a user-defined query. The Sub Queries submenu contains a list of all theEDQ files that have column names in the Sub Query Column parameter field matching column names on the originaldrill down panel.

Note: All Sub Query Columns defined in the detail query must be present on the original drill down panel for query to beavailable on the Sub Queries menu.

To Create Sub Query:1. Create the related detail query(ies) (AR Customer Master Data.edq and AR Customer Sales Summary.edq in this

example) to be associated with the GXL balance or journals drill down, or initial query (AR Sales Summary.edq inthis example).

2. For each related detail query on the Query Parameters panel, click the ellipse button in the Sub Query Column forthe appropriate parameter. The Select Sub Query Column panel appears.

3. Select the folder or subdirectory for which to list queries (EDQ files). The system lists the appropriate queries.

4. Select the query for which to list available column names. The system adds the column names from the selectedquery to the list of available standard column names.

Standard columns, %SS_KEY1%, %SS_KEY2%, %SS_KEY3%, %SS_YEAR%, %SS_FORMAT%, %SS_PERIOD%, %SS_FROMPERIOD%, and %SS_TOPERIOD%, are used for data passed to a sub querywhen executed from a GXL balance or journals drill down. The values for these columns are the values from theoriginal GXL formula, thus mak ing is possible to design an EDQ as the journals sub query drill down. Standard columns, %SPARM01% through %SPARM15%, are used for data passed to a sub query whenexecuted from a query (i.e. GEXQ, GEXD) drill down. The values for these columns are the values from theoriginal formula’s parameters.

5. Manually enter -or- double click the column name to be referenced. The selected column name is inserted into theSub Query Column to Insert field.

Query Designer 326


6. Click Insert. The selected Sub Query Column to Insert value is inserted into the Sub Query Column field on theQuery Parameters panel.

7. Later when executing a query in Query Designer -or- when drilling down on a query, GXL balance or journals drilldown in Excel, select the desired row, right click and then from the Sub Query sub menu select the appropriatedetail query for which to view results. The system displays the data for the selected detail query.


9.9.4 Assign Query

A query may be created for listing valid values for another query parameter on the Build a Template panel in Excel.

1. Create a reporting query (ex. Northwind Orders.edq) and a "lookup" query (ex. Northwind Country Lookup.edq).

2. In the reporting query on the Query Parameters panel, click the Assign Query down arrow for the appropriateparameter and select the desired "lookup" query. Save the parameter, and save query changes.

3. In Excel on the Build a Template panel when the reporting query is selected, an ellipse button appears for theparameter (ex. Country). Click the ellipse button to execute the "lookup" query.

Query Designer 328


9.9.5 GEXD Limit

Query Designer allows the user to assign the number of records to be returned in Excel when a GEXD formula isgenerated. In addition, the GEXD limit may also be assigned as a query parameter, allowing the user the ability tomodify the desired number of records as necessary.

To Assign a GEXD Limit:1. From the QD Ribbon select Home, and then in the GEXD Limit field specify the maximum number of records to be

output in Excel for the query.

Value of "0" indicates no limit to GEXD records returned in Excel.Positive integer indicates the number of records to be returned by the GEXD formula in Excel.

To Assign GEXD Limit as a Parameter:1. On the Query Parameters panel, click the Add button. The Add a Parameter panel appears.

2. On the Add a Parameter panel, enter a description (i.e. GEXDLimit) and a default value for the number of records tobe returned when processing the GEXD, and then click Save. The new parameter is added to the QueryParameters panel.

3. From the QD Ribbon select Home, and then in the GEXD Limit field enter '&SPARMxx' (where xx equals the IDnumber assigned to the GEXD limit parameter created in the previous step), and then click Save.

4. When the query is used in Excel, the parameter created above appears allowing the user to specify the desirednumber of records to be returned when the query is generated.


9.10 Create a Totals (Group By) Query

When a query is created, by default it is a detail query (i.e. one in which each record is displayed in the output). Thequery may be modified to become a totals (or group by) query, such that only summarized records are displayed.

To Create a Totals Query:1. On the Field List panel, select the field, right click and select Totals (Group By) on the Field List popup menu. The

Totals column appears in on the Field List panel displaying the value "Group By" for each field except calculatedfields (which have no default).

2. For each field in the list, click the down arrow and select the proper Totals value (see table below) based upon theplanned output for the query.

Totals Value Description

Group By Displays each distinct value once per break point.

Sum Sums the field for each record at the break point.

Avg Averages the field at each break point.

Min Displays the minimum value for the field at each break point.

Max Displays the maximum value for the field at each break point.

Count Counts the records for the field at each break point.

StDev Displays the standard deviation for the field at each break point.

Var Displays the variance for the field at each break point.

First Displays the first value for the field.

Last Displays the last value for the field.

Expression Does not assign a Group By value, but is used for calculated fields where the Group Byvalue has already been assigned in the definition of the field.

Where For "Visible" fields, use when criteria will be applied to the grouped field. This isexpressed in the SQL code as a HAVING statement. For fields that are not "Visible", use when criteria will be applied at a detail record level. This is expressed in the SQL code as a WHERE statement.

Query Designer 330


Contrast of Detail Output to Totaled Output:

Example 1 - Detail Output (each output record visible):

Example 2 - Totaled Output (one output record per vendor):


9.11 Create the GEXQ Field

A GEXQ (summary) field is used to summarize (i.e. total, count, average) a selected numeric field. In Excel a GEXQformula is then used to return a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of a query into a spreadsheet. A usermay then drill down upon the summary value to see detailed results (see GEXQ Formulas).

To Designate a Field as an GEXQ Summary Field:1. On the Field List panel, select the desired field, right click and select GEXQ (Summary) Field. The Summary Type

panel appears.

2. On the Summary Type panel, select the desired summary type.

Note: If a field is an expression that already contains a summary type (e.g. SUM(RPAAP)), then select theSummary Type as Embedded to avoid syntax like Sum(Sum(....)).

3. Click the Save button. The resulting field will be designated with a symbol in the Field List panel.

4. Defining a field as the GEXQ summary field also creates SQL code that is executed when the GEXQ is run fromExcel. This code is displayed on the SQL Text panel on the GEXQ tab.

Query Designer 332


9.12 SQL SHELL Function

The SHELL function creates a dynamic cross application functionality with Query Designer. Using the text SHELLwithin the SQL Text panel followed by an external program or file name, adds versatility to the SQL statement bylaunching the external program and/or opening the file or image providing access to additional data. This functionallows the user to process anything which could be processed in the RUN command in Windows. The SHELLstatement may be used as part of a query detail drill down.

Example - SHELL Statement Used to Access a Vendor Voucher in a Word Document:In this example, the query has two parameters, Vendor # and Voucher #, and the Amount Gross field is an GEXQsummary field.

1. In the SQL Text panel, change to manual entry mode):De-select the Auto Generate check box.Click No to not copy the auto-generated SQL text.

2. Within the SQL Text panel, key the text SHELL, press Enter, and key the additional text required to run thecommand or launch the external program. In this example C:\PO\&PARM02.docx has been keyed, indicating:

C:\PO\ -- The network directory location of the target file.&PARM02 -- The Voucher # parameter defined in Query Designer and used in Excel cell reference..docx -- The file extension of the target file.

3. From the QD Ribbon, select Home>Save Query.

4. In Excel, add the GEXQ formula. Use cell references for the parameters.

5. To execute the SHELL statement, select the cell containing the GEXQ formula, then from the SS Ribbon selectDrill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The SHELL statement is executed (opens theMicrosoft® Word document C:\PO\12324.docx in this example).


9.13 Execute Query

Once all fields have been selected and added to the Field List panel, it is suggested to run a quick test to verify thequery setup.

To Execute a Single Query:1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Home and then select the appropriate Execute Query function. The

ResultsContainer panel appears displaying query results based upon the option selected.

Note: A similar panel is also displayed when a drill down is performed on a GEXQ or GEXI formula in Excel.

Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.

To Execute Multiple Queries:1. In Query Designer open the first query, then from the QD Ribbon select Home and then select the appropriate

Execute Query function. The ResultsContainer panel appears displaying query results based upon the optionselected.

2. Leave the ResultsContainer panel open, but close the query.

3. Open the second query, then from the QD Ribbon select Home and then select the appropriate Execute Queryfunction. A new tab appears in the open ResultsContainer panel displaying query results based upon the optionselected.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary.

Query Designer 334


9.14 Legacy Ad Hoc Queries

Prior to Spreadsheet Server V14R1M1, users had the ability to create ad hoc queries in Query Designer which enabledthe user to drill down from the results view of a query to detail data associated with another query. As of V14R1M1,this feature is being replaced with the sub query processing (see Sub Query Column). The Legacy Ad Hoc Queriesfunction displays preexisting ad hoc queries, allowing the user to determine which current queries need to be modified(assigned Sub Query Column criteria). Contact Global for assistance in updating existing queries to utilize sub queryprocessing.

To Access Legacy Ad Hoc Queries:1. Close all queries.

2. From the QD Ribbon, select View>Legacy Ad Hoc Queries. The Legacy Ad Hoc Queries panel appears.


9.15 Query Management

Once a query has been created, various functions are available to maintain, clone, delete or lock/unlock a query.

To Modify a Query Description:1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Change Description. The Description

panel appears. 2. On the Description panel, key the desired description.3. Click OK.

To Clone a Query:1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Clone Query -orselect Clone from the

File System tab on the QD Ribbon. The Clone Query panel appears. 2. On the Clone Query panel, enter a query name for the clone.3. Click OK. The new query appears in the list of available queries.

To Delete a Query:1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Clone Query -orselect Delete from the

File System tab on the QD Ribbon. The Delete File panel appears. 2. Click Yes. The query is removed from the list of available queries.

To Lock a Query:1. Open the desired query. 2. From the QD Ribbon select Home>Un-Locked. The Lock Query panel appears. 3. Click Yes. The Password Protection panel appears. 4. On the Password Protection panel, enter the password to be used to protect the query.5. Click OK. A confirmation panel appears, confirming that the query is locked.

To Unlock a Query:1. Open the desired query. 2. From the QD Ribbon select Home>Locked. The Unlock panel appears. 3. Click Yes. The Password Protection panel appears. 4. On the Password Protection panel, enter the password previously assigned to lock the query.5. Click OK. A confirmation panel appears, confirming that the lock has been removed for the query.

Query Designer 336


9.15.1 Download or Send Query Exchange Queries

Query Exchange is an online depository of queries. Query Designer allows the user to access the online querydepository, download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. In addition, a QueryDesigner user may send an existing query from Query Designer to Query Exchange. A user's ability to access QueryExchange is determined by a user setting in the Configurator.

Note: Must be connected to the internet to have access to the Query Exchange component.

To Download a Query from Query Exchange:1. From within Query Designer:

In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Home>Search Online. Query Exchange opens.

From within Excel:In Excel, access either the Build a Template or Formula Assistant panel and select the appropriate GEXQ,GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula or tab.

Click the Search Online button ( ). Query Exchange opens.

2. Continue with step 2 in the Download Queries from Query Exchange section.

To Send a Query to Query Exchange:1. In Query Designer, open the desired query to be sent.

2. From the QD Ribbon, select Home>Send to Query Exchange. The query is sent to Query Exchange. Globalreviews all queries prior to promoting them to Query Exchange.

Note: If a description does not exist for the selected query, a prompt panel appears requiring the user to enter a query description.


9.15.2 Textual Query Definition

Use the Textual Query Definition function is as a convenient way to document queries.

1. Open the query.

2. From the QD Ribbon, select Home>Definition. Windows Notepad opens displaying the query definition.

Sample Textual Query Definition:

Query Name: AP Open InvoicesQuery File Name: P:\E-Dash\GSI Queries\AP Open Invoices.edq

Tables/Files in query:

Table: F0411 (ACCOUNTS PAYABLE LEDGER)

Table: F0101 (ADDRESS BOOK MASTER)

Relationships:

Inner Join F0411. RPAN8 = F0101. ABAN8

Selected Fields:

F0411 . RPAN8 Alias: "Vendor #" Sort= Ascending Visible=TrueF0101 . ABALPH Alias: "Vendor Name" Sort= (none) Visible=TrueF0411 . RPDOC Alias: "Voucher #" Sort= (none) Visible=TrueF0411 . RPAG Alias: "AmountGross" Sort= (none) Visible=TrueF0411 . RPAAP Alias: "AmountOpen" Sort= (none) Visible=True

Calculated Field: "AmountRemaining"&lib.F0411.RPAG/100 - &lib.F0411.RPAAP/100 Alias: "AmountRemaining" Sort= none)

Visible=True

Calculated Field: "Invoice Date"CASE WHEN &lib.F0411.RPDIVJ = 0 THEN DATE('01/01/1900') ELSE DATE(DIGITS( DECIMAL( &lib.F0411.RPDIVJ + 1900000,7,0)) ) END Alias: "Invoice Date" Sort= (none) Visible=True

F0411 . RPDIVJ Alias: "Invoice Date Julian" Sort= (none) Visible=False

Parameters Description ValuePARM01 Vendor # 459

Criteria:

F0411 . RPAN8 &SPARM01

F0411 . RPAAP <>0

F0411 . RPDIVJ <>0

Query Designer 338


Summarize (GEXQ): RPAAP

Detail SQL (AUTO): SELECT &lib.F0411.RPAN8 AS "Vendor #", &lib.F0101.ABALPH AS "Vendor Name",&lib.F0411.RPDOC AS "Voucher #", &lib.F0411.RPAG/100 AS "AmountGross",&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100 AS "AmountOpen", &lib.F0411.RPAG/100 - &lib.F0411.RPAAP/100 AS"AmountRemaining", CASE WHEN &lib.F0411.RPDIVJ = 0 THEN DATE('01/01/1900') ELSE DATE(DIGITS( DECIMAL( &lib.F0411.RPDIVJ + 1900000,7,0)) ) END AS "Invoice Date"FROM ((&lib.F0411 INNER JOIN &lib.F0101 ON (&lib.F0411.RPAN8=&lib.F0101.ABAN8)))WHERE (((&lib.F0411.RPAN8) &SPARM01 ) AND ((&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100)<>0) AND((&lib.F0411.RPDIVJ)<>0) ) ORDER BY "Vendor #"GEXQ SQL (AUTO): SELECT SUM(&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100) as GEXQFROM ((&lib.F0411 INNER JOIN &lib.F0101 ON (&lib.F0411.RPAN8=&lib.F0101.ABAN8)))WHERE (((&lib.F0411.RPAN8) &SPARM01 ) AND ((&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100)<>0) AND((&lib.F0411.RPDIVJ)<>0) )


9.16 QD View Log

During all processing, various logging information is recorded. If the QD Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected,then the system records additional error message logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or emailed.

1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select View>View Log File. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying thelevel, date, time and description for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displaysa count of the number of entries listed.

Nav Tip:This panel may also be accessed by selecting the View Log button on the QD Settings panel.

2. See SS View Log for additional information regarding the View Log function.

Distribution Manager 340


10 Distribution Manager

10.1 DM Navigation

Distribution Manager (DM) uses the following navigation methods for processing functions within Excel. Each functionis not always available from each method.

Spreadsheet Server Ribbon (see DM Ribbon)Distribution Manager Right Click Context Menu (see DM Right Click Context Menu)

NAVIGATION TIPS:Throughout the manual navigation tips, noted by the convention "NAV TIP", will be listed indicating the various pathsavailable to access a function.


10.1.1 DM Ribbon

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon isadded in Excel. Use the options in the Distribution Manager (DM) group of the SS ribbon to access/process functionsin the application.


Distribute Distributes all specifications within the workbook. Click the arrow to accessadditional functions (see Distribute Specifications).

All Distributes all specifications within the workbook.

Selected Distributes only selected specifications.

Clone Sheet Creates a copy of the current worksheet, leaving all formulas intact.

Clone Sheet as Values Creates a copy of the current worksheet, converting all formulas to values.

New Control Sheet Creates a new distribution control worksheet (see Create a Distribution ControlWorksheet).

Maintain Specs Opens the Maintain Specifications panel, allowing the user to create and/ormaintain distribution criteria (see Add Specification Rows and MaintainSpecification Rows).

Settings Opens the Distribution Manager Settings panel, allowing the user to definevarious criteria to control processing, and to access the Log Viewer panelwhere the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected logentries, email or clear the log file (see DM Settings and DM View Log).



10.1.2 DM Right Click Context Menu

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a Distribution Manager (DM) right click contextmenu is added in the Cell menu for the Normal and Page Layout views in Excel. Use the DM right click context menuto access/process various functions within the application.


Maintain Specs Opens the Maintain Specifications panel, allowing the user to create and/ormaintain distribution criteria (see Add Specification Rows and MaintainSpecification Rows).

Distribute Selected Distributes only selected specifications (see Distribute Specifications).


10.2 DM Settings

Spreadsheet Server (SS) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing.

1. In Excel from the DM Ribbon, select Settings. The Distribution Manager Settings - General panel appears.


Field Description

General Options:

Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, oncean error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and de-select the option (see DM View Log).

Always Save Workbook Priorto Distribution

If selected, all workbook changes are automatically saved prior todistribution.

Consolidate Emails If selected, multiple specification rows for a recipient in a distribution runare combined into a single email with multiple attachments (one for eachspecification row). Otherwise, one email is issued per specification row.



Field Description

Include Members When Onlythe Master is Selected

If selected and only the group master specification row is selected fordistribution, the system distributes the master and all member rows (as ifthe master and all member rows were individually selected). Otherwise,only selected specification rows are distributed.

Right Justify Text Fields If selected, all text fields are right justified.

Enable Distributor Addin forWord

If selected, the system enables the Distributor add-in in Word. TheDistributor add-in must be enabled in order to process Narrative Reportingvia Distribution Manager.Note: The Distributor add-in may also be manually enabled and/ordisabled via Word.

PDF Creation: Specify when distributing to PDF whether to use the default Gobal providedcomponent, the Excel Save As PDF component, or a specific printer toconvert objects to PDF. When the PDF Printer option is selected, thenkey the path or use the Browse button to select the printer to be used toconvert objects to PDF. If blank, the system uses the Adobe PDF printer(if it exists), else it uses the default printer. Note: When using Adobe, the Adobe Distiller product is required toconvert a document to a PDF file. The Distiller is not available for thoseusers with only the Adobe Reader installed. Note: For Excel 2007 users, the 2007 Microsoft Office Add-In MicrosoftSave as PDF or XPS must be downloaded to the user's PC to utilize theExcel Save As PDF option.

Convert Formulas to ValuesDefault:

Specify the option to default for the Convert Formulas to Value field whenadding a new distribution specification row.

Button Function

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and errorlog entries, copy selected log entries, email or clear the log file (see DMView Log).


3. Use the table to enter data on the Email panel.

Field Description

Email Options:

Email Server Specify the email server to be used for email distributions. When SMTP isselected, additional setting options become available for input. Note: For Excel 2007 users, Collaboration Data Objects (CDO) must beinstalled for the Microsoft Outlook Exchange option to be available. Whenapplicable, a link is available to install the component.Note: For Excel 2010 (or above) users, Distributor Outlook Add-In mustbe installed for the Microsoft Outlook Exchange option to be available. When applicable, a link is available to install the component with theability to Run as Administrator if necessary. Note: When using SMTP certain mail configurations may prevent thetransmission of messages. Contact your IT department for assistance.

HTML Email When using email server options Outlook 2010 (or above) or SMTP, ifselected HTML email editor is used for the email body contents. Otherwise, plain text editor is utilized.

Cache Address Book For Excel 2010 (or above) users using email server options Outlook orSMTP, if selected the address book is cached to prevent long waits whenloading the address book. Note: When cached lists exist and the user deselects the option, a promptappears ask ing if the lists should be deleted.



Field Description

SMTP Options: When the SMTP email server option is selected the following options areavailable for input:

SMTP Mail Server Specify the SMTP mail server to be used for email distributions.

SMTP Sent "From" Address Specify the "from" email address to be assigned to email distributions.

SMTP Advanced Options(Optional):

When the SMTP email server option is selected, if necessary, specifyoptional settings for the authentication account name and password, theSMTP port number, and SSL (secured socket layer) support.




10.3 Create a Distribution Control Worksheet

The columns on a distribution control worksheet are predefined by Global and should not be changed. However, therows defined on a distribution control worksheet will depend upon an organization's reporting requirements.

Note: The examples in this documentation are meant only to demonstrate the capabilities of the product.

1. In Excel from the DM Ribbon, select Create New Distribution Control Worksheet. The Create a New DistributionControl Worksheet panel appears.

2. Enter the New Worksheet name, and click Create. The Maintain Specifications panel appears.



3. Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - General tab.

Field Description

Destination:

Type Click the down arrow and select the destination type for the distribution. Validtypes are Email, File Save, Group (member specification row that distributesonly to the group master), and Print.Note: When printing the system prints to the user's default printer.

Name Specify the name to be assigned to the distribution. The name must be uniquefor each specification row. If left blank, the current workbook name is used. Ifleft blank on multiple specification rows, the current workbook name and anappended sequence number is used. This option does not apply whenDestination Type = Group.

File Type Click the down arrow and select the file type for the distribution. Valid typesare Excel, Excel (xlsx), Excel (xlsm), Excel (xls), CSV, HTML, PDF, None (donot distribute any sheets from the workbook; only applies when Type = Email),and Word (distribute a Word document (see Narrative Reporting)). When thetype Excel is selected, the system assigns the current workbook type. Thisoption does not apply when Destination Type = Group.

Folder When Destination Type = File Save, key the path(s) or use the Browse buttonto specify the location where the document will be saved. Use a pipe (|) toseparate multiple locations. The full path or a short cut may be used (i.e. C:\Testing\Output|One|Two -- the two folders 'One' and 'Two' will be concatenatedwith the first path in the list). The destination location must be different thanthe source location.

Modify Cells: This section indicates the worksheet cells to receive designated values. To add cell parameters, click the down arrow and select the worksheet,enter the cell and value information, and then click the Add button. Theparameters are displayed in the window below.To modify cell parameters, select the line in the window, and make theappropriate change(s).To remove a cell parameter, select the line in the window, and click theRemove button.To clear all parameter lines, click the Clear button.

Example: For worksheet Income Statement, cell H4 will contain the value 5(reporting period), and cell H6 will contain the value 00060 (reporting company).


Field Description

Worksheet Specify the worksheet to receive the data.

Cell Specify the cell to receive the data.

Value Specify the value to be placed in the defined cell.

Specify Worksheets: This section indicates the worksheets and chart objects from the activeworkbook to be included in the distribution. If blank, then all worksheets in theworkbook will be distributed. When Destination File Type = HTML, at leastone worksheet must be specified.

To select a worksheet, click the down arrow and select the desiredworksheet, select whether or not to hide zero lines, and then click the Addbutton. The selected worksheet displays in the window below.To select all worksheets, select whether or not to hide zero lines, and thenclick the Add All button. All worksheets appear in the window below.To remove a worksheet, select the worksheet in the window, and click theRemove button.To remove all worksheets, click the Clear button.To control the order of worksheets in the distributed workbook, select theworksheet in the window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move theselected worksheet up or down in the list.

Example: The Income Statement and Expanded Report worksheets have beenselected, the target sheet names have been assigned and the hide zero linesoption has been selected for both worksheets.

Hide Zero Lines Default Specify the default value to be assigned when a worksheet is added to theselection. When no worksheets are selected, this option determines whetheror not to hide zero lines for all distributed worksheets.

Worksheet Specify the worksheet to be distributed.

Target Sheet Name Specify the name to be assigned to the distributed worksheet. The name maybe hard coded, a cell reference or merge data.Note: When using cell reference, syntax should begin with "=" (i.e."=Sheet2!A3"). The "=" is not required when using merge data syntax (see Merge Data).

Hide Zero Lines If selected, worksheet rows with zero values are hidden. This option onlyapplies to rows with Global formulas.

Protect Sheet If selected, the worksheet is protected during the distribution process.Note: The password to be used to unprotect the sheet is defined on theMaintain Specifications - Misc tab.



Field Description

Word Documents: When the Destination File Type = Word, this section replaces the SpecifyWorksheets section and indicates the Word documents to be included in thedistribution. At least one document or folder must be specified.

To select a document, click the Select File button, navigate to and selectthe desired document. The selected document displays in the window.To select all documents in a folder, click the Select Folder button, navigateto and select the desired folder. The selected folder displays in the window.To remove a document, select the document in the window, and click theRemove button.To remove all documents, click the Clear button.

See Narrative Reporting for more information.

Convert Formulas toValues:

Click the down arrow and specify which formulas, if any, should be convertedto values. Valid options are Global Only (all Spreadsheet Server andappropriate Budget Accelerator formulas), All Formulas (all formulas on theworksheet) and None (no conversion).Note: If a formula references another sheet for parameters and the parametersheet is not included in the distribution, then the formula will be converted to avalue regardless of the Convert Formulas to Values option selected.

Remove Non-DistributedSheets Prior to Processing

If selected, non-distributed worksheets are removed prior to distributing in orderto enhance performance time. When this option is selected, it is important tonote that sheets being distributed may not reference non-distributed sheets.

Recalculate Before Sending: Specify whether or not to recalculate the worksheet(s), or to clear andrecalculate PC cache before distributing.Note: If using DM to modify a cell, the worksheet is always recalculatedregardless of the Recalculate Before Sending option selected.

Generate GXEs If selected, all Spreadsheet Server GXE formulas are generated prior todistribution.

Generate GEXDs If selected, all Spreadsheet Server GEXD formulas are generated prior todistribution.

Zip Destination If selected, the workbook is zipped prior to distribution. This option does notapply when Destination Type = Group or Print.

SPECS Row Placement: This section indicates on which Excel row to place the specifications.

Replace Active Row If selected, specifications are pushed to the current active row on theDistribution Control sheet.

Insert After ActiveRow

If selected, specifications are inserted on a new row below the current activerow on the Distribution Control sheet.

Current SPECS Row Displays the row number of the specifications being displayed on the panel.

Active Row Displays the current active row on the Distribution Control worksheet.


4. Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Email tab.

Note: The Email tab is only available when Destination Type = Email.

Field Description

To Specify the email address(es) or when applicable click the To button to selectthe email address(es) to which to distribute the associated document. Multipleaddresses should be separated by a semicolon (;) or comma (,) depending onthe email server type. Note: The DM Settings' Consolidate Emails option controls whether a recipientincluded on multiple specification rows in a distribution run receives one emailwith multiple attachments or one email per specification row (see DM Settings).

Subject Specify the subject line for the email.

Body Specify the body text for the email. Generally a plain text editor is utilized;however, HTML editor offering various editing options (i.e. fonts, tables, insertpictures, etc.) may be available (see DM Settings).



5. Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Grouping tab.

Note: Grouping is used to combine multiple specification rows' specified worksheet(s) into a single workbook fordistribution purposes. Refer to the example given on the panel. This tab is not available when DestinationFile Type = Word.

Field Description

Group Master SPEC If selected, the specification row is a group master. When pushed to theDistribution Control worksheet, the value [GROUP SPEC #n] (where n is asystem generated number) is assigned in the SPEC Group Control column. Note: Multiple group masters may be defined per workbook.

Member of Group Click the down arrow and select the destination name of the group master towhich the specification row is a group member. When pushed to theDistribution Control worksheet, the system assigns the number associatedwith the group master in the SPEC Group Control column.


6. Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Misc tab.

Field Description

Protection Passwords:

Open Workbook/PDF / Protect Document

Specify the password, if necessary, required to open the distributed workbook,PDF or document.

Modify Workbook /Restrict Editing (ReadOnly)

Specify the password, if necessary, required to modify the distributedworkbook or document.

Protect Sheet Specify the password, if necessary, required to unprotect sheets in theworkbook which were protected during the distribution process.

Workbook Macros:

Beginning (Prior toProcessing)

Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed prior to distribution.

Middle (Default) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed during distribution.Note: Middle macros occur AFTER cell replacement, GXE and GEXDprocessing, and BEFORE merge fields, replacement of off sheet references,removal of undistributed sheets, hide zero lines, reorder sheets and renamesheets processing.

Ending (After Processing) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed after distribution.



Field Description

Additional Attachments: This section indicates additional documents to attach during the distributionprocess.

To select a document, click the Add button, then browse and select thedesired document.To remove an attachment, select the attachment in the window, and clickthe Remove button.To clear all attachments, click the Clear button.

Note: Attachments do not distribute when Destination Type = Print.

Attachment Displays the name and location of the item to be sent as an attachment to thedistribution.

Merge Document RangeName

Specify the range name from which to pull refreshed data elements into theassociated attachment (see Merge Data).

7. Once all data has been properly entered, use the table to select the appropriate row to be updated.

Field Description

SPECS Row Placement: This section indicates on which Excel row to place the specifications.

Replace Active Row If selected, specifications are pushed to the current active row on theDistribution Control sheet.

Insert After ActiveRow

If selected, specifications are inserted on a new row below the current activerow on the Distribution Control sheet.

Current SPECS Row Displays the row number of the specifications being displayed on the panel.

Active Row Displays the current active row on the Distribution Control worksheet.

8. Click the Push button to replace or insert the specifications on the Distribution Control worksheet.

9. Repeat steps 3 - 8 as necessary to create additional specification rows.

10. Click the Quit button. The Distribution Control worksheet appears.

11. Save the workbook.


10.4 Add Specification Rows

Additional specification rows may be added to an existing Distribution Control worksheet by creating a new row orcopying an existing row.

To Add a New Specification Row:1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select a blank row, then from the DM Ribbon select Maintain Specs -or-

right click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs. The Maintain Specifications panel appears.

2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section.

To Copy an Existing Row to Create a New Specification Row:1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired specification row to be copied, then from the DM Ribbon

select Maintain Specs -or- right click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs. The MaintainSpecifications panel appears.

2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To create a new specification row,ensure that the Insert After Active Row radio button is selected.

3. To copy an additional existing row to create a new row:On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the next specification row to be copied. On the Maintain Specifications panel, click the Retrieve SPECS From Current Excel Row button. Thespecifications from the current active row will default on the panel.Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To create a new specification row,ensure that the Insert After Active Row radio button is selected.



10.5 Maintain Specification Rows

Existing specification rows may be maintained by accessing the Maintain Specifications panel or by manually typingchanges on the Distribution Control worksheet.

To Maintain an Existing Row Via the Maintain Specifications Panel:1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired specification row to be maintained, then from the DM

Ribbon select Maintain Specs -or- right click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs. The MaintainSpecifications panel appears.

2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To maintain the existing specification

row, ensure that the Replace Active Row radio button is selected. 3. To maintain an additional existing row:

On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the next specification row to be maintained.On the Maintain Specifications panel, click the Retrieve SPECS From Current Excel Row button. Thespecifications from the current active row will default on the panel.Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To maintain the existingspecification row, ensure that the Replace Active Row radio button is selected.

To Maintain an Existing Row Manually:1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired cell to be modified, and click on the down arrow to

change data in the cell -or- type the desired information into the cell.

Note: To avoid errors, it is recommended to use the Maintain Specifications panel (see above) for mak ing changesinstead of typing the desired information into the cell.



10.6 Distribute Specifications

Distribution specifications for a workbook may be distributed all at the same time or individually selected specificationsmay be distributed at the same time.

Note:If the DM Settings option Always Save Prior to Distribution is not selected, it is imperative to save the workbookprior to distributing specifications.Outlook must be open prior to distributing emails via Outlook.

To Distribute All Specifications:1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet.

2. In Excel from the DM Ribbon, select Distribute All. During the distribution process, a panel briefly appearsdisplaying the various procedures being processed. This panel disappears when the distribution process iscomplete.

To Distribute Individual Specifications:1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet.

2. Select the desired specification row(s) to be distributed: To select a single specification -- select the desired specification row.To select multiple specifications -- press and hold the Ctrl key as specifications rows are selected. To select multiple specifications in a range -- select the first specification row in the range and drag the mouse toselect additional desired rows in the range.

3. After the desired specification row(s) are selected, from the DM Ribbon select Distribute>Distribute Selected -or-right click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected. During the distribution process, a panel brieflyappears displaying the various procedures being processed. This panel disappears when the distribution processis complete.

To Distribute Group Master and All Member Specifications Using Single Row Selection:1. Access the DM Settings panel, select the Include Members When Only Master Selected option and click OK.

2. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet.

3. Select the desired group master specification row to be distributed, then from the DM Ribbon selectDistribute>Distribute Selected -or- right click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected. The systemdistributes the group master and all member specification rows.

To Distribute Group Master and Selected Member Specifications:1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet.

2. Select the desired group master and member specification rows to be distributed, then from the DM Ribbon selectDistribute>Distribute Selected -or- right click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected. The systemdistributes the group master and selected member specification rows.



10.7 Miscellaneous DM Items

10.7.1 Merge Data

Distribution Manager allows the user to add merge fields (place holders for data) in various specification fields, and thenreplace the merge fields with values during the distribution process. In addition, these merge fields may be used toupdate associated fields within an attached document. See below for one example of how this feature may be set upand utilized.

Note: When using Microsoft Word 2013, in order for Distribution Manager to run the Word Merge, the Word option,Open e-mail attachments and other uneditable files in reading view, must not be selected.

Syntax: {'Sheet Name'!Cell Reference}

Setup 1: Define merge fields within the spreadsheet, and assign a range name.

Setup 2: Use Modify Cells to replace word merge data, and specify merge data in part of target sheet name. Ifdesired, specify merge data within the Destination Name and Target Sheet Name fields.


Setup 3: Specify merge data within the email To, Subject and Body fields.

Setup 4: Add an attachment and assign the range name from which to retrieve values.

Results: The system modifies cells and replaces text within the curly brackets { } with the actual values from the cells. In addition, the destination name is automatically added as a prefix to the distributed merge data attachment and thedata in the merge range is merged into the attachment.



10.7.2 Narrative Reporting

Distribution Manager allows for processing narrative reporting -- creating a Word document, populating it with data froman Excel workbook, and then distributing the Word document via Distribution Manager. Below is a general overview ofthe setup steps required for narrative reporting.

Note: Prior to creating the narrative reporting Word document, ensure Distributor is enabled as an add-in in Word. This may be done via DM Settings.

Setup 1: Create the Excel workbook from which to retrieve data.

Setup 2: Create the Word document and enter the appropriate replacement formulas, specifying what data is to bepopulated with data from the Excel Workbook. See Distributor Formula Assistant for detailed instructions.


Setup 3: In the Excel workbook, define a DMSPEC to distribute the Word document.

Results: The system replaces the formulas with data from the Excel workbook and distributes the Word document.



10.7.2.1 Distributor Ribbon

After Distributor is initiated as an add-in to Word, a custom Distributor ribbon is added in Word.


Formula Assistant Toggles to open or hide the Distributor formula assistant pane, allowing theuser to enter parameters for a formula.

Preview Previews the document with data retrieved from the selected workbooktemplate.

Browse Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate and select a workbooktemplate. Click the arrow to access additional functions.

Select WorkbookTemplate

Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate and select a workbooktemplate.

Open Workbook Template Opens the selected workbook template in Excel.

Remove Workbook Removes the selected workbook template from the document.

Select SPEC for Refresh Opens the Select SPEC panel, allowing the user to select a SPEC to be usedwhen previewing the document and refreshing the workbook template.

Remove SPEC Removes the selected SPEC to be used when refreshing the workbooktemplate.


10.7.2.2 Distributor Formula Assistant

The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating replacement formulas in a Word document.

Note: Prior to creating the narrative reporting Word document, ensure Distributor is enabled as an add-in in Word. This may be done via DM Settings.

1. In Word open the desired document. 2. From the Distributor Ribbon, select Formula Assistant. The Distributor pane appears.

3. Use the table to enter data on the Distributor pane.

Field Description

Workbook Object Type Click the down arrow and select the workbook object type to be retrieved by the formula. Valid types are Cell, Chart, Pivot and Range.

Object Value Specify the value from the workbook to be retrieved by the formula.Syntax: 'Sheet Name'!ABC (where ABC = cell reference, chart, pivot table orrange name)

Paste Method Click the down arrow and select the appropriate method for pasting the valueretrieved by the formula into the document. Valid methods are K - KeepSource Formatting, M - Merge Formatting, S - Use Destination Styles, T -Keep Text Only and U - Picture.

4. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons.Apply -- inserts the formula to the current location in the document.Copy -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard.Paste -- pastes the formula from the Windows clipboard to the current location in the document.



10.7.2.3 Preview Narrative Reporting Results

After the desired replacement formulas have been entered in the Word document, the distributed narrative reportingresults may be previewed. Results may be previewed using the current values in the associated workbook template orusing a selected SPEC line to refresh the workbook and then display results.

1. In Word from the Distributor Ribbon, select Browse, then navigate to and select the desired workbook template. The selected workbook displays on the ribbon.

To Preview using Current Values in the Workbook Template:2. From the Distributor Ribbon, select Preview. The system opens a new document displaying the results based

upon the current data in the selected workbook.

To Preview using Selected SPEC line from the Workbook Template:3. From the Distributor Ribbon, select Browse>Select SPEC for Refresh. The Select SPEC panel appears.


4. On the Select SPEC panel, select the desired SPEC line to be used for previewing and click OK. The selectedSPEC displays on the ribbon.

5. From the Distributor Ribbon, select Preview. The system opens a new document displaying the results basedupon the selected SPEC line.

6. To change the selected SPEC line being used for preview, from the Distributor Ribbon select Browse>Select SPECfor Refresh. The Select SPEC panel appears. Select the desired SPEC and click OK. The selected SPECdisplays on the ribbon.

7. To remove the selected SPEC line being used for preview, from the Distributor Ribbon select Browse>RemoveSPEC. The previously selected SPEC is removed from the ribbon.



10.7.3 Cache Address Book

For Excel 2010 (or above) users using email server options Outlook or SMTP, Distribution Manager allows the user tocache a local copy of a selected email list to prevent long waits when loading the address book. Email lists may alsobe cached using the Profile Scheduler (see Address Book Cache).

To Cache a Selected Email List: 1. Select the Cache Address Book option in the DM Settings function.

2. From the Email Lists drop down list, select the desired email list to be cached and then click the Cache AddressList button. The selected email list is cached locally on the computer. Subsequently when the email list isaccessed, the system uses the cached list, reducing the load time.

3. Repeat step 2 to select and cached additional email lists -or- to refresh a previously cached address book.

Note: If a cached list was created while using the Outlook email server option and then the email server option waschanged to SMTP, the Outlook cached list would still be available but could not be refreshed since theOutlook email server option is no longer selected.


10.7.4 Local Address List

For Excel 2010 (or above) users using email server options Outlook or SMTP, Distribution Manager allows the user tocreate a customized local address list. This feature is beneficial when distributions are only for a select group of usersor if the email addresses are not available from any other list. Addresses on the local list may be added, edited anddeleted as necessary.

To Create and Maintain a Local Address List:1. From the Email Lists drop down list, select Distributor (Local).

2. Key the appropriate name and email address (Alias and City are optional fields) and then click the Add button. Repeat to add additional names to the list. If necessary, click the to remove the associated name from the list.



10.7.5 DM View Log

During the distribution process, various logging information is recorded. If the DM Settings option Enhanced Logging isselected, then the system records additional logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or emailed.

1. In Excel from the DM Ribbon, select Settings. The Distribution Manager Settings - General panel appears.

2. On the General panel, click View Log. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, time, action,status, description and workbook for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displaysa count of the number of entries listed.

Note: To select a different size font, click on the drop down arrow in the bottom right hand corner.

3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and theneither click the Copy Selected Errors button -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on thepopup panel:

To copy a single record -- select the desired record.To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list.To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, andselect the last record in the range.

4. To email the entire error log to the help desk, click the Email Error Log button. The system opens a new Outlookemail panel with the error log attached. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body as necessary andclick the Send button.

5. To filter log entries for a specific workbook, click the Workbook down arrow and select the desired workbook. Thesystem displays only entries for the selected workbook.


6. To filter for a specific date range of entries in the error log file, select the Filter on Date check box and specify thedesired date range. The system displays only entries for the selected date range.

7. To filter for a specific level of entries in the error log file, select the desired level(s) in the Filter list. The systemdisplays only entries for the selected level(s).

8. To search for a specific value in the error log file Action column, key the desired value in the Find What field andclick the Find Next button. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Click the Find Nextbutton again, to find the next occurrence of the selected value.

9. To clear the error log file, click the Clear Log button.

10. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panelappears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Properties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in thelist. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click the Copy button. Click the Close button toreturn to the Log Viewer panel.

11. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click the Close button.

Spreadsheet Writeback 370


11 Spreadsheet Writeback

11.1 SWB Ribbon

After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon isadded in Excel. Use the options in the Spreadsheet Writeback (SWB) group of the SS ribbon to access/processfunctions in the application.


Writeback For Oracle API and generic table writebacks, opens the SWB ExecuteWriteback panel, allowing the user to write data from the spreadsheet tothe database (see Run Writebacks). If the user has authority to writebackto more than one method, the Select Writeback Method panel appearsfirst, allowing the user to select which method to process.

For JD Edwards writebacks, writes back (uploads) data from the currentactive sheet to the database.

Oracle APIs: The following menu items only appear if the user has authority to writebackOracle Public APIs.

Build a Template Opens the SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel, allowing theuser to select the package and procedure to be used to create a Buildersheet. The Builder sheet is used to select the parameters to be includedin the writeback definition.

Generate API Loader Sheet Opens the Use Loader Sheet panel, allowing the user to create a new orassign an existing Oracle API Loader sheet for the associated Buildersheet. The Loader sheet is used for entering the data to be written back tothe database.

Validate Click the down arrow to access functions for validating Oracle APIwriteback rows (i.e. validate all writeback rows in the workbook orworksheet, or only selected rows on the current worksheet).



Generic Tables: The following menu items only appear if the user has authority to writebackgeneric tables.

Build a Template Opens the SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel, allowing theuser to create a writeback definition to write data from the spreadsheet tothe database.

Browse for Database Opens the Connection Builder panel, allowing the user to select thedatabase to which the data will be written.

Validate Click the down arrow to access functions for validating generic tablewriteback rows (i.e. validate all writeback rows in the workbook orworksheet, or only selected rows on the current worksheet).

JD Edwards: The following menu items only appear if the user has authority to writebackJD Edwards.

Select Orchestration Opens the SWB Orchestration Selection panel, allowing the user to selectthe configuration and JDE orchestration to be used for creating ormaintaining a writeback template on the active worksheet.

Set Line Type Automatically populates the Line Type column values on the activeworksheet with H or D, indicating Header or Detail record respectively. This option is only enabled when the associated JDE Orchestration isflagged as Header/Detail.

Refresh Server Cache Clears and refreshes the JDE orchestration server cache. This is useful inthe event orchestration definitions have been added or modified.



11.2 Oracle APIs Writeback Setup

Spreadsheet Writeback provides an interface to enable data on worksheets to be written back to a database table. Data may be written back to an Oracle database via the Oracle public APIs. A user's ability to access the variouswriteback functions for Oracle public APIs is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings in theConfigurator.

Required Setup Functions for Oracle API Writebacks:


Build aTemplate

Allows the user to either select the Oracle API to be used to create a Builder sheet in theworkbook (see Single API Method) -orselect a template to be used for creating both theBuilder and Loader sheets in a single step (see Template Method).

BuilderSheet

Allows the user to select the API parameters to be included in the writeback definition.

LoaderSheet

Allows the user to enter the data to be written back to the database.

When processing a writeback using an Oracle API, macros are used in the workbook thus the workbook must be savewith a file type of .xlsm (Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook). As a result it is imperative to ensure that the Trust accessto VBA project object model option is selected.

To Set the Trust Access to VBA Project Object Model Option:1. In Excel from the Excel Ribbon, select File>Options, the Excel Options panel appears.

2. On the Excel Options panel, select Trust Center and then click the Trust Center Settings button. The Trust Centerpanel appears.

3. On the Trust Center panel, select Macro Settings and then select the Trust access to the VBA project objectmodel option.

4. Click OK.


11.2.1 Oracle APIs - Build a Template

The Oracle APIs - Build a Template function provides two methods for the user to create Builder and/or Loader sheetsin the workbook.

Single API Method - allows the user to select the API to be used to create a Builder sheet. After the Builder sheet iscreated, the user then selects to create the Loader sheet.Template Method - allows the user to select a template to be used for creating both the Builder and Loader sheets ina single step.Note: Templates are created and maintained in the SS Settings. Multiple APIs may be assigned to a single

template.



11.2.1.1 Single API Method

The Oracle APIs - Build a Template function allows the user to select the API to be used to create a Builder sheet. After the Builder sheet is created, the user then selects to create the Loader sheet.

To Setup a Writeback using a Single API:1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Oracle APIs>Build a Template. The SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public

API panel appears.

2. Click the down arrow and select the Oracle host configuration to be used to connect to the database.

3. Use the table to enter search criteria, and then click the Select API Packages button. The system loads a list ofavailable API packages based upon the selection criteria specified.

Field Description

Package Name If desired, specify the API package name or selected characters, andtoggle between Equals or Contains to define search parameters.

Procedure Name If desired, specify the API procedure name or selected characters, andtoggle between Equals or Contains to define search parameters.

Show APIs for This Owner Only If selected, only APIs for the current user are listed in the results grid.

Show Public APIs Only If selected, only public APIs are listed in the results grid.

Show APIs with Validation Only If selected, only APIs with validation are listed in the results grid.

Button Function

Reset Clears the panel and resets it to the default state.

Select API Packages Retrieves available API packages based upon the specified searchcriteria.

Refresh Packages fromDatabase

Re-reads the database schema and refreshes the list of availablepackages. This button is only available when using cached API lists, asdetermined by an option in the user's SS Settings.


4. From the list of Available Packages, select the desired package to be used. The system loads a list of availableprocedures for the selected API package.

5. From the list of Available Procedures, select the desired procedure to be used. The system loads a list ofparameters for the selected API package and procedure.



6. If applicable, select the desired Overloads alternate version of the Oracle API to be used to access different inputand/or output parameters.

7. If desired, modify data in the Parameter List grid:To include a parameter in the API query, select the associated Included check box, otherwise deselect theoption. By default all parameters are selected to be included. To assign a user-defined name to be displayed on the Builder Sheet and the Loader Sheet for the parameter, keythe value in the associated Display Name field.To preset the Set As Default flag for a parameter on the Builder Sheet, select the associated Set As Defaultcheck box. To preset the API Field Default Value for a parameter on the Builder Sheet, key the value in the associated DataValue fieldTo populate a cell in the grid with a value from a query, click the Lookup button, navigate to and select thedesired query, select the desired value and click Insert Selected Value(s). The system returns the value from thefirst column to the selected cell.

8. If applicable, select the Omit API-level validation option to ignore the P_VALIDATE parameter for the selected APIduring writeback validation processing. This addresses scenarios in which field dependencies exist betweenrelated P_VALIDATE APIs being processed together.

9. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icon or buttons.Insert (icon) -- creates a Builder worksheet and keeps the panel open for additional inserts.Insert (button) -- creates a Builder worksheet and closes the panel.Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.

10. Save the workbook using a file type of .xlsm (Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook).

11. Proceed to the next step, Builder Sheet.


11.2.1.2 Template Method

The Oracle APIs - Build a Template function allows the user to select a template to be used for creating both the Builder and Loader sheets in the workbook in a single step. Templates must first be established in the user's SSSettings prior to using the Template method. Multiple APIs may be assigned to a single template.

To Setup a Writeback using a Template:1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Oracle APIs>Build a Template. The SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public

API panel appears.

2. Click the down arrow and select the Oracle host configuration to be used to connect to the database.

3. Select the Template check box and then use the drop down box to select the template to be used for creatingBuilder and Loader sheets. When this option is selected the remaining fields on the panel will be disabled.

4. After the appropriate template has been selected, click one of the following toolbar icon or buttons.Insert (icon) -- creates the appropriate Builder and Loader worksheets and keeps the panel open for additionalinserts.Insert (button) -- creates the appropriate Builder and Loader worksheets and closes the panel.Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.


6. To review data on the Build sheet, proceed to the next step, Builder Sheet; otherwise, proceed to the subsequentstep, Loader Sheet to enter data on the Loader sheet.



11.2.2 Builder Sheet

The Builder sheet is used to select the API parameters to be included in the writeback definition.

1. After selecting the API and clicking Insert on the SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel, a Builder sheetis created in the workbook. A table listing the API parameters appears on the Builder sheet, and range names forvarious items are created.

Note: When the cursor is in the API Name cell, a tool tip displays the Oracle host configuration name.

2. If desired, modify API parameters:To include a parameter in the API query, select the associated Included check box, otherwise deselect theoption. Select or deselect the included check box in the header to select or deselect the options for allparameters. Required parameters appears in red.Note: Required parameters must be included, or the Set As Default option must be selected and the Default

Value specified for the parameter.To assign a user-defined name for a parameter, key the value in the Display Name field.To assign a default writeback value for a parameter, ensure the Set As Default option is selected and key thevalue to be assigned in the API Field Default Value field. The field may or may not be included in the API query. Select or deselect the Set As Default check box in the header to select or deselect the option for allparameters.To ignore the P_VALIDATE parameter for the selected API during writeback validation processing, select theOmit API-level validation option.

3. To generate a Loader sheet, click the Generate API Loader button -orfrom the SWB Ribbon select OracleAPIs>Generate API Loader. The Use Loader Sheet panel appears. Accept the default Loader sheet, click thedown arrow and select an existing Loader sheet, or enter a new sheet name (no special characters allowed), andthen click OK. The system populates the new or existing Loader sheet.


5. Proceed to the next step, Loader Sheet.


11.2.3 Loader Sheet

The Loader sheet is used to enter the data to be written back to the database.

1. After specifying the parameters to be included and the desired API field default values, and clicking Generate APILoader on the Builder sheet, a Loader sheet is created in the workbook. A table consisting of one data rowappears on the Loader sheet, and range names which encompass the writeback definition are created.

Note:Date and Status columns are to the far left or right of the grid based upon an option in the user's SS SettingsWhen the cursor is in the API Name cell, a tool tip displays the range name of the associated writeback grid andthe Oracle host configuration name.

2. To add data rows to the writeback definition range, click the Add API Loader Lines button. The Add API LoaderLines panel appears. Specify the number of lines to be added and click Insert. The system adds the specifiednumber of lines to the writeback definition range.

3. On the SWBAPI> rows on the spreadsheet, key the necessary data to be written to the database.

Note: All rows in the writeback definition range with the identifier "SWBAPI>" in the first column of the range areavailable for writing back.

4. If applicable, select the Omit API-level validation option to ignore the P_VALIDATE parameter for the selected APIduring writeback validation processing. This addresses scenarios in which field dependencies exist betweenrelated P_VALIDATE APIs being processed together.



5. To filter data rows by status in the current loader or for all loaders on a sheet, click the Filter hyperlink in theappropriate Status column header. The Filter Data Rows on Loader panel appears. Click the down arrow andselect the desired status for which to display data rows, select whether to filter data rows in the current loader or allloaders on the sheet, then click OK. The system filters the data rows accordingly.

Note: The hidden rows are ignored for validation and writeback processing.

6. To remove the filter and display all data rows in the current loader or for all loaders on a sheet, click the Filter link inthe appropriate Status column header. The Filter Data Rows on Loader panel appears. Select whether to clear thefilter for data rows in the current loader or all loaders on the sheet, then click Clear Filter. The system displays alldata rows accordingly.


8. Proceed to the next steps, Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows, Validate Writebacks or RunWritebacks.


11.3 Generic Tables Writeback Setup

Spreadsheet Writeback provides an interface to enable data on worksheets to be written back to a database table. Data may be written back to any generic table for which the user has write permissions. A user's ability to access thevarious writeback functions for generic tables is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings in theConfigurator.

Required Setup Functions for Generic Table Writebacks:


Browse forDatabase

Allows the user to create connections and assign a specific database connection to eachgeneric tables writeback definition. Backwards compatibility for legacy processing also allowsfor assigning a database connection to each worksheet in a workbook.

Build aTemplate

Allows the user to identify various criteria for the writeback definition, such as the databasetable and fields to which the data will be written back to, the range on the worksheet where thedata to be written back resides and criteria for handling the database connection.

Data Rows Allows the user to define the rows to be written back to the database and to enter theappropriate data.

Additional Maintenance Functions for Generic Table Writebacks:


RemoveWritebackDatabaseConnection

Allows for removing the database connection assigned to a worksheet via SpreadsheetWriteback or via Excel (only applies to legacy processing).

DeleteWritebackDefinition

Allows for deleting a generic tables writeback definition from a worksheet via SpreadsheetWriteback or via Excel.



11.3.1 Browse for Database

The Browse for Database function allows the user to create connections and assign a specific database connection toeach generic tables writeback definition. Backwards compatibility for legacy processing also allows for assigning adatabase connection to each worksheet in a workbook. Database connections may be created to the following datasources:

Application Configurator Connections or Host Configurations (excluding Salesforce and SAP connection types)DSNOracleSQL ServerIBM DB2 -- iSeries Access (ODBC or OLE/DB)

1. To set the database connection for a:New writeback definition or worksheet -- place the cursor in any cell on the worksheet. Continue with step 2. Existing writeback definition -- place the cursor in the Schema/Table Name cell of the writeback definition. Continue with step 2.

2. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Generic Tables>Browse for Database. The Connection Builder panelappears.

2. Select the desired Connection Type, and then click Next -orselect the Connection Settings tab. The Connection

Settings panel appears displaying the appropriate setting fields based upon the selected connection type.

3. Use the table to enter data on the Connection Settings panel.

Field Description

Application ConfiguratorConnections:

Database Connection Name Click the down arrow and select the Configurator connection or hostconfiguration to be used.


Field Description

Login: Name/Password Displays the login name and password assigned to the connection orhost configuration in the Configurator. Note: When using a Configurator connection, the system utilizes thePrompt for Input option as defined in the Configurator.

Connection Displays the criteria defined for the connection or host configuration inthe Configurator.

DSN:

Database Driver Click the down arrow and select a driver. Valid options are AccessdBASE, Access Driver, or Excel.

Data Source Name (DSN) Click the down arrow and select the data source (DSN).

Connect using WindowsAuthentication

If selected, indicates to use the user's Windows login ID to validatesecurity access to the designated server.

ID Specify the user name to be used to connect to the database.

Password Specify the password associated with the above user name.

Oracle:

Server Name Specify the Oracle Local Server Name.

SID Specify the service name indicating where the database is located.

Port Specify the port number.



SQL Server:

Server Name Click the down arrow and select the server name.

Connect using WindowsAuthentication

If selected, indicates to use the user's Windows login ID to validatesecurity access to the designated server.



Database Name Click the down arrow and select the database.

iSeries (ODBC / OLE/DB):

System Specify the server name or IP address.

ID Specify the user name to be used to connect to the database library.


Default Library Specify the name of the database library.

4. To modify the Connection Save Options setting, select the appropriate radio button.

Field Description

Save (without password) Saves the connection in the writeback definition or worksheet withoutsaving the password. A login prompt panel appears when accessing theBuild a Template or Writeback functions for generic tables. This option isonly available for connections that have a login ID.



Field Description

Save Saves the connection in the writeback definition or worksheet with alllogin information. Caution should be used when utilizing this option, asanyone obtaining the workbook will be able to writeback to the database.

Don't Save Does not save the connection in the writeback definition or worksheet,but instead a prompt for connection appears when accessing the Build aTemplate or Writeback functions for generic tables.

6. To test the connection, click Test Connection. If required the user is prompted to enter login information. Thesystem returns a message confirming that the connection is successful.

7. To update the connection and assign the database to the writeback definition or worksheet, click OK.

8. Proceed to the next step, Generic Tables - Build a Template.


11.3.2 Generic Tables - Build a Template

The Generic Tables - Build a Template function allows the user to identify various criteria for the writeback definition,such as the database table and fields to which the data will be written back to, the range on the worksheet where thedata to be written back resides and criteria for handling the database connection.

1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Generic Tables>Build a Template.If creating the first writeback definition on a worksheet or no connection is assigned to the worksheet -- amessage appears indicating that a database connection is not set. Click Yes to browse for a connection (see Browse for Database for instructions). Once the database connection is set, the SWB Build a Template -Generic Tables panel appears. If creating a subsequent writeback definition on a worksheet or a connection is assigned to the worksheet -- amessage appears asking whether to use the active connection or to browse for a new connection. Responseaccordingly. Once the database connection is set, the SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel.

Field Description

Schema Name Click the down arrow and select the database schema or table spacename. Note: For some connection types the Schema Name will remain blank.

Table Name Click the down arrow and select the table to which the data will bewritten.



Field Description

Table Fields: Included / Name

Once the Schema Name and Table Name are defined, the associatedfields are listed. Select the fields to which data will be written.

Primary key fields are required and are automatically selected. If thetable does not have a primary key then one should be added -or- oncethe template has been inserted into the spreadsheet then key fields maybe defined by prefixing the field name with two asterisks. Example: **FiscalYear

Required fields may also be predefined by prefixing a field with oneasterisk. Example: *Account

Note: During the writeback process the system validates that all requiredfields are nonblank.

Nav Tip: Click the top left corner in the Table Fields section to select ordeselect all fields.

Worksheet Insert:

Range Name Once the Schema Name and Table Name are defined, a system-generated range name defaults. The range name for the writebackdetermines the valid rows and columns on the worksheet that may bewritten back. It is recommended to use the system-generated name;however if necessary, click the down arrow and select an existing rangename.Note: The system generated range name syntax is GSIWB.ABC, whereABC is the selected table name.

Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the sheet for the writeback definition.

Starting Column Specify the starting column for the writeback definition range.

Starting Row Specify the starting row for the writeback definition range.

Ending Column (Optional) Specify the ending column for the writeback definition range. A valuemust be entered when using the Exclude Column Names option. If thisvalue is not defined then the system determines the range width.

Ending Row (Optional) Specify the ending row for the writeback definition range. If this value isnot defined then the range defaults to three rows: a column header row,one data row, plus one empty row.

Worksheet DatabaseConnection:

Save (Without Password) If selected, the connection in the worksheet is saved without saving thepassword, thus a login prompt panel appears when accessing the Build aTemplate or Writeback functions. This option is only available forconnections that have a login ID.


Field Description

Save If selected, the connection in the worksheet is saved with all login data. Note: Caution should be used when utilizing this option, as anyoneobtaining the workbook will be able to writeback to the database.

Don't Save If selected, the connection in the worksheet is not saved, but instead aprompt for connection appears when accessing the Build a Template orWriteback functions.

Exclude Column Names When column headers have been predefined on the spreadsheet, selectthis option for the system to not assign column names when creating thewriteback definition range. When this option is selected, an EndingColumn value must be assigned.

Button Function

Delete a Writeback Definition Displays the Delete Writeback Definition panel allowing the user toremove a writeback definition (see Delete Writeback Definitions).

3. To load the writeback definition to the worksheet, click Insert. The writeback definition is loaded to the worksheetwith columns for the table fields selected plus two columns to hold the date and status of the last writeback.

Note:The Date and Status columns are added to the far left or right of the grid based upon an option in the user's SSSettings.When a writeback definition is inserted, a range name for the writeback is created -or- a prompt to overwrite thename appears if the range name already exists. The writeback definition range name syntax is GSIWB.###.100,where ### represents an incremented number for each writeback definition on the worksheet (i.e.GSIWB.001.100, GSIWB.002.100), thus allowing for up to 999 writeback definitions per worksheet. In addition,a special range name is created that identifies the writeback definition and the range name for the writeback. When the cursor is in the Schema/Table Name cell, a tool tip displays the writeback range name and thedatabase connection.


5. Proceed to the next step, Generic Tables - Data Rows.



11.3.3 Generic Tables - Data Rows

After the writeback definition for generic tables has been defined, it is necessary to define the rows to be written backto the database and to enter the appropriate data.

1. After entering the appropriate writeback definition criteria and clicking Insert on the SWB Build a Template -Generic Tables panel, a table consisting of one data row appears on the worksheet, and the system creates rangenames which encompass the writeback definition.

2. To add additional data rows to the writeback definition range, use one of the following methods:Copy/Insert -- copy an existing SWB> row in the range and insert the copied row in the existing range.Expand Range -- from the Excel Ribbon select Formula>Name Manager. Use the Name Manager panelto select and expand the size of the writeback definition range.Note:

Refer to Excel Help for additional instructions on expanding the size of a range. The writeback definition range name syntax is GSIWB.###.100, where ### represents an incremented numberfor each writeback definition (i.e. GSIWB.001.100, GSIWB.002.100).

3. On the SWB> rows on the spreadsheet, key the necessary data to be written to the database.

Note: All rows in the writeback definition range with the identifier "SWB>" in the first column of the range areavailable for writing back. The writeback identifier may be excluded from rows in the writeback definitionrange to allow for non-writeback rows such as summary rows, group headers and footers.


5. Proceed to the next steps, Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows, Validate Writebacks or RunWritebacks.


11.3.4 Generic Tables - Writeback Definition Example

After inserting the writeback definition the generic table name and field names will be displayed on the worksheet inExcel. The Build a Template function for generic tables also creates a range name that encompasses the writebackdefinition columns and the data rows to be written back.

The example below shows a writeback definition which has been inserted onto a spreadsheet using the Build aTemplate function for generic tables, and where data has been keyed and written back to the appropriate table. Thewriteback definition on the spreadsheet includes:

Schema Name and Table Name inserted and displayed in cell A1. The syntax is schema_name.table_name.Selected writeback fields are the next sequence of cells (B1:H1).Date and Time of the data row's writeback is entered at the time writeback is executed (G1).Status of the data row's writeback is entered at the time writeback is executed (H1).All rows in the writeback's range name with the identifier "SWB>" in the first column of the range (A2:A3) areavailable for writing back. The writeback identifier can be excluded from rows in the writeback's range name to allowfor non writeback rows such as summary rows, group headers and footers.



11.3.5 Generic Tables - Remove Writeback Database Connection

In generic writeback processing, database connections are maintained at the worksheet level of a workbook. Aworksheet level writeback database connection may be removed via Spreadsheet Writeback or via Excel.

To Remove a Workbook Level Writeback Database Connection via Spreadsheet Writeback1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Generic Tables>Build a Template. The SWB Build a Template - Generic

Tables panel appears.

2. Select Don't Save for the Worksheet Database Connection option and click Insert. The connection is removed.


To Remove a Workbook Level Writeback Database Connection via Excel1. From the Excel Ribbon select Formula>Name Manager. The Name Manager panel appears.

Note: The connection range name syntax is GSIWB.000.###, where ### represents an incremented number for each writeback

definition (i.e. GSIWB.000.001, GSIWB.000.002).

2. From the list, select the connection range name(s) to be deleted and click Delete. The connection is removed.



11.3.6 Generic Tables - Delete Writeback Definition

If necessary generic tables writeback definitions may be deleted from a worksheet. The definition may be removed viaSpreadsheet Writeback or via Excel.

To Delete a Writeback Definition via Spreadsheet Writeback1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Generic Tables>Build a Template. The SWB Build a Template - Generic

Tables panel appears.

2. On the SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel, click Delete a Writeback Definition. The Delete WritebackDefinition panel appears.

3. For each writeback definition targeted for deletion, select the check box in the Delete column and click OK. Amessage appears indicating that the deletion is complete.

Note: An option is also available for deleting the writeback definition range name if desired.


To Delete a Writeback Definition via Excel1. From the Excel Ribbon select Formula>Name Manager. The Name Manager panel appears.

Note: The writeback definition range name syntax is GSIWB.###.100, where ### represents an incrementednumber for each writeback definition (i.e. GSIWB.001.100, GSIWB.002.100).

2. From the list of names, select the writeback definition(s) to be deleted and click Delete. The writeback definition isremoved.




11.4 JD Edwards Writeback Setup

Spreadsheet Writeback provides an interface to enable data on worksheets to be written back to a database table. Data may be written back to a JD Edwards database using JD Edwards orchestrations (e.g. programs used to definedfields for data feed). A user's ability to access the various writeback functions for JD Edwards is determined by aparameter setting defined in User settings in the Configurator.

Required Setup Functions for JD Edwards Writebacks:


SelectOrchestration

Allows the user to select the configuration and JDE orchestration to be used for creating ormaintaining a writeback template on the active worksheet.

Data Rows Allows the user to define the rows to be written back to the database and to enter theappropriate data.


11.4.1 JD Edwards - Select Orchestration

The JD Edwards - Select Orchestration function allows the user to select the configuration and orchestration (e.g.program used to defined fields for data feed) to use for creating or maintaining a writeback template on the activeworksheet.

1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select JD Edwards>Select Orchestration. The SWB Orchestration Selection panelappears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the SWB Orchestration Selection panel.

Field Description

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the JDE host configuration to be usedfor retrieving writeback host name and port criteria.

Orchestration Click the down arrow and select the JDE orchestration to be used forcreating or maintaining the writeback template.

Description Displays the description for the selected orchestration.

Header/Detail If selected, indicates that the orchestration is a header/detail type (e.g.slated to feed data back to both a header and detail table).

Update Orchestration Only If selected, indicates to change the orchestration assigned on thewriteback template, but to retain all other data on the worksheet.

Button Description

Refresh Server CacheClears and refreshes the JDE orchestration server cache. This is usefulin the event orchestration definitions have been added or modified.

3. Click OK. The writeback definition is loaded to the worksheet with columns for the table fields indicated by theselected orchestration plus columns to hold the line type, date, status and messages of the last writeback.




5. Proceed to the next step, JD Edwards - Data Rows.


11.4.2 JD Edwards - Data Rows

After the writeback definition for JD Edwards has been defined, it is necessary to define the rows to be written back tothe database and to enter the appropriate data.

1. After selecting the appropriate JD Edwards orchestration and clicking OK on the SWB Orchestration Selectionpanel, a table consisting of one data row appears on the worksheet.

2. On the data rows on the spreadsheet, key the necessary data to be written to the database. The assignedconfiguration may be changed if needed.

Note:All rows without text in the Exclude field are available for writing back. If text is entered in the Exclude fieldthen the associated row will be sk ipped during writeback processing, thus allowing for non-writeback rows suchas summary rows, group headers and footers to be defined on the sheet.For Header/Detail JDE Orchestrations only, specify whether the row contains header (H) or detail (D) data -or-after keying data on the rows, from the SWB Ribbon, select JD Edwards>Set Line Type to allow the system toautomatically populate the column based upon the data keyed.


4. Proceed to the next step, Run Writebacks.



11.5 Writeback Processing

For Oracle API and generic table writebacks, once the writeback definition has been defined and data has been enteredon the spreadsheet, use the Write Back function to select the writeback definitions and associated data rows to bepreviewed, validated and/or run.

Feature Description

Preview Allows for previewing the data rows for a single writeback. Once data rows for the singlewriteback are previewed, then individually selected data rows may be validated and then writtento the database.

Validate Verifies the data prior to writing it back to the database. Various methods and options areavailable for validating the writeback data. Although it is not mandatory to validate prior towriting back the data, it is highly recommended to do so.

Run Writes the data that was defined by the writeback definition to the database. When runningwritebacks, the user may run an individual writeback, all writebacks for a selected worksheet, orall writebacks for the entire workbook.

For JD Edward writebacks, once the writeback definition has been defined and data has been entered on thespreadsheet, use the Write Back function to writeback (upload) data from the current active sheet to the database.

Feature Description

Run Writes the data that was defined by the writeback definition on the current active sheet to thedatabase.

In addition to inserting a new record or updating an existing record, Spreadsheet Writeback provides the ability todelete data for a generic table from a database. This may only be done when processing a single writeback and onlyon a row by row basis (see Generic Tables - Delete Data).


11.5.1 Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows

For Oracle API and generic table writebacks, Spreadsheet Writeback allows for previewing the data rows for a singlewriteback. Once data rows for the single writeback are previewed, then individually selected data rows may bevalidated and then written to the database.

Note: This feature does not apply to JD Edward writebacks.

To Preview Writeback and Process Selected Rows:1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Write Back. The appropriate SWB Execute Writeback (Oracle API or

Generic) panel appears.

Note: If the user has authority to writeback to more than one method, the Select Writeback Method panel appearsfirst, allowing the user to select which method to process.

2. On the SWB Execute Writeback panel, select Preview Rows. The system displays the writeback data rows for theselected worksheet/writeback.

Note: If an individual worksheet/writeback is not selected, the system automatically selects the first writeback onthe current worksheet when the Preview Rows option is selected.

3. Deselect or select the rows for processing.

Nav Tip: Click the top left corner in the Table Fields section to select or deselect all fields.

4. If desired, select the option, Stop On First Error, indicating for the system to stop the validation or writebackprocess when the first error is encountered.



5. After selections are made, click one of the following buttons:Highlight Writeback Data (Toggle) -- toggles to highlight or remove the highlight on the spreadsheet the writebackrows currently selected in the grid.Validate Rows -- validates the data for the selected rows (see Validate Writebacks).

6. After the validation process is complete, to writeback data for the selected rows, click Run Writeback. The systemwrites the data back to the database (see Run Writebacks).


11.5.2 Validate Writebacks

For Oracle API and generic table writebacks, Spreadsheet Writeback provides various methods and options forvalidating data prior to writing it back to the database. Although it is not mandatory to validate prior to writing back thedata, it is highly recommended to do so.

Note: This feature does not apply to JD Edward writebacks.

To Validate Writeback Row(s) via the SWB Ribbon:1. Open the workbook to the desired Loader or data sheet, then:

To validate selected row(s) -- select the desired SWBAPI> or SWB> row(s), then on the SWB Ribbon selectOracle APIs or Generic Tables>Validate>Validate Selected Row(s).To validate all rows on the worksheet -- on the SWB Ribbon select Oracle APIs or GenericTables>Validate>Validate All Rows in the Worksheet.To validate all rows in the workbook -- on the SWB Ribbon select Oracle APIs or GenericTables>Validate>Validate All Rows in the Workbook.

A message appears with the results, and the Date and Status columns on the writeback data rows are updatedaccordingly.

To Validate Writeback Row(s) via the Write Back function:1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Write Back. The appropriate SWB Execute Writeback (Oracle API or

Generic) panel appears.

Note: If the user has authority to writeback to more than one method, the Select Writeback Method panel appearsfirst, allowing the user to select which method to process.

2. On the SWB Execute Writeback panel:To validate selected row(s) -- select Preview Rows and then deselect or select the rows to be validated.

Nav Tip: Click the top left corner in the Table Fields section to select or deselect all fields.

To validate all rows on the worksheet -- set Select Worksheet equal to the desired Loader sheet.To validate all rows on the worksheet for a specific writeback -- set Select Worksheet equal to the desiredLoader sheet and set Select Writeback to the desired writeback.To validate all rows in the workbook -- set Select Worksheet equal to [All Worksheets].

3. After selections are made, click Validate Rows -orclick the Question Mark icon ( ) to validate a single row. Thesystem displays a message with results and updates the Date and Status columns on the writeback data row(s)accordingly.

If validation is run while in Preview Rows mode:The system also determines if the row is an insert (new record) or update (modification of an existing record), andindicates whether each row validated normally or not.

Green check -- row validated normally.Red exclamation point -- a validation error occurred. Click the icon or View Log to determine the problem.



For generic tables only, after validation is run in Preview Rows mode:Primary key fields are wrapped with two asterisks (**) and required, non-primary key fields are wrapped with oneasterisk (*). After a row has been validated and flagged as Update, it is possible to compare the existing value with the newvalue. Hover the mouse over a cell in the SWB Execute Writeback panel to display the current value in thedatabase.


11.5.3 Run Writebacks

For Oracle API and generic table writebacks, after the writeback definition has been defined and data has been enteredon the spreadsheet, use the Write Back function to select the writeback definitions and associated data rows to be run. Running a writeback writes the data that was defined by the writeback definition to the database. When runningwritebacks, the user may run an individual writeback, all writebacks for a selected worksheet, or all writebacks for theentire workbook. See Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows for instructions on writing back for selecteddata rows for a single writeback definition. A user's ability to truncate (clear) tables prior to writeback is determined byan option in User settings in the Configurator.

For JD Edward writebacks, after the writeback definition has been defined and data has been entered on thespreadsheet, use the Write Back function to writeback (upload) data from the current active sheet to the database.

1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Write Back.For Oracle API and generic table writebacks -- the appropriate SWB Execute Writeback (Oracle API or Generic)panel appears. Continue with step 2.Note: If the user has authority to writeback to more than one method, the Select Writeback Method panel

appears first, allowing the user to select which method to process.For JD Edward writebacks -- a confirmation prompt appears. Click OK. When the writeback process iscomplete, the system displays a message with results, and updates the Date, Status, Message andmiscellaneous columns on the writeback data row(s) accordingly.

2. Use the table to enter data on the SWB Execute Writeback panel to indicate how to writeback data.

Field Description

General Options:

Include All Rows Specify when writing back data whether to writeback all rows, only insertrows, or only update rows in the writeback definition.

For Oracle APIs, include all rows is the only option available.

Preview Rows If selected, writeback rows for the selected worksheet/writeback aredisplayed in the grid for preview, validation and writeback purposes (see Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows).



Field Description

Writeback Selection:

Select Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the individual worksheet containing thewriteback definition(s) to be processed -orselect all worksheets. Forgeneric tables, when all worksheets is selected, the user is allowed tooverride the connection previously set for each worksheet.

Select Writeback Click the down arrow and select the individual writeback definition to berun -orselect all writebacks in the workbook or for the active worksheet.

Truncate (Clear) Tables BeforeWriteback

If selected, indicates to clear all data in the table(s) prior to processingthe writeback(s). This option only appears when writing back to generictables, and only applies when using an Oracle or SQL Serverconnection.

Rows: When the Preview Rows option is selected, displays the data rows forthe selected worksheet/writeback. Select the rows to be processed.

Nav Tip: Click the top left corner in the Table Fields section to select ordeselect all fields.

Stop on First Error When the Preview Rows option is selected, select this option to indicatefor the system to stop the validation or writeback process when the firsterror is encountered.

Button Function

Highlight Writeback Data(Toggle)

When the Preview Rows option is selected, toggles to highlight orremove the highlight for spreadsheet rows currently selected forwriteback.

Validate Rows Validates data for selected rows or writeback(s) (see ValidateWritebacks).

Run Writeback Writes data back to the database for the selected rows or writeback(s).

View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy logentries, or clear the log file (see SWB View Log).

4. To preview writeback data and to validate or writeback by selected data row, proceed to Preview Writebacks andProcess Selected Rows.

5. To validate writeback data, proceed to Validate Writebacks.

6. To writeback data, make the appropriate selections and click Run Writeback. The system starts the writebackprocess.

Note: For generic tables only, if multiple worksheets were selected, the Run Writeback panel appears allowing theuser to override the database previously assigned. Click No to use the original database set for eachwriteback definition or worksheet. Click Yes to select a database to be applied to all writebacks being run.


7. When the writeback process is complete, the system displays a message with results, indicates in the gridwhether or not all rows processed normally, and updates the Date and Status columns on the writeback data row(s) accordingly.

If writeback is run while in Preview Rows mode:Green check -- row inserted or updated successfully.Red exclamation point -- an error occurred. Click the icon or View Log to determine the problem.

Writeback results while in Preview Rows mode

Writeback results while NOT in Preview Rows mode



11.5.4 Generic Tables - Delete Data

In addition to inserting a new record or updating an existing record, Spreadsheet Writeback provides the ability todelete data for a generic table from a database. This may only be done when processing a single writeback and onlyon a row by row basis for Update data type rows.

1. Complete steps 1-5 for running a single writeback (see Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows). Thesesteps include:

Accessing the functionSelecting an individual worksheet and writeback, and selecting desired rows for processingValidating rows

2. With the SWB Execute Writeback - Generic panel open and the Validate Rows function complete, right click in theInsert/Update field on the data row targeted for deletion. The Database Delete Record dialog box appears.

3. Click Yes to delete the selected data or click No to cancel the delete process.

4. Click the Question Mark icon ( ) to process a single row. After running the writeback on the row the Insert/Update is changed to Insert for the deleted record

5. After all writebacks are run, click Close.


11.6 Miscellaneous Items

11.6.1 SWB View Log

During the writeback process, various logging information is recorded. Log entries may be viewed or copied.

1. To access the SWB Log, click View Log from one of the panels listed below. The Log Viewer panel appearsdisplaying the level, date, time, action, description, writeback definition name, worksheet, and workbook for eachlog entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays a count of the number of entries listed.

Spreadsheet Server Settings - Writeback panelSWB Execute Writeback panel

Note: To select a different size font, click on the drop down arrow in the bottom right hand corner.

2. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and then eitherclick Copy Selected Errors -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on the popup panel:

To copy a single record -- select the desired record.To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list.To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and selectthe last record in the range.

3. To filter log entries for a specific workbook, click the workbook down arrow and select the desired workbook. Thesystem displays only entries for the selected workbook.

4. To filter for a specific date range of entries in the error log file, select the Filter on Date check box and specify thedesired date range. The system displays only entries for the selected date range.



5. To filter for a specific level of entries in the error log file, select the desired level(s) in the Filter list. The systemdisplays only entries for the selected level(s).

6. To search for a specific value in the error log file Action column, key the desired value in the Find What field andclick Find Next. The system will highlight the first log entry containing the value. Click Find Next again, to find thenext occurrence of the selected value.

7. To clear the error log file, click Clear Log.

8. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panelappears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Proprieties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in thelist. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click Copy. Click Close to return to the Log Viewerpanel.

9. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click Close.


12 Profile Scheduler

The Profile Scheduler component in Spreadsheet Server allows for automating and/or scheduling various jobs such ascaching the Distribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks,loading custom tables or local database files, and running workbooks for Budget Accelerator writebacks orSpreadsheet Analyst reporting. A user's ability to access the Profile Scheduler, to access the Database Managementtab within Profile Scheduler, and to create, edit, delete and/or run a job is determined by parameter settings defined inUser settings in the Configurator.

Note: As Profile Scheduler works with the Windows Task Scheduler, when scheduling and running jobs various userright assignments and set up conditions may be required based upon the profile type and process (see ProfileScheduler Overview).

To Access the Profile Scheduler:1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Profile Scheduler. The Profile

Scheduler panel appears.

Note: When not using Windows Single Signon, the user is first prompted to sign on to Spreadsheet Server.

Profile Scheduler 408


To Create a New Job:1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Jobs tab.

2. To add a new job, from the ribbon select New. The Select Profile Type panel appears.

3. Click the down arrow and select the desired profile type for which to create a new job, and then click OK. Theappropriate New Job panel appears.

Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE job uses <Sign-On>, theuser is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected.

Use the following links to access specific profile type information:

Address Book Cache Distribution Manager Custom Table Loads

Load Local INF Load Local JDE Workbook Automation

Note: Workbook Automation is only available if the user is licensed to both Spreadsheet Server and BudgetAccelerator -or- if the user is licensed to Spreadsheet Analyst.

To Maintain an Existing Job:1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Jobs tab.

2. To modify an existing job, double click the desired job from the list -orselect the desired job from the list and thenfrom the ribbon select Edit. The appropriate job panel appears.

Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE job uses <Sign-On>, theuser is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected.

To Run One or More Jobs:1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Jobs tab.

2. To run one or more jobs, select the Run check box for the desired jobs from the list, if desired select the Halt OnError option indicating to stop all processing when an error occurs, and then from the ribbon select Run. Thesystem processes the jobs and updates the Start, Finish and Status fields accordingly.

Note:When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE job uses <Sign-On>, the useris first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected.When running a Distribution Manager job if the user or connection is not set to auto-signon, then the user is firstprompted to sign on to Spreadsheet Server.


12.1 Address Book Cache

The Address Book Cache profile type is used to cache the address book lists used in Distribution Manager in order toreduce the time required to load the email address book.

To Create/Maintain an Address Book Cache Job:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Address Book Cache - Job tab.

Field Description

Job Name Specify the name of the job.

Comments If desired, specify comments related to the job.

General Information:

Cache Global Address List /Cache Outlook Contacts

Specify whether caching the Global Address List or Outlook Contacts. Note: The Outlook option is only available if Global's Outlook Add-Incomponent has been loaded for Excel 2010 (or above) users.

Address Book Cache Folder Key the path or use the Browse button to select the desired location forthe Address Book Cache folder.

Button Function

Clear Cache Removes all cached files in the specified Address Book Cache folder.

Address Book Opens the address book used in Distribution Manager.

2. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Job.



12.2 Distribution Manager

The Distribution Manager profile type is used to refresh selected workbooks with specified replacement values and/or toschedule the distribution of selected Distribution Manager workbooks.

To Create/Maintain a Distribution Manager Job:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Distribution Manager - Job tab.

Field Description



Select the Workbooks toProcess:

This section indicates the workbooks and/or folder of workbooks to beincluded in the run.

To add workbooks to the job, specify the default values, click the AddWorkbook(s) button, navigate to and select the desired workbook(s), andthen click the Open button. To add a folder of workbooks to the job, specify the default values, clickthe Add Folder button, navigate to and select the desired folder, andthen click the Open button.To remove a workbook or folder, select the item in the window, and clickthe Remove button.To control the order of worksheets or folders in the list, select the item inthe window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move the item upor down in the list.


Field Description

Run If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are processedwhen the job is run.

Workbook Name Displays the name of the workbook or folder assigned to the job.

Start Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run prior to refreshing and/or distributing the workbook(s).

Refresh If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are refreshedusing the replacement data on the Range Name Replacement tab duringthe run process (prior to distribution).

Distribution If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are distributedduring the run process.

End Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run after refreshing and/ordistributing the workbook(s).

Run Default Specify the default Run value to be assigned when a workbook and/orfolder is added to the job.

Refresh Default Specify the default Refresh value to be assigned when a workbook and/orfolder is added to the job.

Distribution Default Specify the default Distribution value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the job.

Start Macro Default Specify the default Start Macro value to be assigned when a workbookand/or folder is added to the job.

End Macro Default Specify the default End Macro value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the job.

Halt on Error If selected, when running the profile if an error is encountered the systemstops processing the job. Otherwise, the system continues processingthe next item in the job list.

Button Function

Run Saves and closes the job, and then processes all workbooks and/orworkbooks in the folders which are selected to run.



2. Use the table to enter data on the Distribution Manager - Range Name Replacement tab.

Field Description

Range Name Replacement: This section indicates the ranges in the selected workbooks to be replacedwith designated values.

To display a list of range names in the workbooks assigned to the job,click the Refresh button.To modify values, select the line in the window and make the appropriatechange(s).To remove a range from the list, select the item in the window, and clickthe Remove button.To clear all ranges from the list, click the Clear button.

Range Name Specify the name of the range to be replaced.

Replacement Value Specify the value to be placed in the associated range.

Button Function




12.3 Custom Table Loads

The Custom Table Loads profile type is used to download tables and table data from a source database into a targetdatabase, or text file, allowing for optimized calculation speeds. The order in which records are processed in updatemode is based upon options in the user's PS Settings. Contact Global for additional information on Custom TableLoads.

To Create/Maintain a Custom Table Load Job:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Custom Table Loads - Job tab.

Field Description



General Information:

Source Database Click the down arrow and select the connection to be used for connectingto the source database containing the original tables. The list displays Access, Data Services, iSeries, Oracle or SQL Server connections, orSAP (NetCo 3.0) host configurations to which the user is authorized.

Target Database Click the down arrow and select the connection to be used for connectingto the target database -orselect Text Files. The list only displays SQLServer connections which are flagged as load local connections and towhich the user is authorized.

Replace Data If selected, the system deletes records for the selected table(s) prior todownloading data. If not selected, the download process only adds newand/or updates existing records for the selected table(s).



Field Description

Text File Options: These options only appear when Target Database is set to Text Files.

File Location Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the text file location.

File Extension Key the value or click the down arrow and select the text file extension(e.g. csv and txt).

Delimiter Key the value or click the down arrow and select the delimiter to be used(e.g. comma, semicolon, space and tab).

Text Qualifier Click the down arrow and select the text qualifier to be used. Valid optionsare double quote and single quote.

Include Headings If selected, headers are included in the text file.

Note: Excel's csv file requirements are comma and double quote.

2. The Tables to Transfer panel does not initially list any tables. Click the Search for Tables button. The Tables panelappears. On the Tables panel, enter selection criteria in the Schema/Library and Search For fields as appropriateand click Search. The system lists tables matching the search criteria. From the list select the desired table(s)and click Add. The system returns the select table(s) to the Tables to Transfer tab. Click Close to close thepanel.


3. Use the table to enter data on the Custom Table Loads - Tables to Transfer tab.

Field Description

Include If selected, indicates to include the table in the load process.

Source Name Displays schema (if available) and name of the selected source table.

Target Table Name Specify the target table name. The name defaults to the source tablename. A sequence number is appended when duplicate names exists.



Field Description

Included Columns When a table is included, the system defaults to include all columns. Ifnecessary, click in the cell and on the Define Table Structure panel (seebelow) select the column(s) to be included when building/inserting data tothe target table and then click OK. The system returns the selectedcolumn(s) to be included in the target table.Note: Cannot exclude a column which is part of the primary key.

Primary Key When a table is included, the system when possible defaults the primarykey for the table. If necessary, click in the cell and on the Define TableStructure panel (see below) select the desired column(s) to be part of theprimary key. When data does not fit with a concept of uniqueness, selectthe Assign Unique Identifier check box instead, which allows the systemto define a unique field to be used for the table. When the appropriate datais selected, click OK. The system returns the selected column(s) to beused as the primary key or returns the literal *Create Unique Identifier.

Indexed Columns If necessary, click in the cell and on the Define Table Structure panel (seebelow) select the desired column(s) to make up the indexed columns keyfor the table and then click OK. The system returns the selected column(s) to be used for indexing.

Button Function

Criteria If necessary, click in the cell and on the Build Select Query -or- ManageParameters for Method panel enter the selection criteria for creating asmall subset of data to be uploaded.

Search for Tables Opens the Tables panel, allowing the user to search for and returnselected tables to the Tables to Transfer panel.

4. Use the table to enter data on the Define Table Structure panel.

Field Description

Assign Unique Identifier If selected, the system creates a unique field in the target table to be usedas the primary key.


Field Description

Include If selected, indicates to include the source column in the target table.

Source Column Name Displays the name of the column in the source table.

Target Column Name Specify the target column name. Defaults to the source table name.

Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for the target column. Validvalues are Text, Numeric, Currency, Date/Time, Boolean, Memo andDecimal.

Size Specify the size for the target column.

Decimal Specify the decimal positions for the target column.

Primary Key If selected, indicates to use the column as part of the primary key. Note: When data does not fit with a concept of uniqueness, select theAssign Unique Identifier check box instead, which allows the system todefine a unique field to be used for the table.

Indexed Columns If selected, indicates to use the column for indexing.

Incremental Update ControlColumn

If desired, click the down arrow and select the column to be used forcomparison purposes when processing incremental updating.

Last Incremental Value If desired, specify the last value processed for the control column. Whenthe job is run in update mode (i.e. Replace Data option is not selected),the system processes only records which exceed the last incrementalvalue and then updates the last incremental value accordingly.

5. Refer to the Custom Views section for instructions on creating and maintaining user-defined views for defining asubset of data to be uploaded.




12.3.1 Build Select Query

The Build Select Query feature is used to define a smaller subset of data for uploading.

1. From the Custom Table Loads - Tables to Transfer tab, click in the Criteria field for the desired table. The BuildSelect Query panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Build Select Query panel.

Field Description

Column Name Click the down arrow and select the column on which to base the criteriadefinition.

Operator Click the down arrow and select the operator. Valid values are = (equal),<> (not equal), > (greater than), >= (greater then and equal to), < (lessthan), <= (less than and equal to), Like, Between, or In.

Data Values (no label) Click the down arrow and select the value to apply to the operator -or-manually enter the value if it is not in the drop down list.

Criteria Results (no label) Displays the selection criteria definition. Manually modify the criteria asnecessary.

3. When all criteria fields are entered, select one of the following options:Add into Criteria - adds the criteria.Or into Criteria - adds the criteria as an 'OR' statement. And into Criteria - adds the criteria as an 'AND' statement.

4. Repeat the process until all criteria is specified.

5. To save all changes and close the panel, click OK.


12.3.2 Manage Method Parameters

For Custom Table Loads using a data service source database, the Manage Parameters for Method panel is used todefine a smaller subset of data for uploading.

1. From the Custom Table Loads - Tables to Transfer tab, click in the Criteria field for the desired table (method). The Manage Parameters for Method panel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the Manage Parameters for Method panel.

Field Description

Parameter Displays the parameter name.

Required Displays Required or Not Required, indicating whether a value must bespecified for the parameter.

Parm Usage Displays Variable or Fixed, indicating whether the parameter value may bemodified by the user.

Filter Type Displays the filter to be applied to the parameter value. Equal is the onlyfilter type currently supported by MRI.

Value For variable Parm Usage fields, if desired or required, specify theparameter value to be used for processing.For fixed Parm Usage fields, displays the parameter value to be used whenprocessing.

3. To save all changes and close the panel, click OK.



12.3.3 Custom Views

The Custom Views feature is used to create and maintain user-defined views for defining a subset of data to beuploaded. If desired, when creating a custom view, a saved query (.edq) may be used.

Note: When creating a Custom View for a SAP source database, a saved query (.edq) must be used.Custom Views do not function for a data service source database.

To Add a New Custom View -- Without Using a Saved Query:1. From the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab, click New. The Custom View Management panel appears.

2. Specify a unique name for the custom view and click OK. The Query Build panel appears.


3. Use the table to enter data on the Query Builder - Tables tab.

Field Description

Available Tables Displays a list of tables available for selection.To add a table to the query, select the table in the window and click the

insert button ( ) -or- double click the table. Repeat the process asnecessary.

Tables in This Query Displays a list of tables selected to be used in the query.To remove a single table from the query, select the table in the window

and click the remove button ( ) -or- double click the table.

To remove all tables from the query, click the remove all button ( ).

Button Function

Options Displays the Table Options panel, allowing the user to select whether touse literals on all table and column names, to display tables and/or views,and to include schema in the Available Tables list.

Refresh Refreshes the list of available tables.



4. Use the table to enter data on the Query Builder - Joins tab.

Note: The Joins tab is only available when multiple tables are selected on the Tables tab.

Field Description

Left Click the down arrow and select the field or expression on which to basethe join definition.

Operator Click the down arrow and select the operator to be applied.

Right Click the down arrow and select the field or expression on which to basethe join definition.

Join Includes Specify the appropriate join type. By default an inner join is selected,which includes only records where the joined fields from both tables arethe same. Additional options are available to join all records from the lefttable and only records in the right table where the joined fields match, or tojoin all records from the right table and only records in the left table wherethe joined fields match.

Joins in Query Displays join definitions.

Button Function

Add Adds the join definition to the Joins in Query window.

Edit Opens the Edit Join panel for the selected join, allowing the user tomaintain the join definition.

Remove Removes the selected join from the Joins in Query window.


5. Use the table to enter data on the Query Builder - Columns tab.

Field Description

Available Tables and Columns Displays a list of tables and columns available for selection.To add a table or column to the query, select the table or column in the

window and click the insert button ( ) -or- double click the table orcolumn. Repeat the process as necessary.

Note: Do not select image type columns, as Custom Views do not supportthe transfer of this type of data.

Columns in This Query Displays a list of columns selected to be used in the query. To remove a single column from the query, select the column in the

window and click the remove button ( ) -or- double click the column.

To remove all columns from the query, click the remove all button ( ).

Use Group By If selected, an additional parameter appears in the Columns in This Querywindow, allowing the user to specify group by / totaling criteria for eachcolumn.

Button Function

Add Custom Opens the Add Custom Column panel, allowing the user to assign acustom column to the query.

Edit Column Opens the Add Custom Column panel for the selected custom column,allowing the user to maintain the criteria for the custom column.



6. Use the table to enter data on the Query Builder - Criteria tab.

Field Description

Field/Express Click the down arrow and select the field or expression on which to basethe criteria definition.

Operator Click the down arrow and select the operator to be applied.

Value Click the down arrow and select the value type, then click the down arrowand select the value to apply to the operator.

Criteria in Query Displays the selection criteria definition.

Button Function

Add Criteria: And / Or Adds the criteria using either an 'AND' or 'OR' statement.

Edit Opens the Edit Criteria panel for the selected criteria entry, allowing theuser to maintain the criteria.

Remove Removes the selected criteria entry from the Criteria in Query window.

7. When all criteria fields are entered, select one of the following Add Criteria options:And - adds the criteria as an 'AND' statement.Or - adds the criteria as an 'OR' statement.

8. Repeat the process until all criteria is specified.

9. When all Custom View criteria is entered, select one of the following options:Preview Now - displays the data selected based upon the custom view.View SQL - displays the custom view SQL statement. Note: If desired, click View SQL and manually paste the query SQL text on the Query Builder panel. OK - updates the custom view, closes the panel and returns to the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab.Cancel - aborts the process, closes the panel and returns to the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab.


To Add a New Custom View -- Using a Saved Query:Note: Prior to using this feature, ensure that the desired query has been created and saved via Query Designer. Fields

not flagged as visible in the query will not be included as columns in the custom view.

1. From the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab, click New. The Custom View Management panel appears.

2. Specify a unique name for the custom view, select the Use Saved Query (.edq) check box and click OK. TheOpen panel appears.

3. Select the desired saved query (.edq) to be used for the custom view and click Open. If parameters exist for theselected query, then the Change Parameters panel appears, otherwise the Define Table Structure panel appears.

4. If necessary, change the query parameter value(s) to be used for the custom view and click OK. The Define TableStructure panel appears.



5. Define the various criteria for columns in the table to be used for the custom view (i.e. target column name, datatype, size, decimal, primary key, indexes) and click OK. The custom view is added to the grid on the CustomTable Loads - Custom Views tab.

Note: See Define Table Structure for more information. When using a saved query (.edq) to create a custom view,the Include option is disabled on the Define Table Structure panel and the incremental updating feature doesnot apply.


To Maintain Existing Custom Views:1. Access the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab. A list of existing custom views appears in the Build

Views grid.

2. To include or exclude a custom view in the load process, select or deselect the Include option for the customview accordingly.

3. To modify the query for a custom view, select the view in the Build Views list and click Edit -orclick in theQuery field for the desired view.

If the view is NOT based upon a saved query, then the Query Build panel appears. Make the necessarymodifications and click OK.If the view is based upon a saved query, then the Open panel appears. Select the desired query and click Open,then modify the query parameter values as necessary and click OK.

4. To modify the various criteria for target table columns, click in the Primary Key or Indexed Column field for thedesired view. The Defined Table Structure panel appears. Change the necessary data (i.e. target column name,data type, size, decimal, primary key, indexes, incremental values) and then click OK.

Note: See Define Table Structure for more information. The Include option is disabled on the Define TableStructure panel for custom views, and the incremental updating feature does not apply when using a savedquery (.edq) to create a custom view.

5. To modify query parameter values being used for a custom view, click in the Parameters field for the desiredview. The Change Parameters panel appears. Modify the parameter values as necessary and click OK.

Note: The Parameters field displays the literal 'Click to Edit', indicating that a saved query is being used andparameters exist for the custom view. The literal 'None' appears, indicating that a save query is being used,but no parameters exists. The field is blank when a saved query is not being used for the custom view.

6. To copy an existing custom view, select the view in the Build Views list and click Copy. The Custom ViewManagement panel appears. Specify a unique name for the custom view and click OK. The new custom view isadded to the Build Views list.

7. To delete an existing custom view, select the view in the Build Views list and click Remove.



12.4 Load Local INF

The Load Local INF profile type is used to download account balance information from Infinium into local databasesallowing for optimized calculation speeds.

To Create/Maintain a Load Local INF Job:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local INF - Job - Load Local tab.

Field Description



Database Location:

Database Type Click the down arrow and select whether to load the the data into a SQLServer or MS Access type database.

SQL Connection When using a SQL Server database type, click the down arrow and selectthe connection to be used for connecting to the database. The list onlydisplays SQL Server connections which are flagged as load localconnections and to which the user is authorized.

Local Database FilesLocation (Local .accdb)

When using a MS Access database type, key the path or use the Browsebutton to select the location for the local database files.

Copy Loaded Database To When using a MS Access database type, if desired, key the path or usethe Browse button to select the location to which to copy the loaded localdatabase files.

Results Window (no label) Displays a list of what has been downloaded to the database.


2. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local INF - Ledger Selections tab.

Field Description

Library Specify the library from which to retrieve data.

From Year Click the down arrow and select the from reporting year.

To Year Click the down arrow and select the to reporting year.

Account Mask Specify the account mask(s) for which to retrieve balances. If notspecified, balances are retrieved for all accounts. When entering anaccount mask each segment of the account string must be keyed anddelimited by a dash (i.e. 00060-51-1110-123). Account segments may bea single value, mask (wildcard), range, value list or segment list.

To add an account mask, key the account mask in the field and clickthe Add button.To remove an account mask, select the desired account mask in the listand click the Remove button.To remove all account masks, click the Clear All button.To retrieve account masks from the Configurator for the current user,click the Profile button.

Note: Regardless of the Account Masks defined for loading the localdatabase, normal user security applies when using Spreadsheet Server.

Account Mask SQL Displays the SQL statement to be used to retrieve the account mask(s).

Data Replacement Option Specify when downloading data whether to find and replace downloadedrecords for only the year and type being processed, to find and replacerecords for only the accounts defined in the Account Mask section on theLedger Selections tab, or clear all data for the selected library.



Field Description

Year and Ledger to Include This list displays the available year(s)/ledger(s) based upon the selectioncriteria entered, and is used to select the desired year(s)/ledger(s) to bedownloaded.

To populate the list, complete all selection criteria above and then clickthe Populate Selection List button. To filter data in the list, enter the desired value in the appropriate columnfilter field.To select year(s), click the associated Include check box.To select all years, click the Select All button. To deselect all selected years, click the Unselect All button.

Records to be Loaded Based upon the selected years/ledgers, the system displays the numberof records to be loaded.



12.5 Load Local JDE

The Load Local JDE profile type is used to download account balance information from JD Edwards into localdatabases allowing for optimized calculation speeds.

To Create/Maintain a Load Local JDE Job:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local JDE - Job - Load Local tab.

Field Description



Database Location:

Database Type Click the down arrow and select whether to load the the data into a SQLServer or MS Access type database.

SQL Connection When using a SQL Server database type, click the down arrow and selectthe connection to be used for connecting to the database. The list onlydisplays SQL Server connections which are flagged as load localconnections and to which the user is authorized.

Local Database FilesLocation (Local .accdb)

When using a MS Access database type, key the path or use the Browsebutton to select the location for the local database files.

Copy Loaded Database To When using a MS Access database type, if desired, key the path or usethe Browse button to select the location to which to copy the loaded localdatabase files.

Results Window (no label) Displays a list of what has been downloaded to the database.



2. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local JDE - Ledger Selections tab.

Field Description

Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration from which toretrieve data. The list only displays configurations to which the user isauthorized.Note: When the selected host configuration uses <Sign-On>, the user is prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected.

From Year Click the down arrow and select the from reporting year.

To Year Click the down arrow and select the to reporting year.

Specific Ledger Types If desired, specify the ledger type(s) for which to retrieve balances. Whenselecting multiple types separate the types by a comma (i.e. AA,BA,CU).

Summarize Balances by CO,BU, OBJ, and SUB

If selected, account balances are summarized when the load is executed.

Use Weekly F0902B forSelections

If selected, account balances are retrieved from the Weekly F0902B file.


Field Description

Account Mask Specify the account mask(s) for which to retrieve balances. If notspecified, balances are retrieved for all accounts. When entering anaccount mask each segment of the account string must be keyed anddelimited by a dash (i.e. 00060-51-1110-123). Account segments may bea single value, mask (wildcard), range, value list or segment list.

To add an account mask, key the account mask in the field and clickthe Add button.To remove an account mask, select the desired account mask in the listand click the Remove button. To remove all account masks, click the Clear All button. To retrieve account masks from the Configurator for the current user,click the Profile button.

Note: Regardless of the Account Masks defined for loading the localdatabase, normal user security applies when using Spreadsheet Server.

Account Mask SQL Displays the SQL statement to be used to retrieve the account mask(s).

Data Replacement Option Specify when downloading data whether to find and replace downloadedrecords for only the year and type being processed, to find and replacerecords for only the accounts defined in the Account Mask section on theLedger Selections tab, or clear all data for the selected Configuration.

3. The Load Local JDE - Performance Indexes tab lists the available business unit and object account categorycodes, and allows for the user to select up to a maximum 22 of the most popular category codes used inSpreadsheet Server formulas. The system creates special indexes for the selected category codes, and usesthese indexes to reduce the time required to process spreadsheet calculations.




12.6 Workbook Automation

The Workbook Automation profile type is used to process writebacks for Budget Accelerator workbooks or to performworkbook generation for Spreadsheet Analyst reports.

Note: Workbook Automation is only available if the user is licensed to both Spreadsheet Server and BudgetAccelerator -or- if the user is licensed to Spreadsheet Analyst.

To Create/Maintain a Workbook Automation Job:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Workbook Automation - Job tab.

Field Description




Field Description

Select the Workbooks toProcess:

This section indicates the workbooks and/or folder of workbooks to beincluded in the run.

To add workbooks to the job, specify the default values, click the AddWorkbook(s) button, navigate to and select the desired workbook(s), andthen click the Open button.To add a folder of workbooks to the job, specify the default values, clickthe Add Folder button, navigate to and select the desired folder, andthen click the Open button.To edit a workbook or folder, select the item in the window, and doubleclick -orclick the Edit button. The Edit dialog box appears. Changethe name/path (e.g. assign a mask/wild card) and click OK.To remove a workbook or folder, select the item in the window, and clickthe Remove button.To control the order of worksheets or folders in the list, select the item inthe window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move the item upor down in the list.

Include (no label) If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are processedwhen the job is run.

Workbook Name Displays the name of the workbook or folder assigned to the job.

Start Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run prior to refreshing,generating and/or writing back the workbook(s).

Refresh If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are refreshedusing the replacement data on the Range Name Replacement tab duringthe run process.

Writeback If selected, budget and/or actual records from Budget Accelerator budgetworkbook(s) are uploaded to the budget database during the run process.

End Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run after refreshing,generating and/or writing back the workbook(s).

Sub Folders If selected, all workbooks in the sub folders of the path specified areprocessed when the job is run.

Include Default Specify the default Include value to be assigned when a workbook and/orfolder is added to the job.

Refresh Default Specify the default Refresh value to be assigned when a workbook and/orfolder is added to the job.

Writeback Default Specify the default Writeback value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the job..

Sub Folders Default Specify the default Sub Folder to be assigned when a workbook and/orfolder is added to the job.

Start Macro Default Specify the default Start Macro value to be assigned when a workbookand/or folder is added to the job.

End Macro Default Specify the default End Macro value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the job.

Halt on Error If selected, when running the profile if an error is encountered the systemstops processing the job. Otherwise, the system continues processingthe next item in the job list.



Button Function


2. Use the table to enter data on the Workbook Automation - Writeback Settings tab.

Field Description

Database If desired, click the down arrow and select the named connection for thedatabase to be used for retrieving budget version, fiscal year and writebackselections available on the panel.Note: This selection does not control the database used during thewriteback process.

Override Values

Budget Version If desired, click the down arrow and select the budget version to assign asthe budget version during the writeback process.

Fiscal Year If desired, click the down arrow and select the fiscal year to assign as thebudget year during the writeback process.

Writeback Selection The following options are only available when a database is selected. If adatabase is not selected, then 'All' is assumed.

All / All Non-Express / AllExpress / Selected

When a database is selected, specify whether to process all writebacks inthe budget database, only non-express writebacks, only expresswritebacks, or only selected writebacks. The option selected determinesthe writebacks listed in the grid.


Field Description

Writeback List Displays a list of writebacks and associated their budget model namebased upon the database and writeback selection option specified. Whenthe writeback option is set to Selected, the Include column appears,allowing the user to select which writebacks to process.

3. Use the table to enter data on the Workbook Automation - Range Name Replacement tab

Field Description

Range Name Replacement: This section indicates the ranges in the selected workbooks to be replacedwith designated values.

To display a list of range names in the workbooks assigned to the job,click the Refresh button.To modify values, select the line in the window and make the appropriatechange(s).To remove a range from the list, select the item in the window, and clickthe Remove button.To clear all ranges from the list, click the Clear button.

Range Name Specify the name of the range to be replaced.

Replacement Value Specify the value to be placed in the associated range.

Button Function





12.7 Schedule Job

The Schedule tab allows the user to define various options as to when to execute the job. As Profile Scheduler workswith the Windows Task Scheduler, when scheduling and running jobs various user right assignments and set upconditions may be required based upon the profile type and process (see Profile Scheduler Overview).

Note: Ensure all preceding steps have been completed prior to entering data on the Schedule tab.

To Create/Maintain the Schedule for a Job:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Schedule tab.

Field Description

Not Scheduled / Scheduled /Run Once

Specify whether or not to schedule the execution of the job. Appropriateprocessing fields become input capable based upon the option selected.

Externally Managed If selected, indicates that the scheduled job has been changed via theWindows Task Scheduler function. When this option is selected,scheduling criteria fields on the panel are disabled.Note: This feature is not applicable in a Windows XP environment.

Start Date Click the down arrow and select the date to start the job.

Start Time Click the down arrow and select the time to start the job.


Field Description

Daily: Daily is used for multiple daily consecutive job runs. This option requiresthe user to assign a Start Date, Start Time, and Every specified number ofDays or Hours.Note: When using Hours, the system begins with the Start Time and addsthe number of hours up until midnight to create the scheduled jobs.

Weekly: Weekly is used for multiple job runs for one or more days on a consecutivenumber of weeks. This option requires the user to assign a Start Date,Start Time, and Every specified number of Weeks for each selectedWeekday.

Monthly: Monthly is used for multiple job runs for a specific day of each selectedmonth. This option requires the user to assign a Start Date, Start Time,the specific week and day of the week for each selected Month -or- Days(specific day of the month). Note: In a Windows XP environment, when using the Days option only oneday may be selected for scheduling the job.

Windows Credentials: Note: Does not apply to Distribution Manager jobs.

Allow Job to Run While LoggedOff

If selected, the scheduled job may be run while the user is logged off thePC.

User Name Specify the user ID to be used for the scheduled job.Note: In a Windows XP environment, the user name is required whenscheduling a job.

Password Specify the password to be used for the scheduled job. The systemretains the password entered until the Schedule panel is redisplayed.Note: In a Windows XP environment, the password is required whenscheduling a job.



2. If scheduling a job which contains mapped drives, proceed to the next step Define Mapped Drives.

3. Click OK. The system adds/updates the job and, if appropriate, adds the job to the Windows Task Scheduler.

Note: When the scheduled date and time are reached, the program reconnects to the host and initiates the job.Scheduled jobs require the PC to be powered on; however, the user does not have to be signed into theoperating system.Scheduled jobs may be altered via Profile Scheduler or Windows Task Scheduler; however, they may only bestopped or deleted via the Task Scheduler. For Windows 7 environments and above, the Task Scheduler mayaccessed from the Profile Scheduler panel by selecting Task Scheduler from the ribbon.


12.8 Define Mapped Drives

The Mapped Drive tab allows the user to define the mapped drives to be created temporarily when a scheduled job isbeing processed. Mapped drives used in any part of the process, including Distribution Manager and SpreadsheetServer, must be defined.

To Create/Maintain Mapped Drives for a Job:

1. Use the table to enter data on the Mapped Drive tab.

Field Description

Drive Click the down arrow and select the letter to be assigned to the mappeddrive.

Folder Key the path or use the Browse button to select the desired folder locationfor the mapped drive.

2. Click OK. The system adds/updates the job.



12.9 Miscellaneous PS Items

12.9.1 PS Settings

The Settings function panel allows the user to define various criteria to control processing in Profile Scheduler.

1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select File and then click Settings. The Profile Scheduler Settings - Generalpanel appears.

2. Use the table to enter data on the General panel.

Field Description

General Options:

Process Timeout (minutes) Specify the maximum time (in minutes) allowed for a job to run.

Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, oncean error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and de-select the option (see PS View Log).


3. Use the table to enter data on the Custom Table Loads panel.

Field Description

Data Replacement ThresholdOptions:

Number of Existing TargetRows

Specify the minimum number of rows which must exist in the target tablein order for the system to determine whether or not to change the updateorder for more efficient processing (see Note 1).

Percent of New Rows toExisting Target Rows

Specify the minimum percent of new rows to existing target rows whichmust exist in order for the system to determine whether or not to changethe update order for more efficient processing (see Note 1).

Note 1: When processing a Custom Table Load job in update mode (i.e. Replace Data option is not selected), the system copies the

appropriate rows from the source table to a temporary table, then copies all rows from the target table which are not already in

the temporary table to the temporary table, and then deletes the target table and renames the temporary table to the new target

table. When the number of rows in the target table are far greater than the number of rows in the temporary table, this method

is inefficient. If the tables exceed the data replacement threshold options specified, then the system will change the update

direction and move the temporary table rows into the target table instead of moving the target table rows to the temporary table.






12.9.2 PS View Log

During the running a job, various logging information is recorded. Log entries may be viewed, copied or emailed.

1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Log tab. The Log panel appears displaying the level, date, time,profile type, job name, action, and description for each log entry.

2. To display the full description of a log entry, select the desired entry in the list. The full description appears at thebottom of the panel.

3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log panel first select the desired record(s) and then from theribbon select Copy Errors:

To copy a single record -- select the desired record.To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list.To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, andselect the last record in the range.

4. To email the entire error log to the help desk, from the ribbon select Email Log. The system opens a new Outlookemail panel with the error log attached. Modify the email address and/or text of the email body as necessary andclick the Send button.

5. To filter the entries in the log file, select the desired level(s), containing text, or date/time range in the Filtersections. The system displays only entries matching the selection criteria. From the ribbon select Clear Filter toreset all filter fields to their default value.

6. To search for a specific value in the log file, key the desired value in the Search For field and then from the ribbonselect Find Next. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Select Find Next again, to find thenext occurrence of the selected value.

7. To clear the log file, from the ribbon select Clear Log.



12.9.3 Database Management

The Database Management tab is used for listing and maintaining tables and indexes for SQL Server load localdatabases, including importing legacy Infinium or JDE load local access databases into SQL Server load localdatabases. In addition, user-specified queries may be run against the database (this feature is password protected). Auser's ability to access the Database Management tab is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings inthe Configurator. Contact Global for more information.



Index- @ -@ field 57, 63, 321

- A -account

balance 21

balance drill down 84, 85, 86, 87

detail journal lines drill down 92

generate audit trail 105

journal drill down 89

journal entry line drill down 91

locate segment 63

multiple columns drill down 88

security 95

segment mapping 202

segment syntax 57

subsystem detail drill down 93

account master

list 97

accounts profile 95

ad hoc drill down 78, 94

ad hoc queries 334

add

fields 272, 296, 297, 298

image type field 298

relationships 294

smart parms 322

tables 292

Add Calculated Field 274, 302

Add Field Descriptions as Aliases 274, 300

Add Smart Parm for This Field 274, 322

add-in

Distributor 360

register 10

address book

cache 366

local address list 367

address book profile type 409

Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) 274, 300

alias field name 300

alias table name 271

Analyst

build a template - GXL 117

GXD 120

GXL 118

settings 116

sign on 114

assign query 327

audit trail 105

auto generate 281

autosize grid columns 78

average 329

- B -BPCS


GSV 132

GXA 133

GXD 131

GXL 129

load local database 136

sign on 121

BPCS 4.05

settings 122

BPCS 6.02

settings 124

BPCS 6.04

settings 126

build a template

GEXD 221

GEXI 221

GEXQ 221

GEXS 221

GXE 42

GXL 42

GXL - Analyst 117

GXL - BPCS 128

GXL - Data Warehouse 139

GXL - Designer GL 146

GXL - Infinium 151

GXL - Jack Henry 160

GXL - JD Edwards 167

GXL - Lawson 183

GXL - Movex 189

GXL - Oracle 197

GXL - PeopleSoft 206

GXL - SAP 213

GXL using clear/do not clear worksheet 47

Index 448


build a template

GXL using insert column data only 48

GXL using shift worksheet data 49

parameter lookup 327

SAP queries (SQ00) 226

SAP T-Codes 226

single API method 374

SWB generic tables 385

SWB Oracle APIs 373

template method 377

build select query 418

builder

calculated fields 302, 303

CASE builder 307

comments 275

custom buttons 278

date fields 305

get values 314

GEXD row function 312

hard coded criteria 316

panel 275

smart parms 322

Builder sheet 378

- C -cache

global 75

local 73

cache address book 366

calculated fields 302, 303, 305, 307, 312

calculation options 72

disable/enable 77

global cache 75

local cache 73

CASE builder 307

Change Database/Library 271, 320

Change Table Owner 271

collapse GL row 59, 61

comments syntax 275

components 7

configurator 7

connections 288

browse/set 382

remove 390

update query 289

control panel 21

convert date fields 275, 305

copy grid records 78, 81

copy grid records with layout 82

count 329

criteria 273, 316, 318

get values 314

custom buttons 275, 278

custom layouts

editor 246

remove from GEXD formula 248

remove from workbook 248

custom table loads profile type 413

build select query 418

custom views 420

manage method parameters 419

custom views 420

customize grid layout 78

- D -data rows 379, 388

data validation 108

Data Warehouse


GXD 142

GXL 140

settings 138

sign on 137

database management 446

date fields 305

Define Table Structure panel 416

Delete Field(s) 274

Designer GL


GXL 147

settings 144

sign on 143

disable formula calculations 77

distribute

all 357

group 357

selected 357

Distribution Control worksheet

create 347


Distribution Manager profile type 410

Distributor

add-in 360

formula assistant 363



Distributor

narrative reporting 360

preview 364

distributor (local) email list 367

Distributor ribbon 362

DM ribbon 341

DM right click context menu 342

DM settings 343

DM view log 368

drill down

ad hoc 78, 94

detail journal lines 92

detailed account balances 84

expand by segment 86

general grid features 78

group by segment 85

GXSALES 177

journal entry lines 91

journals 89

multiple column account balances 88

sub queries 78

subsystem detail 93

summarized account balances 87

- E -Edit Calculated Field 274, 302

EDQ files 268

enable formula calculations 77

error log

DM 368

PS 445

QD 339

SS 109

SWB 405

Excel

GL formulas 41

query formulas 220

execute query(s) 333

execution variants 226, 251

expand detail reports

account detail 98, 99

journal detail 102

expand GL row 59

expand GL row by segment 61

Explorer File System panel 268

export grid records 78, 81

export grid records with layout 82

expr1 303

expression 329

- F -FASTR report conversion 179

field list 297, 298, 331

builder 275

hard coded criteria 316

menu 274

panel 273

fields 274, 305

add 297, 298

alias name 300

calculated 302, 303, 305, 307, 312

convert dates 275, 305

delete 274

image type 298

move 274

select/create 296

summary 331

file system 268

filter grid records 78

first 329

fixed asset balances

JD Edwards 178

formula 41, 220, 317

disable/enable calculations 77

Distributor 363

GEXD 229, 237

GEXD custom layout 246

GEXI 229, 257

GEXQ 229, 234

GEXS 229, 254

GSV 132

GXA 133

GXC 50

GXD 50

GXE 50, 98, 99, 102

GXL 50, 56

GXSALES 170, 175

segment syntax 57

SSLDESC 70

upgrade workbook 112

using hierarchy values 69

using segment lists 69

formula assistant 50, 229, 324, 363

GXL - JD Edwards 168

Index 450


formula assistant 50, 229, 324, 363

GXSALES - JD Edwards 170

functions

user defined 113

- G -generate account detail 105

generic tables

browse/set database 382

build a template 385

data rows 388

delete data 404

delete Writeback definition 391

preview writebacks 397

remove connection 390

run writebacks 396, 401

validate writebacks 399

Writeback example 389

writeback setup 381

get values 314

GEXD 220, 221, 229, 237

custom layout 246

query function 249

row function 312

sample target range 242

sample target table 244


SAP T-Codes 226, 251

GEXD limit 328

GEXI 220, 221, 229, 257


GEXQ 220, 221, 229, 234

control panel 21

GEXQ (Summary) Field 274, 331

GEXS 220, 221, 229, 254

lookup function 260


GL reporting 2

global cache 75

grid features 78, 81, 82

group by 273, 274, 329

group grid records 78

GSV 132

GXA

BPCS 133

GXC 41, 50

GXD 41, 50

Analyst 120

BPCS 131

Data Warehouse 142

Infinium 156

Jack Henry 163

JD Edwards 173

Lawson 186

Movex 192

Oracle 201

PeopleSoft 209

SAP 218

GXE 41, 42, 50, 98

account detail 99

journal detail 102

GXL 41, 42, 50, 56

Analyst 117, 118

BPCS 128, 129

build a template - clear/do not clear worksheet 47

build a template - insert column data only 48

build a template - shift worksheet data 49

Data Warehouse 139, 140

Designer GL 146, 147

expand/collapse GL row 59

expand/collapse GL row by segment 61

Infinium 151, 153

Jack Henry 160, 161

JD Edwards 167, 168, 171

Lawson 183, 184

list accounts 58

Movex 189, 190

Oracle 197, 199

PeopleSoft 206, 207

SAP 213, 214

using hierarchy values 69

using segment lists 69

GXSALES

drill down 177

JD Edwards 170, 175

- H -hide zero balance rows 106

hierarchy value 57, 63

using in GXL 69

host server

reset connection 107



- I -image type field 298

IN statement 314

Infinium


GXD 156

GXL 153

load local profile type 428

settings 150

sign on 149

introduction 1

- J -Jack Henry


GXD 163

GXL 161

settings 158

sign on 157

JD Edwards


FASTR report conversion 179

fixed asset balances 178

formula assistant - GXL 168

formula assistant - GXSALES 170

GXD 173

GXL 171

GXSALES 175

load local profile type 431

settings 165

sign on 164

writeback data rows 395

writeback select orchestration 393

writeback set line type 395

writeback setup 392

joins 270, 294, 420

journal detail lines drill down 92

journal drill down 89

journal entry line drill down 91

- L -last 329

Lawson


GXD 186

GXL 184

settings 182

sign on 181

legacy ad hoc queries 334

list accounts

account master 97

in GXL formula 58

segment list 71

load local database

BPCS 136

load local profile type

Infinium 428

JD Edwards 431

Loader sheet 379

local address list 367

local cache 73

locate segment 63

Log Viewer

DM 368

PS 445

QD 339

SS 109

SWB 405

lookup function 260

- M -maintain specifications 347

manage method parameters 419

manual mode 281, 332

mask 57, 321

max 329

merge data 358

method parameters 280

min 329

Move Field 274

Movex


GXD 192

GXL 190

settings 188

sign on 187

Index 452


- N -narrative reporting 360

preview 364

navigation 12, 264, 340

Distributor ribbon 362

DM ribbon 341

DM right click context menu 342

QD ribbon 264

SS ribbon 13

SS right click context menu 18

SWB ribbon 370

- O -optional components


Profile Scheduler 7

Oracle


GXD 201

GXL 199

segment mappping 202

settings 195

sign on 193

Oracle APIs

build a template 373

Builder sheet 378

Loader sheet 379




template method 377

validate writebacks 399

writeback setup 372

overview


GL reporting 2

Profile Scheduler 6

Query/Query Designer 3


- P -Panel

Define Table Structure 416

parameters 317, 318

Excel 317, 320, 324

GEXD limit 328

method 280

query 279

Query Designer 317, 318, 320

smart parms 321, 322

standard 318, 320

PeopleSoft


GXD 209

GXL 207

settings 205

sign on 203

Preview Data 272, 274, 299

preview narrative reporting 364


Profile Scheduler 6, 407

database management 446

mapping drives 441

scheduling jobs 438

profile type

address book cache 409

custom table loads 413


load local INF 428

load local JDE 431

Workbook Automation 434

PS settings 442

PS view log 445

- Q -QD ribbon 264

QD settings 284

QD view log 339

query 3

ad hocs 334

add relationships 294

add tables 292

assign lookup 327

clone 269, 335

control panel 21

create 290

custom layout 246

definition 337

delete 269, 335

description 269, 335



query 3

detail 237, 257

download 261, 336

execute GEXD 237, 249, 333

execute GEXI 257

execute GEXQ 21, 234, 333

execute GEXS 254, 260

execute multiples 333

function 249

lock/unlock 335

parameters 279, 280

refresh 220

save 291

select value 254

select/create fields 296

send to Query Exchange 336

settings 25

SmartPak 269

sub query column 325

summary 234

Query Designer 3, 263

Query Exchange

download query 261, 336

send query 336

Query View panel 270

QuickText panel 282

- R -range 57, 321

refresh

queries 220

SAP T-Codes 251

segment lists 65

Refresh Field Names from Database 271

register add-in 10

relationships 270, 294

Remove Alias 271

remove SPEC 364

required components 7

reset host server connection 107

re-sort grid columns 78

restore hidden rows 106

results container 333

ribbon

Distributor 362

DM 341

QD 264

SS 13

SWB 370

right click context menu

DM 342

SS 18

rows

expand/collapse 59, 61

hide/restore 106


- S -SAP


GXD 218

GXL 214

secondary database connection 144, 283

settings 211

sign on 210

SAP panel 283

SAP queries (SQ00) 220, 226

SAP T-Code function 251

SAP T-Codes 220, 226

execute GEXD 251

refresh 251

security account profile 95

segment lists 57, 321

create/maintain 65

description 70

refresh 65

upgrade 111

using in GXL 69

view values 71

segment mapping 202

segment syntax 57

select orchestration 393

select SPEC 364

set line type 395

Set Table Alias 271

settings

Analyst 116

BPCS 4.05 122

BPCS 6.02 124

BPCS 6.04 126

Data Warehouse 138

Designer GL 144

DM 343

Infinium 150

Index 454


settings

Jack Henry 158

JD Edwards 165

Lawson 182

Movex 188

Oracle 195

PeopleSoft 205

PS 442

QD 284

query 25

SAP 211

SS 25

Writeback 25

sheduling jobs 438

SHELL function 281, 332

sign on 20

Analyst 114

BPCS 121

Data Warehouse 137

Designer GL 143

enable formula calculations 77

Infinium 149

Jack Henry 157

JD Edwards 164

Lawson 181

Movex 187

Oracle 193

PeopleSoft 203

reset host server connection 107

SAP 210


single value 254, 321

smart parms 254, 322

entry criteria 321

SmartPak 269

sort 273

SPEC

remove 364

select 364

specification rows 347

add 355

copy 355

maintain 356

Spreadsheet Writeback

(see Writeback) 5

SQL text 331, 332

panel 281

SS ribbon 13

SS right click context menu 18

SS settings 25

SS validation 108

SS view log 109

SSLDESC 41, 70

standard deviation 329

sub queries 78

sub query column 325

subsystem detail drill down 93

sum 329

summary fields 234, 331

SWB ribbon 370

SWB view log 405

syntax 321

account segments 57

method parameters 321

query parameters 321

- T -table field menu 272

table menu 271

tables 292

add 270

alias name 271

remove 271

select fields 297, 298, 303

T-Codes

(see SAP T-Codes) 226, 251

template method 377

textual 337

totals 273, 329

Totals (Group By) 274

trim 275, 294

- U -uninstall 11

Unique Rows 274

update query connections 289

upgrade segment list 111

upgrade workbook 112

user defined functions 113

- V -validate writebacks 399



validation lists 108

value 317, 318

as number 318

as string 318

value list 57, 321

variance 329

view account balances 21

view log

DM 368

PS 445

QD 339

SS 109

SWB 405

- W -where 329

wildcard 57, 321

Workbook Automation profile type 434

Writeback

browse/set database 382

Builder sheet 378

data rows 388

delete data 404

delete definition 391

generic tables definition 385

generic tables example 389

generic tables setup 381

JDE data rows 395

JDE select orchestration 393

JDE set line type 395

JDE setup 392

Loader sheet 379

Oracle API definition 373

Oracle API setup 372

preview 397

remove connection 390

run 396, 401

selected row(s) 397

settings 25


SWB ribbon 370

template method 377

validation 399

- Z -zero balance rows

hide/restore 106